advertisement
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
BCM50a
BCM50a Integrated Router
Document Number: N0115790
Document Version: 1.0
Date: September 2006
2
Copyright © Nortel 2005–2006
All rights reserved.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. The statements, configurations, technical data, and recommendations in this document are believed to be accurate and reliable, but are presented without express or implied warranty. Users must take full responsibility for their applications of any products specified in this document. The information in this document is proprietary to Nortel.
Trademarks
Nortel, Nortel (Logo), the Globemark, and This is the way, This is Nortel (Design mark) are trademarks of Nortel.
Microsoft, MS, MS-DOS, Windows, and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
All other trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Contents
Getting Help over the phone from a Nortel Solutions Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Getting Help from a specialist by using an Express Routing Code . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Getting to know your BCM50a Integrated Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Autonegotiating 10/100 Mb/s Ethernet LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Autosensing 10/100 Mb/s Ethernet LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
3
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
4 Contents
Brute force password guessing protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Network Address Translation (NAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Upgrade BCM50a Integrated Router Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Embedded FTP and TFTP Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Secure broadband internet access and VPN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Accessing the BCM50a Integrated Router WebGUI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
N0115790
Contents 5
IP assignment with PPPoA or PPPoE encapsulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
IP assignment with RFC 1483 encapsulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
IP assignment with ENET ENCAP encapsulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
6 Contents
Setting up the router when the system has a server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Connecting two sites to establish a virtual private network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Adding IP telephony to a multi-site network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Configuring the router to act as a Nortel VPN Server (Client Termination) . . . 71
Configuring the router to connect to a Nortel VPN Server (Client Emulation) . 71
Configuring the router to allow remote management of a LAN-connected BCM50
Preventing heavy data traffic from impacting telephone calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
N0115790
Contents 7
Network Address Translation (NAT) Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
8 Contents
Port forwarding: Services and Port Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Configuring servers behind SUA (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Two points to remember about Trigger Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Stateful inspection and the BCM50a Integrated Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
N0115790
Contents 9
Configuring source and destination addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
TCP maximum incomplete and blocking period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
10 Contents
ESP (Encapsulating Security Payload) protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
N0115790
Contents 11
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
12 Contents
Application and subnet based bandwidth management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Reserving bandwidth for nonbandwidth class traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
N0115790
Contents 13
Remote management screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
SSH implementation on the BCM50a Integrated Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
REMOTE MANAGEMENT: SNMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
14 Contents
Autodiscover Your UPnP-enabled Network Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
N0115790
Contents 15
Allowing Pop-up Windows, JavaScript and Java Permissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Enabling Pop-up Blockers with Exceptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Enable Pop-up Blockers with Exceptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Netscape Java Permissions and JavaScript . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
16 Contents
Configuring what you want the BCM50a Integrated Router to log . . . . . . . . . . . 431
N0115790
17
Figures
Figure 1 Secure Internet Access and VPN Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Figure 10 Internet connection with ENET ENCAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
18 Figures
Figure 39 Trigger Port Forwarding process: example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Figure 44 BCM50a Integrated Router firewall application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Figure 53 Adding or editing source and destination addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Figure 64 Transport and Tunnel mode IPSec encapsulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
N0115790
Figures 19
Figure 69 VPN Contivity Client advanced rule setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Figure 72 VPN Branch Office — IP Policy - Port Forwarding Server . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Figure 74 VPN Branch Office advanced rule setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Figure 78 VPN Client Termination IP pool summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Figure 96 Subnet based bandwidth management example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
20 Figures
Figure 116 Common BCM50a Integrated Router certificate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Figure 123 Secure FTP: Firmware Upload Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Figure 133 Add/Remove programs: Windows setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
N0115790
Figures 21
Figure 136 Windows optional networking components wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Figure 140 Internet connection properties advanced setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
22 Figures
Figure 183 Example VPN Responder IPSec Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
N0115790
23
Tables
Internet connection with PPPoA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Internet connection with RFC 1483 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Internet connection with ENET ENCAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Internet connection with PPPoE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Wizard: LAN configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
24 Tables
Table 38 Adding or editing source and destination addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Table 48 VPN Contivity Client advanced rule setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Table 51 Matching ID type and content configuration example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Table 52 Mismatching ID Type and Content Configuration Example . . . . . . . . . . 212
Table 55 VPN Branch Office — IP Policy - Port Forwarding Server . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Table 56 VPN Branch Office Advanced Rule Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Table 60 VPN Client Termination IP pool summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
N0115790
Tables 25
Table 75 Application and Subnet based Bandwidth Management Example . . . . . 293
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
26 Tables
Table 112 Troubleshooting the Start-Up of your BCM50a Integrated Router . . . . . 393
Table 117 Troubleshooting Web Site Internet Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Table 119 Troubleshooting Remote Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Table 130 Sample IPSec Logs During Packet Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Table 131 RFC 2408 ISAKMP Payload Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Table 133 Certificate Path Verification Failure Reason Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
N0115790
27
Preface
Before you begin
This guide assists you through the basic configuration of your BCM50a Integrated
Router for its various applications.
Note: This guide explains how to use the WebGUI to configure your
BCM50a Integrated Router. See for how to use the System Management
Terminal (SMT) or the command interpreter interface to configure your
BCM50a Integrated Router. Not all features can be configured through all interfaces.
The WebGUI parts of this guide contain background information on features configurable by the WebGUI and the SMT. For features not configurable by the
WebGUI, only background information is provided.
Text conventions
This guide uses the following text conventions:
Enter means type one or more characters and press the enter key. Select or
Choose means use one of the predefined choices.
The SMT menu titles and labels are written in Bold Times New Roman font.
The choices of a menu choices are written in Bold Arial font.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
28 Preface
A single keystroke is written in Arial font and enclosed in square brackets. For instance, [ENTER] means the Enter key; [ESC] means the escape key and
[SPACE BAR] means the space bar. [UP] and [DOWN] are the up and down arrow keys.
Mouse action sequences are denoted using a comma. For example, “click the
Apple icon, Control Panels and then Modem” means first click the Apple icon, then point your mouse pointer to Control Panels and then click Modem.
Related publications
• For more information about using the BCM50a Integrated Router, refer to the following publications:BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration —
Advanced (N0115789)
This guide covers how to use the SMT menu to configure your BCM50a
Integrated Router.
• WebGUI Online Help
Embedded WebGUI help is available to provide descriptions of individual screens and supplementary information.
Hard copy technical manuals
You can print selected technical manuals and release notes free, directly from the
Internet. Go to www.nortel.com/documentation . Find the product for which you need documentation. Then locate the specific category and model or version for your hardware or software product. Use Adobe Reader to open the manuals and release notes, search for the sections you need, and print them on most standard printers. Go to the Adobe Systems Web site at www.adobe.com
to download a free copy of Adobe Reader.
How to get Help
This section explains how to get help for Nortel products and services.
N0115790
Preface 29
Getting Help from the Nortel Web site
The best way to get technical support for Nortel products is from the Nortel
Technical Support Web site: www.nortel.com/support
This site provides quick access to software, documentation, bulletins, and tools to address issues with Nortel products. More specifically, the site enables you to:
• download software, documentation, and product bulletins
• search the Technical Support Web site and the Nortel Knowledge Base for answers to technical issues
• sign up for automatic notification of new software and documentation for
Nortel equipment
• open and manage technical support cases
Getting Help over the phone from a Nortel Solutions Center
If you don’t find the information you require on the Nortel Technical Support
Web site, and have a Nortel support contract, you can also get help over the phone from a Nortel Solutions Center.
In North America, call 1-800-4NORTEL (1-800-466-7835).
Outside North America, go to the following Web site to obtain the phone number for your region: www.nortel.com/callus
Getting Help from a specialist by using an Express Routing
Code
To access some Nortel Technical Solutions Centers, you can use an Express
Routing Code (ERC) to quickly route your call to a specialist in your Nortel product or service. To locate the ERC for your product or service, go to: www.nortel.com/erc
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
30 Preface
Getting Help through a Nortel distributor or reseller
If you purchased a service contract for your Nortel product from a distributor or authorized reseller, contact the technical support staff for that distributor or reseller.
N0115790
Chapter 1
Getting to know your BCM50a Integrated Router
31
This chapter introduces the main features and applications of the BCM50a
Integrated Router.
Introducing the BCM50a Integrated Router
The BCM50a Integrated Router is an ideal secure gateway for all data passing between the Internet and the Local Area Network (LAN).
Your BCM50a Integrated Router integrates high-speed 10/100 Megabits per second (Mb/s) autonegotiating LAN interfaces and a high-speed Asymmetrical
Digital Subscriber Line Plus (ADSL2+) port into a single package. The BCM50a
Integrated Router is ideal for high-speed Internet browsing and making
LAN-to-LAN connections to remote networks. By integrating Digital Subscriber
Line (DSL) and Network Address Translation (NAT), the BCM50a Integrated
Router provides easy installation and Internet access. By integrating firewall and
Virtual Private Network (VPN) capabilities, the BCM50a Integrated Router is a complete security solution that protects your Intranet and efficiently manages data traffic on your network.
Features
This section lists the key features of the BCM50a Integrated Router.
Table 1 Feature specifications
Feature
Number of static routes
Number of NAT sessions
Specification
12
4096
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
32 Chapter 1 Getting to know your BCM50a Integrated Router
Table 1 Feature specifications
Feature Specification
Number of SUA (Single User Account) servers
Number of address mapping rules
Number of configurable VPN rules (gateway policies)
Number of configurable IPSec VPN IP policies (network policies)
Number of concurrent IKE (Internet Key Exchange) Phase 1 Security
Associations:
These correspond to the gateway policies.
Number of concurrent IPSec VPN tunnels (Phase 2 Security
Associations):
These correspond to the network policies and are also monitorable and manageable. For example, 5 IKE gateway policies could each use 12
IPSec tunnels for a total of 60 phase 2 IPSec VPN tunnels. This total includes both branch office tunnels and VPN client-termination tunnels.
Number of IP pools that can be used to assign IP addresses to remote users for VPN client termination
60
3
Number of configurable split networks for VPN client termination 16
Number of configurable inverse split networks for VPN client termination 16
Number of configurable subnets per split network for VPN client termination
64
12
10
10
60
10
Physical features
High-speed Internet access
Your BCM50a Integrated Router supports ADSL2+ (Asymmetrical Digital
Subscriber Line) for high transmission speeds and long connection distances.
ADSL standards
• Multimode standard (ANSI (American National Standards Institute) T1.413,
Issue 2; G.dmt (G.992.1 Discrete Multitone Modulation)
• EOC (Embedded Operations Channel) specified in ITU-T
(Telecommunication Standardization Sector of the International
Telecommunications Union) G.992.1
• ADSL2 G.dmt.bis (G.992.3)
• ADSL2+ (G.992.5)
N0115790
Chapter 1 Getting to know your BCM50a Integrated Router 33
• Extended-reach ADSL (ER ADSL)
• SRA (Seamless Rate Adaptation)
• Autonegotiating rate adaptation
• ADSL physical connection ATM (Asynchronous Transfer Mode) AAL5
(Adaptation Layer type 5)·
• Multiprotocol over AAL5 (Request For Comments (RFC) 2684/1483)
• Support Point-to-Point-Protocol over ATM AAL5 (PPPoA) (RFC 2364)
• PPP over Ethernet support for DSL (Digital Subscriber Line) connection
(RFC 2516)
• Support Virtual Circuit (VC) based and LLC (Logical Link Control) based multiplexing
• Support OAM (Operational, Administration and Maintenance) VC Hunt
• I.610 F4/F5 OAM
Networking compatibility
Your BCM50a Integrated Router is compatible with the major ADSL Digital
Subscriber Line Access Multiplexer (DSLAM) providers, making configuration as simple as possible.
Multiplexing
The BCM50a Integrated Router supports VC-based and LLC-based multiplexing.
Encapsulation
The BCM50a Integrated Router supports PPPoA (RFC 2364 - PPP over ATM
Adaptation Layer 5), RFC 1483 encapsulation over ATM, MAC (Media Access
Control) encapsulated routing (ENET encapsulation) as well as PPP over Ethernet
(RFC 2516).
Four-Port switch
A combination of switch and router makes your BCM50a Integrated Router a cost-effective and viable network solution. You can connect up to four computers or phones to the BCM50a Integrated Router without the cost of a switch. Use a switch to add more than four computers or phones to your LAN.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
34 Chapter 1 Getting to know your BCM50a Integrated Router
Autonegotiating 10/100 Mb/s Ethernet LAN
The LAN interfaces automatically detect if they are on a 10 or a 100 Mb/s
Ethernet.
Autosensing 10/100 Mb/s Ethernet LAN
The LAN interfaces automatically adjust to either a crossover or straight through
Ethernet cable.
Time and date
Using the BCM50a Integrated Router, you can get the current time and date from an external server when you turn on your BCM50a Integrated Router. You can also set the time manually.
Reset button
There is a 'Cold Reset Router' button that is accessible from the Element Manager
Administration/Utilities/Reset page.Use this button to restore the factory default password to setup and the IP address to 192.168.1.1, subnet mask 255.255.255.0, and DHCP server enabled with a pool of 126 IP addresses starting at 192.168.1.2.
Nonphysical features
IPSec VPN capability
Establish Virtual Private Network (VPN) tunnels to connect home or office computers to your company network using data encryption and the Internet; thus providing secure communications without the expense of leased site-to-site lines.
VPN is based on the IPSec standard and is fully interoperable with other
IPSec-based VPN products.
Nortel Contivity Client Termination
The BCM50a Integrated Router supports VPN connections from computers using
Nortel Contivity VPN Client 3.0, 5.01, 5.11, 6.01, 6.02, or 7.01 software.
N0115790
Chapter 1 Getting to know your BCM50a Integrated Router 35
Certificates
The BCM50a Integrated Router can use certificates (also called digital IDs) to authenticate users. Certificates are based on public-private key pairs. Certificates provide a way to exchange public keys for use in authentication.
SSH
The BCM50a Integrated Router uses the SSH (Secure Shell) secure communication protocol to provide secure encrypted communication between two hosts over an unsecured network.
HTTPS
HyperText Transfer Protocol over Secure Socket Layer, or HTTP over SSL is a web protocol that encrypts and decrypts web sessions. Use HTTPS for secure
WebGUI access to the BCM50a Integrated Router.
Firewall
The BCM50a Integrated Router has a stateful inspection firewall with DoS
(Denial of Service) protection. By default, when the firewall is activated, all incoming traffic from the WAN (Wide Area Network) to the LAN is blocked unless it is initiated from the LAN. The BCM50a Integrated Router firewall supports TCP/UDP inspection, DoS detection and protection, real time alerts, reports and logs.
Brute force password guessing protection
The BCM50a Integrated Router has a special protection mechanism to discourage brute force password guessing attacks on the BCM50a Integrated Router management interfaces. You can specify a wait time that must expire before you can enter a fourth password after entering three incorrect passwords.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
36 Chapter 1 Getting to know your BCM50a Integrated Router
Content filtering
The BCM50a Integrated Router can block web features such as ActiveX controls,
Java applets, and cookies, as well as disable web proxies. The BCM50a Integrated
Router can block specific URLs by using the keyword feature. The administrator can also define time periods and days during which content filtering is enabled.
Packet filtering
The packet filtering mechanism blocks unwanted traffic from entering or leaving your network.
Universal Plug and Play (UPnP)
Using the standard TCP/IP protocol, the BCM50a Integrated Router and other
UPnP-enabled devices can dynamically join a network, obtain an IP address, and convey its capabilities to other devices on the network.
Call scheduling
Configure call time periods to restrict and allow access for users on remote nodes.
PPPoE
PPPoE facilitates the interaction of a host with an Internet modem to achieve access to high-speed data networks through a familiar dial-up networking user interface.
Dynamic DNS support
With Dynamic DNS (Domain Name System) support, you can have a static host name alias for a dynamic IP address, so the host is more easily accessible from various locations on the Internet. You must register for this service with a
Dynamic DNS service provider.
N0115790
Chapter 1 Getting to know your BCM50a Integrated Router 37
IP Multicast
The BCM50a Integrated Router can use IP multicast to deliver IP packets to a specific group of hosts. IGMP (Internet Group Management Protocol) is the protocol used to support multicast groups. The BCM50a Integrated Router supports versions 1 and 2.
IP Alias
Using IP Alias, you can partition a physical network into logical networks over the same Ethernet interface. The BCM50a Integrated Router supports three logical LAN interfaces through its single physical Ethernet LAN interface with the BCM50a Integrated Router itself as the gateway for each LAN network.
Central Network Management
With Central Network Management (CNM), an enterprise or service provider network administrator can manage your BCM50a Integrated Router. The enterprise or service provider network administrator can configure your BCM50a
Integrated Router, perform firmware upgrades, and do troubleshooting for you.
SNMP
SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) is a protocol used for exchanging management information between network devices. SNMP is a member of the
TCP/IP protocol suite. Your BCM50a Integrated Router supports SNMP agent functionality, which means that a manager station can manage and monitor the
BCM50a Integrated Router through the network. The BCM50a Integrated Router supports SNMP versions 1 and 2 (SNMPv1 and SNMPv2).
Network Address Translation (NAT)
NAT (Network Address Translation — NAT, RFC 1631) translate multiple IP addresses used within one network to different IP addresses known within another network.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
38 Chapter 1 Getting to know your BCM50a Integrated Router
Traffic Redirect
Traffic Redirect forwards WAN traffic to a backup gateway when the BCM50a
Integrated Router cannot connect to the Internet, thus acting as an auxiliary backup when your regular WAN connection fails.
Port Forwarding
Use this feature to forward incoming service requests to a server on your local network. You can enter a single port number or a range of port numbers to be forwarded, and the local IP address of the desired server.
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol)
With DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol), individual client computers can obtain the TCP/IP configuration at start-up from a centralized DHCP server.
The BCM50a Integrated Router has built in DHCP server capability, enabled by default, which means it can assign IP addresses, an IP default gateway, and DNS servers to all systems that support the DHCP client. The BCM50a Integrated
Router can also act as a surrogate DHCP server, where it relays IP address assignment from another DHCP server to the clients.
Full network management
The embedded web configurator is an all platform, web based utility that you can use to easily manage and configure the BCM50a Integrated Router. Most functions of the BCM50a Integrated Router are also software configurable through the SMT (System Management Terminal) interface. The SMT is a menu driven interface that you can access over a Telnet connection.
Logging and tracing
The BCM50a Integrated Router supports the following logging and tracing functions to help with management:
• Built in message logging and packet tracing
• Unix syslog facility support
N0115790
Chapter 1 Getting to know your BCM50a Integrated Router 39
Upgrade BCM50a Integrated Router Firmware
The firmware of the BCM50a Integrated Router can be upgraded manually through the WebGUI.
Embedded FTP and TFTP Servers
The embedded FTP and TFTP servers enable fast firmware upgrades, as well as configuration file backups and restoration.
Applications for the BCM50a Integrated Router
Secure broadband internet access and VPN
The BCM50a Integrated Router provides broadband Internet access through
ADSL. The BCM50a Integrated Router also provides IP address sharing and a firewall protected local network with traffic management.
The BCM50a Integrated Router VPN is an ideal, cost effective way to connect branch offices and business partners over the Internet without the need (and expense) of leased lines between sites. The LAN computers can share the VPN tunnels for secure connections to remote computers.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
40 Chapter 1 Getting to know your BCM50a Integrated Router
Figure 1 Secure Internet Access and VPN Application
BCM50a Integrated Router
Caution: Electro-static Discharge can disrupt the router. Use appropriate handling precautions to avoid ESD. Avoid touching the connectors on the router, particularly when it is in use.
N0115790
41
Chapter 2
Introducing the WebGUI
This chapter describes how to access the BCM50a Integrated Router WebGUI and provides an overview of its screens.
WebGUI overview
There are two methods to access the WebGUI for the BCM50a Integrated Router.
It can be launched from Element Manager or can be launched from a web browser on the same subnet as the router.
Use Internet Explorer 6.0 and later or Netscape Navigator 7.0 and later versions.
The recommended screen resolution is 1 024 by 768 pixels.
In order to use the WebGUI you need to allow:
• Web browser pop-up windows from your device. Web pop-up blocking is enabled by default in Windows XP SP (Service Pack) 2.
• JavaScripts (enabled by default).
• Java permissions (enabled by default).
See
“Allowing Pop-up Windows, JavaScript and Java Permissions” on page 397
if you want to make sure these functions are allowed in Internet Explorer.
Accessing the BCM50a Integrated Router WebGUI
Make sure your BCM50a Integrated Router hardware is properly connected and prepare your computer and computer network to connect to the BCM50a
Integrated Router
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
42 Chapter 2 Introducing the WebGUI
1 Launch your web browser.
2 Type 192.168.1.1 as the URL.
3 Type the username (“nnadmin” is the default) and the password
(“PlsChgMe!” is the default) and click Login. Click Reset to clear any information you have entered in the Username and Password fields.
Figure 2 Login screen
4 A screen asking you to change your password (highly recommended) appears
and is shown in Figure 3 . Type a new password (and retype it to confirm) and
click Apply or click Ignore.
N0115790
Figure 3 Change password screen
Chapter 2 Introducing the WebGUI 43
5 Click Apply in the Replace Certificate screen to create a certificate using your BCM50a Integrated Router MAC address that is specific to this device.
Figure 4 Replace certificate screen
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
44 Chapter 2 Introducing the WebGUI
The MAIN MENU screen appears.
Note: The management session automatically times out when the time period set in the Administrator Inactivity Timer field expires (default five minutes). Simply log back on to the BCM50a Integrated Router if this happens to you.
Restoring the factory-default configuration settings
If you forget your password or cannot access the SMT menu, you will need to restore the factor-default configuration. This means that you will lose all configurations that you had previously. The password will be reset to
“PlsChgMe!”.
Use one of the following ways to perform a reset on the BCM50a Integrated
Router:
1 Router WebGUI LineFeed LAN access is required. Navigate to the
Maintenance screen and select the Reset button.
2 Element Manager LineFeed. Navigate to the Administration screen, Utilities,
Reset select the Router Cold Reset.
Navigating the BCM50a Integrated Router WebGUI
Follow the instructions in the MAIN MENU screen or click the help icon (located in the top right corner of most screens) to view online help.
Note: The help icon does not appear in the MAIN MENU screen.
N0115790
Figure 5 MAIN MENU Screen
Chapter 2 Introducing the WebGUI 45
Click the Contact link to display the customer support contact information.
Figure 7 is a sample of what displays.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
46 Chapter 2 Introducing the WebGUI
Figure 6 Contact Support
N0115790
47
Chapter 3
Wizard setup
This chapter provides information on the Wizard screens in the WebGUI.
Wizard overview
The setup wizard in the WebGUI helps you configure your device to access the
Internet. The second screen has three variations, depending on which encapsulation type you use. Refer to your ISP checklist in the Nortel BCM50a
Integrated Router 252 — Fundamentals (NN47923-301) to know what to enter in each field. Leave a field blank if you do not have the required information.
Encapsulation
Be sure to use the encapsulation method required by your ISP. The BCM50a
Integrated Router supports the following methods.
ENET ENCAP
The MAC Encapsulated Routing Link Protocol (ENET ENCAP) is only implemented with the IP network protocol. IP packets are routed between the
Ethernet interface and the WAN interface and then formatted so that they can be understood in a bridged environment. For instance, the BCM50a Integrated
Router encapsulates routed Ethernet frames into bridged ATM cells. ENET
ENCAP requires that you specify a gateway IP address in the ENET ENCAP
Gateway field in the second wizard screen. You can get this information from your ISP.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
48 Chapter 3 Wizard setup
PPP over Ethernet
PPP over Ethernet (PPPoE) provides access control and billing functionality in a manner similar to dial-up services using PPP. The BCM50a Integrated Router bridges a PPP session over Ethernet (PPP over Ethernet, RFC 2516) from your computer to an ATM (Asynchronous Transfer Mode) PVC (Permanent Virtual
Circuit), which connects to an ADSL Access Concentrator where the PPP session terminates. One PVC can support any number of PPP sessions from your LAN.
For more information about PPPoE, see the PPPoE appendix in the BCM50a
Integrated Router Configuration — Advanced guide.
PPPoA
A Point to Point Protocol over ATM Adaptation Layer 5 (PPPoA) connection functions like a dial-up Internet connection. The BCM50a Integrated Router encapsulates the PPP session based on RFC 1483 and sends it through an ATM
PVC (Permanent Virtual Circuit) to the Internet Service Provider (ISP) DSLAM
(Digital Subscriber Line Access Multiplexer). For more information about
PPPoA, refer to RFC 2364. For more information about PPP, refer to RFC 1661.
RFC 1483
RFC 1483 describes two methods for Multiprotocol Encapsulation over ATM
Adaptation Layer 5 (AAL5). Using the first method, you can multiplex multiple protocols over a single ATM virtual circuit (LLC-based multiplexing). The second method assumes that each protocol is carried over a separate ATM virtual circuit (VC-based multiplexing). For more detailed information, see RFC 1483.
Multiplexing
There are two conventions to identify which protocols the virtual circuit (VC) carries. Be sure to use the multiplexing method required by your ISP.
N0115790
Chapter 3 Wizard setup 49
VC-based multiplexing
In this case, by prior mutual agreement, each protocol is assigned to a specific virtual circuit; for example, VC1 carries IP. VC-based multiplexing can be dominant in environments where dynamic creation of large numbers of ATM VCs is fast and economical.
LLC-based multiplexing
In this case, one VC carries multiple protocols with protocol-identifying information being contained in each packet header. Despite the extra bandwidth and processing overhead, this method can be advantageous if it is not practical to have a separate VC for each carried protocol, for example, if charging heavily depends on the number of simultaneous VCs.
VPI and VCI
Be sure to use the correct Virtual Path Identifier (VPI) and Virtual Channel
Identifier (VCI) numbers assigned to you. The valid range for the VPI is 0 to 255 and 32 to 65535 for the VCI (0 to 31 is reserved for local management of ATM traffic).
Wizard setup configuration: first screen
In the Site Map screen, click Wizard Setup to display the first wizard screen.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
50 Chapter 3 Wizard setup
Figure 7 Wizard Screen 1
N0115790
Table 2 describes the fields in Figure 7 .
Table 2 Wizard Screen 1
Label Description
Mode
Encapsulation Select the encapsulation type your ISP uses from the Encapsulation drop-down list box. Choices vary depending on what you select in the
Mode field.
If you select Bridge in the Mode field, select either PPPoA or RFC
1483.
If you select Routing in the Mode field, select PPPoA, RFC 1483, ENET
ENCAP, or PPPoE.
Multiplex
From the Mode drop-down list box, select Routing (default) if your ISP allows multiple computers to share an Internet account. Otherwise, select Bridge.
Virtual Circuit
ID
Select the multiplexing method used by your ISP from the Multiplex drop-down list box, either VC-based or LLC-based.
VPI (Virtual Path Identifier) and VCI (Virtual Channel Identifier) define a virtual circuit.
VPI
VCI
Next
Enter the VPI assigned to you. This field can already be configured.
Enter the VCI assigned to you. This field can already be configured.
Click this button to go to the next wizard screen. The next wizard screen you see depends on which encapsulation you chose above.
Chapter 3 Wizard setup 51
IP address and subnet mask
Similar to the way houses on a street share a common street name, so too do computers on a LAN share one common network number.
Where you obtain your network number depends on your particular situation. If the ISP or your network administrator assigns you a block of registered IP addresses, follow their instructions in selecting the IP addresses and the subnet mask.
If the ISP did not explicitly give you an IP network number, you most likely have a single user account and the ISP assigns you a dynamic IP address when the connection is established. The Internet Assigned Number Authority (IANA) reserved this block of addresses specifically for private use; do not use any other number unless you are told otherwise. For example, you select 192.168.1.0 as the network number; which covers 254 individual addresses from 192.168.1.1 to
192.168.1.254 (0 and 255 are reserved). In other words, the first three numbers specify the network number while the last number identifies an individual computer on that network.
After you select the network number, pick an IP address that is easy to remember, for instance, 192.168.1.1, for your BCM50a Integrated Router. Make sure that no other device on your network is using that IP address.
The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address. Your
BCM50a Integrated Router computes the subnet mask automatically based on the
IP address that you entered. You do not need to change the subnet mask computed by the BCM50a Integrated Router unless you are instructed to do so.
IP address assignment
A static IP is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you. A dynamic IP is not fixed; the ISP assigns you a different one each time. The Single User Account feature can be enabled or disabled if you have either a dynamic or static IP. However, the encapsulation method assigned influences your choices for IP address and ENET
ENCAP gateway.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
52 Chapter 3 Wizard setup
IP assignment with PPPoA or PPPoE encapsulation
If you have a dynamic IP, the IP Address and ENET ENCAP Gateway fields are not applicable (N/A). If you have a static IP, then you only need to fill in the
IP Address field and not the ENET ENCAP Gateway field.
IP assignment with RFC 1483 encapsulation
In this case, the IP address assignment must be static with the same requirements for the IP Address and ENET ENCAP Gateway fields as stated above.
IP assignment with ENET ENCAP encapsulation
In this case, you can have either a static or dynamic IP. For a static IP, you must fill in all the IP Address and ENET ENCAP Gateway fields as supplied by your
ISP. However, for a dynamic IP, the BCM50a Integrated Router acts as a DHCP client on the WAN and so the IP Address and ENET ENCAP Gateway fields are not applicable (N/A) as the DHCP server assigns them to the BCM50a
Integrated Router.
Private IP addresses
Every machine on the Internet must have a unique address. If your networks are isolated from the Internet, for example, only between your two branch offices, you can assign any IP addresses to the hosts without problems. However, the
Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA) has reserved the following three blocks of IP addresses specifically for private networks:
• 10.0.0.0 — 10.255.255.255
• 172.16.0.0 — 172.31.255.255
• 192.168.0.0 — 192.168.255.255
N0115790
Chapter 3 Wizard setup 53
You can obtain your IP address from the IANA, from an ISP, or it can be assigned from a private network. If you belong to a small organization and your Internet access is through an ISP, the ISP can provide you with the Internet addresses for your local networks. On the other hand, if you are part of a much larger organization, consult your network administrator for the appropriate IP addresses.
Note: Regardless of your particular situation, do not create an arbitrary
IP address; always follow the guidelines above. For more information about address assignment, refer to Address Allocation for Private
Internets (RFC 1597) and Guidelines for Management of IP Address
Space (RFC 1466).
Nailed-up connection (only with PPP)
A nailed-up connection is a dial-up line where the connection is always up regardless of traffic demand. The BCM50a Integrated Router does two things when you specify a nailed-up connection. First, idle timeout is disabled. Second, the BCM50a Integrated Router tries to bring up the connection when turned on and whenever the connection is down. A nailed-up connection can be expensive if you are billed by your Internet connection usage time.
Do not specify a nailed-up connection unless your telephone company offers flat-rate service or you need a constant connection and the cost is of no concern
NAT
Network Address Translation (NAT) is the translation of the IP address of a host in a packet. For example, the source address of an outgoing packet, used within one network to a different IP address known within another network.
Wizard setup configuration: second screen
The second wizard screen varies depending on which mode and encapsulation type you use. All screens shown use the routing mode. Configure the fields and click Next to continue.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
54 Chapter 3 Wizard setup
Figure 8 Internet connection with PPPoA
N0115790
Table 3 describes the fields in Figure 8 .
Table 3 Internet connection with PPPoA
Label
User Name
Password
IP Address
Description
Enter the logon name your ISP gave you.
Enter the password associated with the username above.
This option is available if you select Routing in the Mode field.
A static IP address is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you. A dynamic IP address is not fixed; the ISP assigns you a different one each time you connect to the Internet. The Single User Account feature can be used with either a dynamic or static IP address.
Click Obtain an IP Address Automatically if you have a dynamic IP address; otherwise click Static IP Address and type your
ISP-assigned IP address in the IP Address text box below.
Chapter 3 Wizard setup 55
Table 3 Internet connection with PPPoA (continued)
Label
Connection
Network
Address
Translation
Back
Next
Description
Select Connect on Demand if you do not want the connection up all the time and specify an idle time-out (in seconds) in the Max. Idle
Timeout field. The default setting selects Connection on Demand with 0 as the idle time-out, which means the Internet session does not timeout.
Select Nailed-Up Connection if you want your connection up all the time. The BCM50a Integrated Router tries to bring up the connection automatically if it is disconnected.
The schedule rules in SMT menu 26 has priority over your Connection settings.
This option is available if you select Routing in the Mode field.
Select None, SUA Only, or Full Feature from the drop-down list box.
For more details, see Chapter 8, “Network Address Translation (NAT)
.
Click Back to go back to the first wizard screen.
Click Next to continue to the next wizard screen.
Figure 9 Internet connection with RFC 1483
Table 4 describes the fields in Figure 9 .
Table 4 Internet connection with RFC 1483
Label;
IP Address
Description
This field is available if you select Routing in the Mode field.
Type your ISP-assigned IP address in this field.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
56 Chapter 3 Wizard setup
Table 4 Internet connection with RFC 1483 (continued)
Network Address
Translation
Select None, SUA Only, or Full Feature from the drop-down list box.
For more details, see Chapter 8, “Network Address Translation (NAT)
Back
Next
Click Back to go back to the first wizard screen.
Click Next to continue to the next wizard screen.
Figure 10 Internet connection with ENET ENCAP
N0115790
Table 5 describes the fields in Figure 10 .
Table 5 Internet connection with ENET ENCAP
Label
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Description
A static IP address is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you. A dynamic IP address is not fixed; the ISP assigns you a different one each time you connect to the Internet. The Single User Account feature can be used with either a dynamic or static IP address.
Select Obtain an IP Address Automatically if you have a dynamic IP address; otherwise select Static IP Address and type your
ISP-assigned IP address in the IP Address text box below.
Enter a subnet mask in dotted decimal notation.
If you are implementing subnetting, see the IP subnetting appendix in the BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Advanced guide.
Chapter 3 Wizard setup 57
Table 5 Internet connection with ENET ENCAP (continued)
Label Description
ENET ENCAP
Gateway
You must specify a gateway IP address (supplied by your ISP) when you use ENET ENCAP in the Encapsulation field in the previous screen.
Network Address
Translation
Select None, SUA Only, or Full Feature from the drop-down list box.
For more details, see
Chapter 8, “Network Address Translation (NAT)
Back
Next
Click Back to go back to the first wizard screen.
Click Next to continue to the next wizard screen.
Figure 11 Internet connection with PPPoE
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
58 Chapter 3 Wizard setup
describes the fields in Figure 11
.
Table 6 Internet connection with PPPoE
Label Description
Service Name Type the name of your PPPoE service here.
User Name Enter the username exactly as your ISP assigned. If assigned a name in the form user@domain , where domain identifies a service name, then enter both components exactly as given.
Password
IP Address
Enter the password associated with the username above.
A static IP address is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you. A dynamic IP address is not fixed; the ISP assigns you a different one each time you connect to the Internet. The Single User Account feature can be used with either a dynamic or static IP address.
Select Obtain an IP Address Automatically if you have a dynamic IP address; otherwise select Static IP Address and type your
ISP-assigned IP address in the IP Address text box below.
Connection
Network
Address
Translation
Back
Next
Select Connect on Demand if you do not want the connection up all the time and specify an idle time-out (in seconds) in the Max. Idle Timeout field. The default setting selects Connection on Demand with 0 as the idle time-out, which means the Internet session does not timeout.
Select Nailed-Up Connection if you want your connection up all the time. The BCM50a Integrated Router tries to bring up the connection automatically if it is disconnected.
The schedule rules in SMT menu 26 has priority over your Connection settings.
Select None, SUA Only, or Full Feature from the drop-down list box.
For more details, see Chapter 8, “Network Address Translation (NAT)
.
Click Back to go back to the first wizard screen.
Click Next to continue to the next wizard screen.
N0115790
Chapter 3 Wizard setup 59
DHCP setup
Using Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP), individual clients can obtain TCP/IP configuration from a server. You can configure the BCM50a
Integrated Router as a DHCP server. When configured as a server, the BCM50a
Integrated Router provides the TCP/IP configuration for the clients. If you turn
DHCP service off, you must have another DHCP server on your LAN, or else the computer must be manually configured. DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration
Protocol, RFC 2131 and RFC 2132)
IP pool setup
The BCM50a Integrated Router is preconfigured with a pool of IP addresses for the client machines.
Wizard setup configuration: third screen
1 Verify the settings in the following screen. To change the LAN information on the BCM50a Integrated Router, click Change LAN Configurations.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
60 Chapter 3 Wizard setup
Figure 12 Wizard Screen 3
N0115790
2 To change your BCM50a Integrated Router LAN settings, click Change
LAN Configuration to display the following screen.
Note: If you change the BCM50a Integrated Router LAN IP address, you must use the new IP address to access the WebGUI again.
Figure 13 Wizard: LAN configuration
Chapter 3 Wizard setup 61
Table 7 describes the fields in Figure 13 .
Table 7 Wizard: LAN configuration
Label
LAN IP Address
LAN Subnet Mask
DHCP
Description
Enter the IP address of your BCM50a Integrated Router in dotted decimal notation, for example, 192.168.1.1 (factory default).
Enter a subnet mask in dotted decimal notation.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
62 Chapter 3 Wizard setup
Table 7 Wizard: LAN configuration (continued)
Label Description
DHCP With DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, RFC 2131 and RFC 2132) individual clients (workstations) can obtain TCP/
IP configuration at startup from a server. Unless you are instructed by your ISP, leave this field set to Server. When configured as a server, the BCM50a Integrated Router provides
TCP/IP configuration for the clients. When set as a server, fill in the IP Pool Starting Address and Pool Size fields.
Select Relay to have the BCM50a Integrated Router forward
DHCP requests to another DHCP server. When set to Relay, fill in the DHCP Server Address field.
Select None to stop the BCM50a Integrated Router from acting as a DHCP server. When you select None, you must have another DHCP server on your LAN, or else the computers must be manually configured.
Client IP Pool Starting
Address
This field specifies the first of the contiguous addresses in the IP address pool.
Size of Client IP Pool This field specifies the size or count of the IP address pool.
DHCP Server
Address
Type the IP address of the DHCP server in dotted decimal notation (like 192.168.1.5).
First DNS Server
Second DNS Server
Third DNS Server
Select Obtained From ISP if your ISP dynamically assigns DNS server information (and the BCM50a Integrated Router WAN IP address). The field to the right displays the (read-only) DNS server IP address that the ISP assigns.
Select UserDefined if you have the IP address of a DNS server.
Enter the DNS server IP address in the field to the right.
Select DNS Relay to have the BCM50a Integrated Router act as a DNS proxy. The BCM50a Integrated Router LAN IP address displays in the field to the right (read-only). The BCM50a
Integrated Router tells the DHCP clients on the LAN that the
BCM50a Integrated Router itself is the DNS server. When a computer on the LAN sends a DNS query to the BCM50a
Integrated Router, the BCM50a Integrated Router forwards the query to the BCM50a Integrated Router system DNS server
(configured in the SYSTEM General screen) and relays the response back to the computer. You can only select DNS Relay for one of the three servers;
Select None if you do not want to configure DNS servers. If you do not configure a DNS server, you must know the IP addresses of devices or web sites in order to access them.
Back
Finish
Click Back to go back to the previous screen.
Click Finish to save the settings and proceed to the next wizard screen.
N0115790
Chapter 3 Wizard setup 63
Wizard setup configuration: connection tests
The BCM50a Integrated Router automatically tests the connection to the computers connected to the LAN ports. To test the connection from the BCM50a
Integrated Router to the ISP and the connected LAN devices, click Start
Diagnose. Otherwise click Finish to go back to the site map screen.
Figure 14 Wizard Screen 4
Test your Internet connection
Launch your Web browser and navigate to www.nortel.com
. Internet access is just the beginning. For more detailed information on the complete range of features for the BCM50a Integrated Router, see the rest of this guide. If you cannot access the Internet, open the WebGUI again to confirm that the Internet settings you configured in the Wizard Setup are correct.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
64 Chapter 3 Wizard setup
N0115790
65
Chapter 4
User Notes
General Notes
There are some router functions that, although performing as expected, might cause some confusion. These are summarized below.
General
1 Default Address Mapping Rules When First Enable NAT Full Feature.
When NAT Full Feature is first enabled, two address mapping rules are added to the address mapping table. This is done to facilitate programming, and matches the default SUA rule. The rules can be deleted.
2 Response to Invalid User ID or Password
When the wrong user ID or password is entered into the router login screen, no error message is displayed. Instead, the login screen is simply displayed again.
3 First DHCP Address Reserved for BCM50
The first address of the DHCP Address Pool is reserved for a BCM50 in the subnet, and will not be assigned to any other equipment. Once assigned to a
BCM50, it is reserved for that BCM50, and will not be assigned to any other. If the BCM50 is changed, the following command must be used to enable the router to assign the first address to a different BCM50: ip dhcp enif0 server m50mac clear
4 Login Requires Reboot
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
66 Chapter 4 User Notes
If the Administrator Timeout is set to 0, and an administration session is terminated without logging off, the router needs to be rebooted in order for the administrator to log in to the WebGUI again. Alternatively, the administrator can log in using a TelNet session, if TelNet access has been enabled in the Remote
Management menu.
Firewall
1 Address Range Validation
In the firewall rules, the router does not confirm when given an address range, that the second address is higher than the first. If this type of address range is entered, the range is ignored.
2 Automatic Firewall Programming
Configurations to various areas of the router, such as remote management or adding a SUA Server, do not automatically add the appropriate rules to the
Firewall, to enable the traffic to pass through the router. These need to be added separately.
Note: Firewall rules do not apply to IPSec tunnels.
NAT
1 Deleting NAT Rule Does Not Drop an Existing Connection
If a NAT rule is deleted, the router must be rebooted to apply the change to existing service connections. This is already noted in the GUI.
2 Confusing NAT Traversal Status
If NAT Traversal is enabled, but is not needed (because the client is not behind a
NAT router), it will be shown as 'inactive' in the VPN Client Monitor. This may confuse some users.
VPN Client Termination
1 Change of User Account Does Not Drop Existing Connections
N0115790
Chapter 4 User Notes 67
If a VPN Client user account is de-activated, deleted, or changed, and that user is currently connected, the connection is not automatically dropped. To drop the connection, the administrator needs to disconnect the user using the 'Disconnect' function in the VPN/SA Monitor GUI. This is consistent with other Nortel
Contivity products.
2 User Name Restrictions
User names are limited to a maximum length of 63 characters.
3 VPN Client Account Password Restrictions
The password for a VPN Client user cannot contain the single- or double-quote characters.
4 IP Pool Address Overlap
When defining multiple VPN Client Termination IP pools, the router uses the IP
Subnet mask, and not the pool size, to determine if the pools are overlapping. The subnet mask of each pool should be appropriate for the size of the VPN Client
Termination IP pool.
5 VPN Client Termination - Failure In Specific Addressing Situation
If the Client has an assigned IP address that is the same as the IP address assigned for the Client Tunnel, the connection will fail to be established.
6 VPN Client Termination - Configuration Restrictions
This router has some restrictions when compared to larger Contivity Routers
(1000 Series and above). In particular,
VPN Clients cannot be added to the LAN subnet. They must have addresses outside of the LAN subnet.
VPN Clients can have dynamically assigned IP addresses, or they can have a statically assigned addresses. However, the router does not support both modes at once. All addresses must either be dynamically assigned, or they must all be statically assigned.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
68 Chapter 4 User Notes
Security
1 Exporting or Saving Self-Signed Certificate
To export or save a self-signed certificate, click details (the icon that looks like a paper note), then click 'Export' or copy the PEM text into the clipboard, and paste into a file.
Routing
1 RIP Version Advertisement Control
To change the version of generated RIP advertisements, the following CLI command needs to be used ip rip mode [enif0|enif1] [in|out] [0|1|2|3] where:
'enif0' is the LAN side, and 'enif1' is the WAN side
'in' affects recognition of received advertisements, and
'out' applies to generated advertisements
The number controls the operating mode:
None (disabled)
RIP-1 only
RIP-2 only
Both RIP-1 and RIP-2
Advanced Router Configuration
The following notes are intended to help with advanced router configuration.
N0115790
Chapter 4 User Notes 69
Setting up the router when the system has a server
1 If you are using a Full-Feature NAT configuration, first, do the following...
a In SUA/NAT / Address Mapping, add a 'Server' rule, specifying the
'Public' IP address of the server.
2 For both SUA-Only and Full-Feature NAT configurations, do the following...
a In SUA/NAT : SUA Server, add server private IP address and port number(s) to the SUA/NAT Server table.
b In FIREWALL, add a WAN-to-LAN rule c If the service is not in the list of available services, add it as a 'Custom
Port'. d Add the rule, selecting the service, and entering the server IP address as the destination IP address.
Connecting two sites to establish a virtual private network
The recommended method to do this is through a branch-to-branch IPSec tunnel.
1 In VPN / Summary, add a new tunnel by editing an unused rule. Create an
Active, Branch Office tunnel. a Select 'Nailed Up' if the tunnel should not be closed while not in use.
b Enter the authentication information, with either a pre-shared key or an imported certificate.
c Enter the IP Address assigned to the router WAN port. This should be a static address, or a dynamic DNS name, and the IP address of the remote router.
d Select the encryption and authentication algorithms.
e Add an IP policy, by specifying the IP address ranges of the local and remote hosts that will use the tunnel.
2 Repeat these steps at the other end of the branch.
Note: If VPN Client Termination is used on these sites, the client termination address range will need to be included in the tunnel policies in order for the
VPN clients to see the other site.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
70 Chapter 4 User Notes
Adding IP telephony to a multi-site network
Scenario 1: A BCM50 in the primary site acting as the gateway for both sites
1 Ensure that the DHCP Server in the BCM50 is disabled, that the BCM50 is connected to the router, and both have booted.
2 Add the IP phones to the primary site as per BCM50 installation guide.
3 Create a tunnel to the remote site, as described above.
4 In the remote site, set the S1 and S2 addresses to the IP address of the
BCM50, which is identified in the router DHCP table or in the BCM50. This is done with a CLI command.
TELNET or SSH to the router. This needs TELNET or SSH enabled on that router. Select menu 24, select menu 8, and enter the commands: ip dhcp enif0 server voipserver 1 <BCM50_IP_Address> 7000 1 ip dhcp enif0 server voipserver 2 <BCM50_IP_Address> 7000 1
5 Add the IP phones to the remote site, configured for full DHCP client mode.
Scenario 2: A BCM50 in each site, each acting as the backup call server for the other site
1 At each site, a Ensure that the DHCP Server in the BCM50 is disabled, that the BCM50 is connected to the router, and both have booted.
b Add the IP phones to the site as per BCM50 installation guide.
c At each router, change the S2 address to the IP address of the remote
BCM50, using TELNET or SSH, and the CLI command, ip dhcp enif0 server voipserver 2 <Remote_BCM50_IP_Address> 7000 1
2 Create a tunnel between the sites, as described above.
3 Create an H.323 trunk between the BCM50s, as per the BCM50 User Guide.
N0115790
Chapter 4 User Notes 71
Configuring the router to act as a Nortel VPN Server (Client
Termination)
1 Under VPN / Client Termination, a Enable Client Termination.
b Select authentication type and the encryption algorithms supported.
c If the clients are assigned IP addresses from a pool, define the pool, and enable it.
2 Assuming a Local User Database is used for authentication, a Add user name and password to the local user database as an IPSec user, and activate it. If the hosts will be assigned a static IP address, enter the address that will be assigned to the user.
Configuring the router to connect to a Nortel VPN Server (Client
Emulation)
1 Go to VPN / Summary, and select 'Edit'.
2 Select a connection type of Contivity Client, and fill in the web page with the relevant data.
3 If Group authentication or On-Demand Client Tunnels are needed, click the
'Advanced' button to configure this.
Configuring the router to allow remote management of a
LAN-connected BCM50
1 Create the appropriate NAT server rules to add the BCM50.
Go to SUA/NAT / SUA Server, and create two server rules for HTTPS and
Element Manager access:
One named BCM_HTTPS, with port number 443, and the IP address of the
BCM50
One named BCM_EM, with the port number 5989, and the IP address of the
BCM50
Note: In DHCP Server mode, the BCM50 IP address will be the lowest address in the pool.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
72 Chapter 4 User Notes
2 Create the appropriate Firewall rules to add BCM50 access.
Go to FIREWALL / Summary, and create two WAN-to-LAN firewall rules:
One rule allowing access from allowed remote computer IP addresses, to the
BCM50 IP address, for service type HTTPS(TCP:443)
One rule allowing access from allowed remote computer IP addresses, to the
BCM50 IP address, for custom port TCP:5989
Setting up the router for guest access
The recommended approach to provide guest access is by creating an IP Alias, and using static addressing for the corporate equipment, to make it a member of the defined Alias subnet. Then use firewall rules to restrict access of the guest equipment. NOTE: if a BCM50 is used, it will also need to be assigned a static IP address.
1 Go to LAN / IP Alias, and Enable IP Alias 1.
2 Define a subnet for the corporate equipment.
3 Statically assign addresses to the corporate equipment that are within the IP
Alias subnet.
4 Set up LAN / IP to enable DHCP Server, with an address range that will be used for guest equipment.
5 In the FIREWALL, set up a LAN-to-LAN rule to block traffic between the guest subnet (DHCP Pool) and the corporate subnet (IP Alias subnet).
Note: If branch tunnels are being used, the policies on these tunnels should exclude the guest subnet.
Preventing heavy data traffic from impacting telephone calls
To ensure voice quality during heavy data traffic, bandwidth needs to be reserved for voice traffic. Bandwidth needs to be reserved on both the WAN side, and the
LAN side.
1 On BANDWIDTH MANAGEMENT / Summary, activate WAN- and
LAN-side bandwidth management.
N0115790
Chapter 4 User Notes 73
2 On BANDWIDTH MANAGEMENT / Class Setup, add a WAN subclass, and reserve sufficient bandwidth based on the number of telephones, for
Protocol ID 17 (UDP Traffic).
The amount of bandwidth should be based on a reasonable peak number of simultaneous calls, and the data rate needed by the IP telephony CODECs.
Refer to the BCM IP Telephony (or other call server) documentation for calculation details.
3 Set up a similar LAN subclass.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
74 Chapter 4 User Notes
N0115790
75
Chapter 5
System screens
This chapter provides information on the System screens.
System overview
This section provides background information on features that you cannot configure in the Wizard.
DNS overview
There are three places where you can configure DNS (Domain Name System) setup on the BCM50a Integrated Router.
Use the System General screen to configure the BCM50a Integrated Router to use a DNS server to resolve domain names for BCM50a Integrated Router system features like VPN, DDNS, and the time server.
Use the LAN IP screen to configure the DNS server information that the BCM50a
Integrated Router sends to the DHCP client devices on the LAN.
Use the Remote Management DNS screen to configure the BCM50a Integrated
Router to accept or discard DNS queries.
Private DNS server
In cases where you want to use domain names to access Intranet servers on a remote private network that has a DNS server, you must identify that DNS server.
You cannot use DNS servers on the LAN or from the ISP because these DNS servers cannot resolve domain names to private IP addresses on the remote private network.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
76 Chapter 5 System screens
Figure 15 depicts an example where three VPN tunnels are created from BCM50a
Integrated Router A; one to branch office 2, one to branch office 3, and another to headquarters (HQ). In order to access computers that use private domain names on the HQ network, the BCM50a Integrated Router at branch office 1 uses the
Intranet DNS server in headquarters.
Figure 15 Private DNS server example
Note: If you do not specify an Intranet DNS server on the remote network, then the VPN host must use IP addresses to access the computers on the remote private network.
Configuring General Setup
Click SYSTEM to open the General screen.
N0115790
Figure 16 System general setup
Chapter 5 System screens 77
Table 8 describes the fields in Figure 16 .
Table 8 System general setup
Label
System Name
Domain Name
Administrator
Inactivity Timer
Apply
Reset
Description
Choose a descriptive name for identification purposes. Nortel recommends that you enter your computer name in this field. This name can be up to 30 alphanumeric characters long. Spaces, dashes
(-) and underscores (_) are accepted.
Enter the domain name (if you know it) here. If you leave this field blank, the ISP assigns a domain name through DHCP.
The domain name entered by you is given priority over the
ISP-assigned domain name.
Type how many minutes a management session (either through the
WebGUI or SMT) can be left idle before the session times out. The default is 5 minutes. After it times out you have to log in with your password again. Very long idle timeouts can have security risks. A value of 0 means a management session never times out, no matter how long it has been left idle (not recommended).
Click Apply to save your changes to the BCM50a Integrated Router.
Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
78 Chapter 5 System screens
Table 8 System general setup
Label Description
System DNS
Servers (if applicable)
DNS (Domain Name System) is for mapping a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa. The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP address of a machine before you can access it. The BCM50a
Integrated Router uses a system DNS server (in the order you specify here) to resolve domain names for VPN, DDNS and the time server.
First DNS Server
Second DNS
Server
Third DNS Server
Select From ISP if your ISP dynamically assigns DNS server information (and the BCM50a Integrated Router WAN IP address).
The field to the right displays the (read-only) DNS server IP address that the ISP assigns. If you chose From ISP, but the BCM50a
Integrated Router has a fixed WAN IP address, From ISP changes to
None after you click Apply. If you chose From ISP for the second or third DNS server, but the ISP does not provide a second or third IP address, From ISP changes to None after you click Apply.
Select User-Defined if you have the IP address of a DNS server. The
IP address can be public or a private address on your local LAN.
Enter the DNS server's IP address in the field to the right.
A User-Defined entry with the IP address set to 0.0.0.0 changes to
None after you click Apply. A duplicate User-Defined entry changes to None after you click Apply.
Select None if you do not want to configure DNS servers. If you do not configure a system DNS server, you must use IP addresses when configuring VPN, DDNS and the time server.
Select Private DNS if the DNS server has a private IP address and is located behind a VPN peer. Enter the DNS server's IP address in the field to the right.
With a private DNS server, you must also configure the first DNS server entry in the LAN IP screen to use DNS Relay.
You must also configure a VPN branch office rule since the BCM50a
Integrated Router uses a VPN tunnel when it relays DNS queries to the private DNS server. The rule must also have an IP policy that includes the LAN IP address of the BCM50a Integrated Router as a local IP address and the IP address of the DNS server as a remote IP address.
A Private DNS entry with the IP address set to 0.0.0.0 changes to
None after you click Apply. A duplicate Private DNS entry changes to None after you click Apply.
N0115790
Chapter 5 System screens 79
Dynamic DNS
With Dynamic DNS, you can update your current dynamic IP address with one or many dynamic DNS services so that anyone can contact you (as in NetMeeting or
CU-SeeMe). You can also access your FTP server or Web site on your own computer using a domain name (for instance, myhost.dhs.org, where myhost is a name of your choice) that will never change instead of using an IP address that changes each time you reconnect. Your friends or relatives can always call you even if they don't know your IP address.
First of all, you must register a dynamic DNS account with, for example www.dyndns.org. This is for people with a dynamic IP from their ISP or DHCP server that still wants a domain name. The Dynamic DNS service provider gives you a password or key.
DYNDNS wildcard
Enabling the wildcard feature for your host causes *.yourhost.dyndns.org to be aliased to the same IP address as yourhost.dyndns.org. This feature is useful if you want to use, for example, www.yourhost.dyndns.org and still reach your host name.
Configuring Dynamic DNS
Note: If you have a private WAN IP address, you cannot use Dynamic
DNS.
To change the DDNS settings, click SYSTEM, then the DDNS tab. The screen illustrated in
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
80 Chapter 5 System screens
Figure 17 DDNS
N0115790
Table 9 describes the fields in Figure 17 .
Table 9 DDNS
Label
Active
Service Provider
DDNS Type
Host Names 1~3
User
Description
Select this check box to use dynamic DNS.
Select the name of your Dynamic DNS service provider.
Select the type of service that you are registered for from your
Dynamic DNS service provider.
Enter the host names in the three fields provided. You can specify up to two host names in each field separated by a comma (,).
Enter your username (up to 31 characters).
Chapter 5 System screens 81
Table 9 DDNS
Label
Password
Enable Wildcard
Off Line
Description
Enter the password associated with your username (up to 31 characters).
Select the check box to enable DYNDNS Wildcard.
This option is available when CustomDNS is selected in the
DDNS Type field. Check with your Dynamic DNS service provider to have traffic redirected to a URL (that you can specify) while you are off line.
IP Address Update
Policy:
DDNS Server Auto
Detect IP Address
Use Specified IP
Address
Use IP Address
Apply
Reset
Select this option only when there are one or more NAT routers between the BCM50a Integrated Router and the DDNS server.
This feature has the DDNS server automatically detect and use the IP address of the NAT router that has a public IP address.
Note: The DDNS server not be able to detect the proper IP address if there is an HTTP proxy server between the BCM50a
Integrated Router and the DDNS server.
Select this option to update the IP address of the host names to the IP address specified below. Use this option if you have a static IP address.
Enter the IP address if you select the User Specify option.
Click Apply to save your changes to the BCM50a Integrated
Router.
Click Reset to return to the previously saved settings.
Configuring Password
To change the password of your BCM50a Integrated Router (recommended),
click SYSTEM, then the Password tab. The screen illustrated in Figure 18
appears. In this screen, you can change password of the BCM50a Integrated
Router.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
82 Chapter 5 System screens
Figure 18 Password
N0115790
Table 10 describes the fields in Figure 18
.
Table 10 Password
Label Description
Administrator Setting The administrator can access and configure all of the BCM50a
Integrated Router's features.
Old Password Type your existing system administrator password (“PlsChgMe!” is the default password).
New Password
Retype to Confirm
Type your new system password (up to 31 characters). Note that as you type a password, the screen displays a (*) for each character you type.
Retype your new system password for confirmation.
Chapter 5 System screens 83
Table 10 Password
Label
Client User Setting
User Name
New Password
Retype to Confirm
Apply
Reset
Description
The client user is the person who uses the BCM50a Integrated
Router's Contivity Client VPN tunnel.
The client user can do the following:
• Configure the WAN ISP and IP screens.
• Configure the VPN Contivity Client settings (except the
Advanced screen exclusive use mode for client tunnel and
MAC address allowed settings).
• View the SA monitor.
• Configure the VPN Global Setting screen.
• View logs.
• View the Maintenance Status screen.
• Use the Maintenance F/W Upload and Restart screens.
Type a username for the client user (up to 31 characters).
Type a password for the client user (up to 31 characters). Note that as you type a password, the screen displays a (*) for each character you type.
Retype the client user password for confirmation.
Click Apply to save your changes to the BCM50a Integrated
Router.
Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Predefined NTP time server list
The BCM50a Integrated Router uses the predefined list of NTP time servers listed in
if you do not specify a time server or if it cannot synchronize with the time server you specified.
The BCM50a Integrated Router can use this predefined list of time servers regardless of the Time Protocol you select.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
84 Chapter 5 System screens
When the BCM50a Integrated Router uses the predefined list of NTP time servers, it randomly selects one server and tries to synchronize with it. If the synchronization fails, then the BCM50a Integrated Router goes through the rest of the list in order from the first one tried until either it is successful or all the predefined NTP time servers have been tried.
Table 11 Default Time Servers ntp1.cs.wisc.edu
ntp1.gbg.netnod.se
ntp2.cs.wisc.edu
tock.usno.navy.mil
ntp3.cs.wisc.edu
ntp.cs.strath.ac.uk
ntp1.sp.se
time1.stupi.se
tick.stdtime.gov.tw
tock.stdtime.gov.tw
time.stdtime.gov.tw
Configuring Time and Date
To change the time and date of your BCM50a Integrated Router, click SYSTEM, and then Time and Date. The screen in
appears. Use this screen to configure the time based on your local time zone.
N0115790
Figure 19 Time and Date
Chapter 5 System screens 85
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
86 Chapter 5 System screens
describes the fields in Figure 19
.
Table 12 Time and Date
Label Description
Current Time and
Date
Current Time
Current Date
This field displays the time on your BCM50a Integrated Router.
Each time you reload this page, the BCM50a Integrated Router synchronizes the time with the time server.
This field displays the date on your BCM50a Integrated Router.
Each time you reload this page, the BCM50a Integrated Router synchronizes the date with the time server.
Time and Date Setup
Manual Select this radio button to enter the time and date manually. If you configure a new time and date, time zone and daylight saving at the same time, the new time and date you entered has priority and the Time Zone and Daylight Saving settings do not affect it.
New Time
(hh:mm:ss)
New Date
(yyyy-mm-dd)
Get from Time
Server
Time Protocol
This field displays the last updated time from the time server or the last time configured manually.
After you set Time and Date Setup to Manual, enter the new time in this field and then click Apply.
This field displays the last updated date from the time server or the last date configured manually.
After you set Time and Date Setup to Manual, enter the new date in this field and then click Apply.
Select this radio button to have the BCM50a Integrated Router get the time and date from the time server that you specified.
Select the time service protocol that your time server sends when you turn on the BCM50a Integrated Router. Not all time servers support all protocols, so you need to check with your ISP or network administrator or use trial and error to find a protocol that works.
The main difference between the protocols is the format.
Daytime (RFC 867) format is day/month/year/time zone of the server.
Time (RFC 868) format displays a 4-byte integer giving the total number of seconds since 1970/1/1 at 0:0:0.
The default, NTP (RFC 1305), is similar to Time (RFC 868).
Time Server Address Enter the IP address or URL of your time server. Check with your
ISP or network administrator if you are unsure of this information.
Synchronize Now Click this button to have the BCM50a Integrated Router get the time and date from a time server (see the Time Server Address field). This also saves your changes (including the time server address).
N0115790
Chapter 5 System screens 87
Table 12 Time and Date
Description Label
Time Zone Setup
Time Zone
Enable Daylight
Saving
Start Date
End Date
Apply
Reset
Choose the time zone of your location. This will set the time difference between your time zone and Greenwich Mean Time
(GMT).
Daylight Saving Time is a period from late spring to early fall when many countries set their clocks ahead of normal local time by one hour to give more daytime light in the evening.
Select this option if you use Daylight Saving Time.
Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time starts if you select Enable Daylight Saving. The o'clock field uses the
24-hour format. Here are a couple of examples:
Daylight Saving Time starts in most parts of the United States on the first Sunday of April. Each time zone in the United States starts using Daylight Saving Time at 2 a.m. local time. So, in the United
States, select First, Sunday, April and type 2 in the o'clock field.
Daylight Saving Time starts in the European Union on the last
Sunday of March. All of the time zones in the European Union start using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment (1 a.m. GMT or
UTC). So, in the European Union, select Last, Sunday, March.
The time you type in the o'clock field depends on your time zone.
In Germany, for instance, type 2 because Germany's time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC (GMT+1).
Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time ends if you select Enable Daylight Saving. The o'clock field uses the
24-hour format. Here are a couple of examples:
Daylight Saving Time ends in the United States on the last Sunday of October. Each time zone in the United States stops using
Daylight Saving Time at 2 a.m. local time. So, in the United States, select Last, Sunday, October and type 2 in the o'clock field.
Daylight Saving Time ends in the European Union on the last
Sunday of October. All of the time zones in the European Union stop using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment (1 a.m. GMT or UTC). So, in the European Union, select Last, Sunday,
October. The time you type in the o'clock field depends on your time zone. In Germany for instance, type 2 because Germany's time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC (GMT+1).
Click Apply to save your changes to the BCM50a Integrated
Router.
Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
88 Chapter 5 System screens
ALG
With Application Layer Gateway (ALG), an application can pass through NAT and the firewall. You must also configure NAT and firewall rules depending upon the type of access you want to allow.
Note: You must enable the FTP ALG in order to use bandwidth management on that application.
Configuring ALG
To change the ALG settings of your BCM50a Integrated Router, click SYSTEM and then ALG. The screen appears as shown in
.
Figure 20 ALG
N0115790
Table 13 describes the labels in Figure 20 .
Table 13 ALG
Label
Enable FTP
ALG
Apply
Reset
Description
Select this check box to allow FTP (File Transfer Protocol) to send and receive files through the BCM50a Integrated Router.
Click Apply to save your changes to the BCM50a Integrated Router.
Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.
89
Chapter 6
LAN screens
This chapter describes how to configure LAN settings.
LAN overview
Local Area Network (LAN) is a shared communication system to which many computers are attached. The LAN screens can help you configure a LAN DHCP server, manage IP addresses, configure RIP and multicast settings, and partition your physical network into logical networks.
DHCP setup
Using DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, RFC 2131 and RFC 2132), individual clients can obtain TCP/IP configuration at start-up from a server. You can configure the BCM50a Integrated Router as a DHCP server or disable it.
When configured as a server, the BCM50a Integrated Router provides the TCP/IP configuration for the clients. If DHCP service is disabled, you must have another
DHCP server on your LAN, or else the computer must be configured manually.
IP pool setup
The BCM50a Integrated Router is preconfigured with a pool of IP addresses for the DHCP clients (DHCP Pool). Do not assign static IP addresses from the DHCP pool to your LAN computers.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
90 Chapter 6 LAN screens
DNS servers
Use the LAN IP screen to configure the DNS server information that the BCM50a
Integrated Router sends to the DHCP client devices on the LAN.
LAN TCP/IP
The BCM50a Integrated Router has built in DHCP server capability that assigns
IP addresses and DNS servers to systems that support DHCP client capability.
Factory LAN defaults
The LAN parameters of the BCM50a Integrated Router are preset in the factory with the following values:
• IP address of 192.168.1.1 with subnet mask of 255.255.255.0 (24 bits)
• DHCP server enabled with 126 client IP addresses starting from 192.168.1.2.
These parameters work for the majority of installations. If your ISP gives you explicit DNS server addresses, read the embedded WebGUI help regarding which fields need to be configured.
RIP setup
RIP (Routing Information Protocol, RFC 1058 and RFC 1389) allows a router to exchange routing information with other routers. RIP Direction controls the sending and receiving of RIP packets. When set to Both or Out Only, the
BCM50a Integrated Router broadcasts its routing table periodically. When set to
Both or In Only, it incorporates the RIP information that it receives; when set to
None, it does not send any RIP packets and ignores any RIP packets received.
RIP Version controls the format and the broadcasting method of the RIP packets that the BCM50a Integrated Router sends (it recognizes both formats when receiving). RIP-1 is universally supported; but RIP-2 carries more information.
RIP-1 is probably adequate for most networks, unless you have an unusual network topology.
N0115790
Chapter 6 LAN screens 91
Both RIP-2B and RIP-2M send routing data in RIP-2 format; the difference being that RIP-2B uses subnet broadcasting while RIP-2M uses multicasting.
Multicasting can reduce the load on nonrouter machines since they generally do not listen to the RIP multicast address and so do not receive the RIP packets.
However, if one router uses multicasting, then all routers on your network must use multicasting, also.
By default, RIP Direction is set to Both and RIP Version to RIP-1.
Multicast
Traditionally, IP packets are transmitted in one of two ways—Unicast (1 sender-1 recipient) or Broadcast (1 sender-everybody on the network). Multicast delivers
IP packets to a group of hosts on the network—not everybody and not just 1.
IGMP (Internet Group Multicast Protocol) is a network layer protocol used to establish membership in a Multicast group—it is not used to carry user data.
IGMP version 2 (RFC 2236) is an improvement over version 1 (RFC 1112) but
IGMP version 1 is still in wide use. If you want to read more detailed information about interoperability between IGMP version 2 and version 1, see sections 4 and 5 of Internet Group Management Protocol (RFC 2236). The class D IP address is used to identify host groups and can be in the range 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255.
The address 224.0.0.0 is not assigned to any group and is used by IP multicast computers. The address 224.0.0.1 is used for query messages and is assigned to the permanent group of all IP hosts (including gateways). All hosts must join the
224.0.0.1 group in order to participate in IGMP. The address 224.0.0.2 is assigned to the multicast routers group.
The BCM50a Integrated Router supports both IGMP version 1 (IGMP-v1) and
IGMP version 2 (IGMP-v2). At start up, the BCM50a Integrated Router queries all directly connected networks to gather group membership. After that, the
BCM50a Integrated Router periodically updates this information. IP multicasting can be enabled or disabled on the BCM50a Integrated Router LAN, WAN or both interfaces in the WebGUI (LAN; WAN). Select None to disable IP multicasting on these interfaces.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
92 Chapter 6 LAN screens
Configuring IP
Click LAN to open the IP screen.
Figure 21 LAN IP
N0115790
Chapter 6 LAN screens 93
describes the fields in Figure 21
.
Table 14 LAN IP
Label Description
DHCP With DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, RFC 2131 and RFC
2132) individual clients (workstations) can obtain TCP/IP configuration at startup from a server. Unless you are instructed by your ISP, leave this field set to Server. When configured as a server, the BCM50a
Integrated Router provides TCP/IP configuration for the clients. When set as a server, fill in the IP Pool Starting Address and Pool Size fields.
Select Relay to have the BCM50a Integrated Router forward DHCP requests to another DHCP server. When set to Relay, fill in the DHCP
Server Address field.
Select None to stop the BCM50a Integrated Router from acting as a
DHCP server. When you select None, you must have another DHCP server on your LAN, or else the computers must be manually configured.
IP Pool Starting
Address
This field specifies the first of the contiguous addresses in the IP address pool. The default is 192.168.1.2.
Pool Size
DHCP Server
Address
DNS Servers
Assigned by
DHCP Server
This field specifies the size, or count, of the IP address pool. The default is 126.
Type the IP address of the DHCP server in dotted decimal notation (like
192.168.1.5).
The BCM50a Integrated Router passes a DNS (Domain Name System) server IP address (in the order you specify here) to the DHCP clients.
The BCM50a Integrated Router only passes this information to the LAN
DHCP clients when you select the DHCP Server check box. When you clear the DHCP Server check box, DHCP service is disabled and you must have another DHCP sever on your LAN, or else the computers must have their DNS server addresses manually configured.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
94 Chapter 6 LAN screens
Table 14 LAN IP
Label Description
First DNS
Server
Second DNS
Server
Third DNS
Server
Select From ISP if your ISP dynamically assigns DNS server information (and the BCM50a Integrated Router's WAN IP address).
The field to the right displays the (read-only) DNS server IP address that the ISP assigns.
Select User-Defined if you have the IP address of a DNS server. Enter the DNS server's IP address in the field to the right.
Select DNS Relay to have the BCM50a Integrated Router act as a DNS proxy. The BCM50a Integrated Router's LAN IP address displays in the field to the right (read-only). The BCM50a Integrated Router tells the
DHCP clients on the LAN that the BCM50a Integrated Router itself is the DNS server. When a computer on the LAN sends a DNS query to the BCM50a Integrated Router, the BCM50a Integrated Router forwards the query to the BCM50a Integrated Router's system DNS server (configured in the SYSTEM General screen) and relays the response to the computer. You can only select DNS Relay for one of the three servers.
Select None if you do not want to configure DNS servers. If you do not configure a DNS server, you must know the IP address of a machine in order to access it.
LAN TCP/IP
IP Address Type the IP address of your BCM50a Integrated Router in dotted decimal notation (192.168.1.1 factory default).
IP Subnet Mask The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address. Your BCM50a Integrated Router automatically calculates the subnet mask based on the IP address that you assign. Unless you are implementing subnetting, use the subnet mask computed by the
BCM50a Integrated Router 255.255.255.0.
RIP Direction With RIP (Routing Information Protocol, RFC 1058 and RFC 1389) a router can exchange routing information with other routers. The RIP
Direction field controls the sending and receiving of RIP packets.
Select the RIP direction from Both/In Only/Out Only/None. When set to Both or Out Only, the BCM50a Integrated Router broadcasts its routing table periodically. When set to Both or In Only, it incorporates the RIP information that it receives; when set to None, it does not send any RIP packets and ignores any RIP packets received. None is the default.
N0115790
Chapter 6 LAN screens 95
Table 14 LAN IP
Label Description
RIP Version
Multicast
The RIP Version field controls the format and the broadcasting method of the RIP packets that the BCM50a Integrated Router sends (it recognizes both formats when receiving). RIP-1 is universally supported but RIP-2 carries more information. RIP-1 is probably adequate for most networks, unless you have an unusual network topology. Both RIP-2B and RIP-2M sends the routing data in RIP-2 format; the difference being that RIP-2B uses subnet broadcasting while RIP-2M uses multicasting. Multicasting can reduce the load on nonrouter machines since they generally do not listen to the RIP multicast address and so does not receive the RIP packets. However, if one router uses multicasting, then all routers on your network must use multicasting, also. By default, RIP direction is set to Both and the
Version set to RIP-1.
Select IGMP V-1 or IGMP V-2 or None. IGMP (Internet Group Multicast
Protocol) is a network layer protocol used to establish membership in a
Multicast group—it is not used to carry user data. IGMP version 2 (RFC
2236) is an improvement over version 1 (RFC 1112) but IGMP version
1 is still in wide use. If you want to read more detailed information about interoperability between IGMP version 2 and version 1, see sections 4 and 5 of Internet Group Management Protocol (RFC 2236).
Windows Networking (NetBIOS over TCP/IP)
Allow between
LAN and WAN
Select this check box to forward NetBIOS packets from the LAN to the
WAN and from the WAN to the LAN. If your firewall is enabled with the default policy set to block WAN to LAN traffic, you also need to create a
WAN to LAN firewall rule that forwards NetBIOS traffic.
Clear this check box to block all NetBIOS packets going from the LAN to the WAN and from the WAN to the LAN.
This field does the same as the Allow between WAN and LAN field in the WAN IP screen. Enabling one automatically enables the other.
Apply
Reset
Click Apply to save your changes to the BCM50a Integrated Router.
Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Configuring Static DHCP
With Static DHCP, you can assign IP addresses on the LAN to specific individual computers based on their MAC Addresses.
Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC (Media Access Control) address. The
MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example, 00:A0:C5:00:00:02.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
96 Chapter 6 LAN screens
To change the static DHCP settings, click LAN, then the Static DHCP tab. The screen appears as shown in
.
Figure 22 Static DHCP
N0115790
Table 15 describes the fields in Figure 22
.
Table 15 Static DHCP
Label
#
MAC Address
IP Address
Apply
Reset
Description
This is the index number of the Static IP table entry (row).
Type the MAC address (with colons) of a computer on your LAN.
This field specifies the size, or count of the IP address pool.
Click Apply to save your changes to the BCM50a Integrated
Router.
Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Chapter 6 LAN screens 97
Configuring IP Alias
With IP Alias, you can partition a physical network into different logical networks over the same Ethernet interface. The BCM50a Integrated Router supports three logical LAN interfaces through its single physical Ethernet interface with the
BCM50a Integrated Router itself as the gateway for each LAN network.
Note: Make sure that the subnets of the logical networks do not overlap.
To change the IP Alias settings of your BCM50a Integrated Router, click LAN, then the IP Alias tab. The screen appears as shown in
Figure 23 IP Alias
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
98 Chapter 6 LAN screens
describes the fields in Figure 23
.
Table 16 IP Alias
Label
IP Alias 1,2
IP Address
IP Subnet Mask
RIP Direction
RIP Version
Apply
Reset
Description
Select the check box to configure another LAN network for the
BCM50a Integrated Router.
Enter the IP address of your BCM50a Integrated Router in dotted decimal notation.
Your BCM50a Integrated Router automatically calculates the subnet mask based on the IP address that you assign. Unless you are implementing subnetting, use the subnet mask computed by the BCM50a Integrated Router.
With RIP (Routing Information Protocol, RFC 1058 and RFC 1389), a router can exchange routing information with other routers. The
RIP Direction field controls the sending and receiving of RIP packets. Select the RIP direction from Both/In Only/Out Only/
None. When set to Both or Out Only, the BCM50a Integrated
Router broadcasts its routing table periodically. When set to Both or In Only, it incorporates the RIP information that it receives; when set to None, it does not send any RIP packets and ignores any RIP packets received.
The RIP Version field controls the format and the broadcasting method of the RIP packets that the BCM50a Integrated Router sends (it recognizes both formats when receiving). RIP-1 is universally supported but RIP-2 carries more information. RIP-1 is probably adequate for most networks, unless you have an unusual network topology. Both RIP-2B and RIP-2M sends the routing data in RIP-2 format; the difference being that RIP-2B uses subnet broadcasting while RIP-2M uses multicasting. Multicasting can reduce the load on nonrouter machines because they generally do not listen to the RIP multicast address and so do not receive the
RIP packets. However, if one router uses multicasting, then all routers on your network must use multicasting, also. By default,
RIP direction is set to Both and the Version set to RIP-1.
Click Apply to save your changes to the BCM50a Integrated
Router.
Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.
N0115790
99
Chapter 7
WAN screens
This chapter describes how to configure WAN settings.
WAN overview
This section provides background information on features that you cannot configure in the Wizard.
TCP/IP Priority (metric)
The metric represents the cost of transmission. A router determines the best route for transmission by choosing a path with the lowest cost. RIP routing uses hop count as the measurement of cost, with a minimum of 1 for directly connected networks. The number must be between 1 and 15; a number greater than 15 means the link is down. The smaller the number, the lower the cost.
1 The metric sets the priority for the BCM50a Integrated Router's routes to the
Internet. Each route must have a unique metric.
2 The priority of the WAN port route must always be higher than the traffic redirect route priority.
If the WAN port route has a metric of 1 and the traffic redirect route has a metric of 2, then the WAN port route acts as the primary default route. If the WAN port route fails to connect to the Internet, the BCM50a Integrated Router tries the traffic redirect route next.
The traffic redirect route cannot take priority over the WAN route.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
100 Chapter 7 WAN screens
Configuring General
Click WAN to open the General screen.
Figure 24 WAN: General
N0115790
Chapter 7 WAN screens 101
describes the fields in Figure 24
.
Table 17 WAN: General
Label Description
WAN
Traffic Redirect
Dial Backup
The default WAN connection is 1 as your broadband connection through the WAN port must always be your preferred method of accessing the WAN. The default priority of the routes is WAN, Traffic
Redirect and then Dial Backup (dial backup does not apply to all models).
You have two choices for an auxiliary connection in the event that your regular WAN connection goes down. If Dial Backup is preferred to
Traffic Redirect, then type 14 in the Dial Backup Priority (metric) field (and leave the Traffic Redirect Priority (metric) at the default of
15).
Connectivity
Check
Check Period The BCM50a Integrated Router tests a WAN connection by periodically sending a ping to either the default gateway or the address in the Ping
this Address field.
Type a number of seconds (5 to 300) to set the time interval between checks. Allow more time if your destination IP address handles lots of traffic.
Check Timeout Type the number of seconds (1 to 10) for your BCM50a Integrated
Router to wait for a response to the ping before considering the check to have failed. This setting must be less than the Check Period. Use a higher value in this field if your network is busy or congested.
Check Fail
Tolerance
Type how many WAN connection checks can fail (1-10) before the connection is considered "down" (not connected). The BCM50a
Integrated Router still checks a "down" connection to detect if it reconnects.
Check WAN
Connectivity
Select the check box to have the BCM50a Integrated Router periodically test the WAN connection.
Select Ping Default Gateway to have the BCM50a Integrated Router ping the WAN port's default gateway IP address.
Select Ping this Address and enter a domain name or IP address of a reliable nearby computer (for example, your ISP's DNS server address) to have the BCM50a Integrated Router ping that address. For a domain name, use up to 63 alphanumeric characters (hyphens, periods and the underscore are also allowed) without spaces.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
102 Chapter 7 WAN screens
Table 17 WAN: General
Label
Check Traffic
Redirection
Connectivity
Apply
Reset
Description
Select the check box to have the BCM50a Integrated Router periodically test the traffic redirect connection.
Select Ping Default Gateway to have the BCM50a Integrated Router ping the backup gateway's IP address.
Select Ping this Address and enter a domain name or IP address of a reliable nearby computer (for example, your ISP's DNS server address) to have the BCM50a Integrated Router ping that address. For a domain name, use up to 63 alphanumeric characters (hyphens, periods and the underscore are also allowed) without spaces.
Click Apply to save your changes to the BCM50a Integrated Router.
Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.
PPPoE encapsulation
The BCM50a Integrated Router supports PPPoE (Point-to-Point Protocol over
Ethernet). PPPoE is an IETF Draft standard (RFC 2516) specifying how a personal computer (PC) interacts with a broadband modem (DSL, cable, wireless, etc.) connection. The PPPoE option is for a dial-up connection using PPPoE.
For the service provider, PPPoE offers an access and authentication method that works with existing access control systems (for example Radius). PPPoE provides a login and authentication method that the existing Microsoft Dial-Up Networking software can activate, and therefore requires no new learning or procedures for
Windows users.
One of the benefits of PPPoE is the ability to let you access one of multiple network services, a function known as dynamic service selection. This enables the service provider to easily create and offer new IP services for individuals.
Operationally, PPPoE saves significant effort for both you and the ISP or carrier, as it requires no specific configuration of the broadband modem at the customer site.
By implementing PPPoE directly on the BCM50a Integrated Router (rather than individual computers), the computers on the LAN do not need PPPoE software installed, since the BCM50a Integrated Router does that part of the task.
Furthermore, with NAT, all of the LAN computers will have access.
N0115790
Chapter 7 WAN screens 103
Configuring WAN ISP
To configure the WAN ISP settings for your BCM50a Integrated Router, click
WAN, then the WAN ISP tab. The screen differs depending on the encapsulation .
Figure 25 WAN: WAN ISP
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
104 Chapter 7 WAN screens
describes the fields in Figure 25
.
Table 18 WAN: WAN ISP
Label Description
Name
Mode
Encapsulation
Multiplex
Virtual Circuit ID
Enter the name of your Internet Service Provider, for example,
MyISP. This information is for identification purposes only.
Select Routing (default) from the drop-down list box if your ISP allows multiple computers to share an Internet account. Otherwise select Bridge.
Select the method of encapsulation used by your ISP from the drop-down list box. Choices vary depending on the mode you select in the Mode field.
If you select Bridge in the Mode field, select either PPPoA or RFC
1483.
If you select Routing in the Mode field, select PPPoA, RFC 1483,
ENET ENCAP or PPPoE.
Select the method of multiplexing used by your ISP from the drop-down list. Choices are VC or LLC.
VPI (Virtual Path Identifier) and VCI (Virtual Channel Identifier) define a virtual circuit.
VPI
VCI
Login Information (PPPoA and PPPoE encapsulation only)
Service Name (PPPoE only) Type the name of your PPPoE service here.
User Name Enter the username exactly as your ISP assigned. If assigned a name in the form user@domain , where domain identifies a service name, enter both components exactly as given.
Password
Connection
(PPPoA and
PPPoE encapsulation only)
Nailed-Up
Connection
Connect on
Demand
The valid range for the VPI is 0 to 255. Enter the VPI assigned to you.
The valid range for the VCI is 32 to 65 535 (0 to 31 is reserved for local management of ATM traffic). Enter the VCI assigned to you.
Enter the password associated with the username above.
The schedule rules in SMT menu 26 have priority over your
Connection settings.
Select Nailed-Up Connection if you want your connection up all the time. The BCM50a Integrated Router tries to bring up the connection automatically if it is disconnected.
Select Connect on Demand if you don't want the connection up all the time and specify an idle time-out in the Max Idle Timeout field.
N0115790
Chapter 7 WAN screens 105
Table 18 WAN: WAN ISP (continued)
Label Description
Max Idle Timeout Specify an idle time-out in the Max Idle Timeout field when you select Connect on Demand. The default setting is 0, which means the Internet session does not timeout.
PPPoE Pass
Through
(PPPoE encapsulation only)
This field is available when you select PPPoE encapsulation.
In addition to the BCM50a Integrated Router built-in PPPoE client, you can enable PPPoE pass through to allow up to ten hosts on the
LAN to use PPPoE client software on their computers to connect to the ISP using the BCM50a Integrated Router. Each host can have a separate account and a public WAN IP address.
PPPoE pass through is an alternative to NAT for applications where
NAT is not appropriate.
Disable PPPoE pass through if you do not need to allow hosts on the
LAN to use PPPoE client software on their computers to connect to the ISP.
Enter a subnet mask in dotted decimal notation. Subnet Mask
(ENET ENCAP encapsulation only)
ENET ENCAP
Gateway
(ENET ENCAP encapsulation only)
Apply
Reset
You must specify a gateway IP address (supplied by your ISP) when you select ENET ENCAP in the Encapsulation field.
Click Apply to save the changes.
Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Configuring WAN IP
To change the WAN IP settings of your BCM50a Integrated Router, click WAN, then the WAN IP tab.
This screen varies according to the type of encapsulation you select.
If your ISP did not assign you a fixed IP address, click Get automatically from
ISP (Default); otherwise click Use fixed IP Address and enter the IP address in the field My WAN IP Address.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
106 Chapter 7 WAN screens
Figure 26 WAN: IP
N0115790
Chapter 7 WAN screens 107
describes the fields in Figure 26
.
Table 19 WAN: IP
Label Description
Get automatically from ISP
Use fixed IP address
Select this option if your ISP did not assign you a fixed IP address.
This is the default selection.
Select this option if your ISP assigned a fixed IP address.
My WAN IP
Address
Enter your WAN IP address in this field if you selected Use Fixed
IP Address.
My WAN IP Subnet
Mask (RFC1483 encapsulation only)
Type your network's IP subnet mask.
Remote IP Address
(or Gateway IP
Address)
Type the IP address of the remote network or gateway. The gateway is an immediate neighbor of your BCM50a Integrated
Router that will forward the packet to the destination. On the LAN, the gateway must be a router on the same segment as your
BCM50a Integrated Router; over the WAN, the gateway must be the IP address of one of the remote nodes.
Remote IP Subnet
Mask (PPPoE and
PPPoA encapsulation)
Network Address
Translation
When using a LAN to LAN application, type the IP subnet mask of the destination network. If you need to specify a route to a single host, use a subnet mask of 255.255.255.255, in the subnet mask field, to force the network number to be identical to the host ID.
With Network Address Translation (NAT), the router translations an
Internet protocol address used within one network (for example, a private IP address used in a local network) to a different IP address known within another network (for example, a public IP address used on the Internet). NAT is available when the device is in routing mode.
Choose None to disable NAT.
Choose SUA Only if you have a single public IP address. SUA
(Single User Account) is a subset of NAT that supports two types of mapping: Many-to-One and Server.
Choose Full Feature if you have multiple public IP addresses. Full
Feature mapping types include: One-to-One, Many-to-One (SUA/
PAT), Many-to-Many Overload, Many- One-to-One and Server.
After you select Full Feature, you must configure at least one address-mapping set.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
108 Chapter 7 WAN screens
Table 19 WAN: IP
Label Description
Metric (
Private (PPPoE and
PPPoA only)
This parameter determines if the BCM50a Integrated Router includes the route to this remote node in its RIP broadcasts. If set to
Yes, this route is kept private and not included in RIP broadcast. If
No, the route to this remote node is propagated to other hosts through RIP broadcasts.
RIP Direction
This field sets this route's priority among the routes the BCM50a
Integrated Router uses.
The metric represents the cost of transmission. A router determines the best route for transmission by choosing a path with the lowest cost. RIP routing uses hop count as the measurement of cost, with a minimum of 1 for directly connected networks. The number must be between 1 and 15; a number greater than 15 means the link is down. The smaller the number, the lower the cost.
With RIP (Routing Information Protocol), a router can exchange routing information with other routers. The RIP Direction field controls the sending and receiving of RIP packets.
Choose Both, None, In Only or Out Only.
When set to Both or Out Only, the BCM50a Integrated Router broadcasts its routing table periodically.
When set to Both or In Only, the BCM50a Integrated Router incorporates RIP information that it receives.
When set to None, the BCM50a Integrated Router does not send any RIP packets and ignores any RIP packets received.
By default, RIP Direction is set to Both.
RIP Version The RIP Version field controls the format and the broadcasting method of the RIP packets that the BCM50a Integrated Router sends (it recognizes both formats when receiving).
Choose RIP-1, RIP-2B or RIP-2M.
RIP-1 is universally supported; but RIP-2 carries more information.
RIP-1 is probably adequate for most networks, unless you have an unusual network topology. Both RIP-2B and RIP-2M sends the routing data in RIP-2 format; the difference being that RIP-2B uses subnet broadcasting while RIP-2M uses multicasting. Multicasting can reduce the load on nonrouter machines since they generally do not listen to the RIP multicast address and so do not receive the
RIP packets. However, if one router uses multicasting, then all routers on your network must use multicasting, also. By default, the
RIP Version field is set to RIP-1.
N0115790
Chapter 7 WAN screens 109
Table 19 WAN: IP
Label Description
Multicast Choose None (default), IGMP-V1 or IGMP-V2. IGMP (Internet
Group Multicast Protocol) is a network layer protocol used to establish membership in a Multicast group—it is not used to carry user data. IGMP version 2 (RFC 2236) is an improvement over version 1 (RFC 1112) but IGMP version 1 is still in wide use. If you want to read more detailed information about interoperability between IGMP version 2 and version 1, see sections 4 and 5 of
Internet Group Management Protocol (RFC 2236).
Apply call schedule sets for this remote node. Use the Call
Schedule screens to configure call schedule sets (see
“Call scheduling screens,” on page 373 ).
Call Schedule
(PPPoE and
PPPoA encapsulation)
Windows
Networking
(NetBIOS over
TCP/IP):
Allow from WAN to
LAN
Windows Networking (NetBIOS over TCP/IP): NetBIOS (Network
Basic Input/Output System) are TCP or UDP packets that enable a computer to connect to and communicate with a LAN. For some dial-up services, such as PPPoE, NetBIOS packets cause unwanted calls.
Select this check box to forward NetBIOS packets from the LAN to the WAN and from the WAN to the LAN. If your firewall is enabled with the default policy set to block WAN to LAN traffic, you must also create a WAN to LAN firewall rule that forwards NetBIOS traffic.
Clear this check box to block all NetBIOS packets going from the
LAN to the WAN and from the WAN to the LAN.
This field does the same as the Allow between LAN and WAN field in the LAN IP screen. Enabling one automatically enables the other.
Allow Trigger Dial Select this option to allow NetBIOS packets to initiate calls.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the BCM50a Integrated
Router.
Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Traffic redirect
Traffic redirect forwards WAN traffic to a backup gateway when the BCM50a
Integrated Router cannot connect to the Internet through its normal gateway.
Connect the backup gateway on the WAN so that the BCM50a Integrated Router still provides firewall protection. This feature is not available on all models.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
110 Chapter 7 WAN screens
Figure 27 Traffic Redirect WAN Setup
BCM50a Integrated Router
The network topology illustrated in Figure 28
avoids triangle route security issues when the backup gateway is connected to the LAN. Use IP alias to configure the
LAN into two or three logical networks with the BCM50a Integrated Router itself as the gateway for each LAN network. Put the protected LAN in one subnet
(Subnet 1 in
) and the backup gateway in another subnet (Subnet 2).
Configure a LAN to LAN/BCM50a Integrated Router firewall rule that forwards packets from the protected LAN (Subnet 1) to the backup gateway (Subnet 2).
Figure 28 Traffic Redirect LAN Setup
BCM50a Integrated Router
N0115790
Chapter 7 WAN screens 111
Configuring Traffic Redirect
To change the traffic redirect settings, click WAN, then the Traffic Redirect tab.
The screen appears as shown in Figure 29 .
Figure 29 Traffic Redirect
Table 20 describes the fields in Figure 29
.
Table 20 Traffic Redirect
Label
Active
Backup
Gateway IP
Address
Apply
Reset
Description
Select this check box to have the BCM50a Integrated Router use traffic redirect if the normal WAN connection goes down.
Type the IP address of your backup gateway in dotted decimal notation. The BCM50a Integrated Router automatically forwards traffic to this IP address if the BCM50a Integrated Router's Internet connection terminates.
Click Apply to save your changes back to the BCM50a Integrated
Router.
Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
112 Chapter 7 WAN screens
Configuring Dial Backup
To change the dial backup settings, click WAN, then the Dial Backup tab. The screen appears as shown in
.
Note: To enable or disable Dial Back-up on the router, check or uncheck the 'Enable Dial Back-Up' function. None of the other Basic or
Advanced Settings should be changed.
N0115790
Figure 30 Dial Backup Setup
Chapter 7 WAN screens 113
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
114 Chapter 7 WAN screens
describes the fields in Figure 30
.
Table 21 Dial Backup Setup
Label Description
Enable Dial Backup
Basic Settings
Login Name
Password
Retype to Confirm
Authentication Type
Primary/ Secondary
Phone Number
Select this check box to turn on dial backup.
Type the logon name assigned by your ISP.
Type the password assigned by your ISP.
Type your password again in this field.
Use the drop-down list to select an authentication protocol for outgoing calls. Options are:
CHAP/PAP - Your BCM50a Integrated Router accepts either
CHAP or PAP when requested by this remote node.
CHAP - Your BCM50a Integrated Router accepts CHAP only.
PAP - Your BCM50a Integrated Router accept PAP only.
Type the first (primary) phone number from the ISP for this remote node. If the Primary Phone number is busy or does not answer, your BCM50a Integrated Router dials the Secondary
Phone number, if available. Some areas require dialing the pound sign # before the phone number for local calls. Include a
# symbol at the beginning of the phone numbers as required.
Dial Backup Port Speed Use the drop-down list to select the speed of the connection between the Dial Backup port and the external device. Available speeds are: 9 600, 19 200, 38 400, 57 600, 115 200 or 230 400 b/s.
AT Command Initial
String
Type the AT command string to initialize the WAN device.
Consult the manual of your WAN device connected to your Dial
Backup port for specific AT commands.
Advanced Modem
Setup
TCP/IP Options
Priority (Metric)
Click this button to display the Advanced Setup screen and edit the details of your dial backup setup.
Get IP Address
Automatically from
Remote Server
This field sets this route's priority among the three routes the
BCM50a Integrated Router uses (normal, traffic redirect and dial backup). Type a number (1 to 15) to set the priority of the dial backup route for data transmission. The smaller the number, the higher the priority.
If the three routes have the same metrics, the priority of the routes is as follows: WAN, Traffic Redirect, Dial Backup.
Select this check box if your ISP will automatically assign you an IP address (dynamic IP address).
N0115790
Chapter 7 WAN screens 115
Table 21 Dial Backup Setup
Label Description
Used Fixed IP Address Select this check box if your ISP assigned you a fixed IP address and then enter the IP address in the following field.
My WAN IP Address Leave the field set to 0.0.0.0 (default) to have the ISP or other remote router dynamically (automatically) assign your WAN IP address, if you do not know it. Type your WAN IP address here, if you know it (static). This is the address assigned to your local
BCM50a Integrated Router, not the remote router.
Remote IP Subnet
Mask
Remote Node IP
Address
Leave this field set to 0.0.0.0 (default) to have the ISP or other remote router dynamically send its subnet mask, if you do not know it. Type the remote gateway's subnet mask here, if you know it (static).
Leave this field set to 0.0.0.0 (default) to have the ISP or other remote router dynamically (automatically) send its IP address, if you do not know it. Type the remote gateway's IP address here, if you know it (static).
Enable SUA
Enable RIP
RIP Version
Using Network Address Translation (NAT), the router translates an Internet protocol address used within one network to a different IP address known within another network.
SUA (Single User Account) is a subset of NAT that supports two types of mapping: Many-to-One and Server. When you select this option the BCM50a Integrated Router uses Address
Mapping Set 255. Clear this option to disable NAT.
Select this check box to turn on RIP (Routing Information
Protocol), which allows a router to exchange routing information with other routers.
The RIP Version field controls the format and the broadcasting method of the RIP packets that the BCM50a Integrated Router sends (it recognizes both formats when receiving).
Choose RIP-1, RIP-2B or RIP-2M.
RIP-1 is universally supported; but RIP-2 carries more information. RIP-1 is probably adequate for most networks, unless you have an unusual network topology. Both RIP-2B and RIP-2M sends the routing data in RIP-2 format; the difference being that RIP-2B uses subnet broadcasting while
RIP-2M uses multicasting. Multicasting can reduce the load on nonrouter machines because they generally do not listen to the
RIP multicast address and so do not receive the RIP packets.
However, if one router uses multicasting, then all routers on your network must use multicasting, also.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
116 Chapter 7 WAN screens
Table 21 Dial Backup Setup
Label Description
RIP Direction
Broadcast Dial Backup
Route
Enable Multicast
Multicast Version
RIP (Routing Information Protocol) allows a router to exchange routing information with other routers. The RIP Direction field controls the sending and receiving of RIP packets.
Choose Both, In Only or Out Only.
When set to Both or Out Only, the BCM50a Integrated Router broadcasts its routing table periodically.
When set to Both or In Only, the BCM50a Integrated Router incorporates RIP information that it receives.
Select this check box to forward the backup route broadcasts to the WAN.
Select this check box to turn on IGMP (Internet Group Multicast
Protocol). IGMP is a network layer protocol used to establish membership in a Multicast group—it is not used to carry user data.
Select IGMP-v1 or IGMP-v2. IGMP version 2 (RFC 2236) is an improvement over version 1 (RFC 1112) but IGMP version 1 is still in wide use. For more information about interoperability between IGMP version 2 and version 1, see sections 4 and 5 of
Internet Group Management Protocol (RFC 2236).
Budget
Always On
Configure Budget
Allocated Budget
Period
Select this check box to have the dial backup connection on all of the time.
Select this check box to have the dial backup connection on during the time that you select.
Type the amount of time (in minutes) that the dial backup connection can be used during the time configured in the
Period field. Set an amount that is less than the time period configured in the Period field.
Type the time period (in hours) for how often the budget is reset. For example, to allow calls to this remote node for a maximum of 10 minutes every hour, set the Allocated Budget to 10 (minutes) and the Period to 1 (hour).
Idle Timeout
Call Schedule Sets
Type the number of seconds of idle time (when there is no traffic from the BCM50a Integrated Router to the remote node) for the BCM50a Integrated Router to wait before it automatically disconnects the dial backup connection. This option applies only when the BCM50a Integrated Router initiates the call. The dial backup connection never times out if you set this field to 0
(it is the same as selecting Always On).
Specify call schedule sets to use on the dial backup connection.
The call schedule sets must already be configured (see
Chapter 20, “Call scheduling screens,” on page 373 ).
N0115790
Chapter 7 WAN screens 117
Table 21 Dial Backup Setup
Label
Apply
Reset
Description
Click Apply to save your changes to the BCM50a Integrated
Router.
Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Advanced Modem Setup
AT Command Strings
For regular telephone lines, the default Dial string tells the modem that the line uses tone dialing. ATDT is the command for a switch that requires tone dialing. If your switch requires pulse dialing, change the string to ATDP.
For ISDN lines, there are many more protocols and operational modes. Consult the documentation of your TA. You need additional commands in both Dial and
Init strings.
DTR Signal
The majority of WAN devices default to hanging up the current call when the
DTR (Data Terminal Ready) signal is dropped by the DTE. If the Drop DTR
When Hang Up check box is selected, the BCM50a Integrated Router uses this hardware signal to force the WAN device to hang up, in addition to issuing the drop command ATH.
Response Strings
The response strings tell the BCM50a Integrated Router the tags, or labels, immediately preceding the various call parameters sent from the WAN device.
The response strings have not been standardized; consult the documentation of your WAN device to find the correct tags.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
118 Chapter 7 WAN screens
Configuring Advanced Modem Setup
Click the Edit button in the Dial Backup screen to display the Advanced Setup
Note: To ensure proper operation with the BCM50, none of the default settings should be changed.
Figure 31 Advanced Setup
N0115790
Chapter 7 WAN screens 119
describes the fields in Figure 31
.
Table 22 Advanced Setup
Label Description Example
AT Command
Strings
Dial
Drop
Answer
Drop DTR When
Hang Up
Type the AT Command string to make a call.
atdt
Type the AT Command string to drop a call. ~ represents a one-second wait. For example,
~~~+++~~ath can be used if your modem has a slow response time.
~~+++~~ath
Type the AT Command string to answer a call.
Select this check box to have the BCM50a Integrated
Router drop the DTR (Data Terminal Ready) signal after the AT Command String: Drop is sent out.
ata
AT Response
Strings
CLID
Drop Timeout
(sec)
Type the keyword that precedes the CLID (Calling
Line Identification) in the AT response string. This lets the BCM50a Integrated Router capture the CLID in the AT response string that comes from the WAN device. CLID is required for CLID authentication.
NMBR
Type the keyword preceding the dialed number.
Type the keyword preceding the connection speed.
CONNECT
Called ID
Speed
Call Control
Dial Timeout (sec) Type a number of seconds for the BCM50a Integrated
Router to try to set up an outgoing call before timing out (stopping).
60
Retry Count Type a number of times for the BCM50a Integrated
Router to retry a busy or no answer phone number before blacklisting the number.
0
Retry Interval
(sec)
Type a number of seconds for the BCM50a Integrated
Router to wait before trying another call after a call has failed. This applies before a phone number is blacklisted.
10
Type the number of seconds for the BCM50a
Integrated Router to wait before dropping the DTR signal if it does not receive a positive disconnect confirmation.
20
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
120 Chapter 7 WAN screens
Table 22 Advanced Setup
Label
Call Back Delay
(sec)
Apply
Reset
Description Example
Type a number of seconds for the BCM50a Integrated
Router to wait between dropping a callback request call and dialing the corresponding callback call.
15
Click Apply to save your changes to the BCM50a
Integrated Router.
Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.
N0115790
121
Chapter 8
Network Address Translation (NAT) Screens
This chapter discusses how to configure NAT on the BCM50a Integrated Router.
NAT overview
NAT (Network Address Translation—NAT, RFC 1631) is the translation of the
IP address of a host in a packet. For example, the source address of an outgoing packet, used within one network, is changed to a different IP address known within another network.
NAT definitions
Inside/outside denotes where a host is located relative to the BCM50a Integrated
Router. For example, the computers of your subscribers are the inside hosts, while the Web servers on the Internet are the outside hosts.
Global/local denotes the IP address of a host in a packet as the packet traverses a router. For example, the local address refers to the IP address of a host when the packet is in the local network, while the global address refers to the IP address of the host when the same packet is traveling in the WAN side.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
122 Chapter 8 Network Address Translation (NAT) Screens
Note that inside/outside refers to the location of a host, while global/local refers to the IP address of a host used in a packet. Thus, an inside local address (ILA) is the
IP address of an inside host in a packet when the packet is still in the local network, while an inside global address (IGA) is the IP address of the same inside
host when the packet is on the WAN side. Table 23
summarizes this information.
Table 23 NAT definitions
Term
Inside
Outside
Local
Global
Description
This refers to the host on the LAN.
This refers to the host on the WAN.
This refers to the packet address (source or destination) as the packet travels on the LAN.
This refers to the packet address (source or destination) as the packet travels on the WAN.
Note: NAT never changes the IP address (either local or global) of an outside host.
What NAT does
In the simplest form, NAT changes the source IP address in a packet received from a subscriber (the inside local address) to another (the inside global address) before forwarding the packet to the WAN side. When the response comes back,
NAT translates the destination address (the inside global address) to the inside local address before forwarding it to the original inside host. Note that the IP address (either local or global) of an outside host is never changed.
The global IP addresses for the inside hosts can be either static or dynamically assigned by the ISP. In addition, you can designate servers (for example a web server and a Telnet server) on your local network and make them accessible to the outside world. You can make designated servers on the LAN accessible to the outside world. If you do not define any servers (for Many-to-One and
Many-to-Many Overload mapping), NAT offers the additional benefit of firewall protection. With no servers defined, your BCM50a Integrated Router filters out all incoming inquiries, thus preventing intruders from probing your network. For more information about IP address translation, refer to The IP Network Address
Translator (NAT) (RFC 1631).
N0115790
Chapter 8 Network Address Translation (NAT) Screens 123
How NAT works
Each packet has two addresses–a source address and a destination address. For outgoing packets, the ILA (Inside Local Address) is the source address on the
LAN, and the IGA (Inside Global Address) is the source address on the WAN. For incoming packets, the ILA is the destination address on the LAN, and the IGA is the destination address on the WAN. NAT maps private (local) IP addresses to globally unique ones required for communication with hosts on other networks. It replaces the original IP source address (and TCP or UDP source port numbers for
Many-to-One and Many-to-Many Overload NAT mapping) in each packet and then forwards it to the Internet. The BCM50a Integrated Router keeps track of the original addresses and port numbers so incoming reply packets can have their original values restored, as illustrated in
.
Figure 32 How NAT works
BCM50a Integrated Router
Port restricted cone NAT
The BCM50a Integrated Router uses port restricted cone NAT.
Port restricted cone NAT maps all requests from the same private IP address and port to the same public IP address and port. A host on the Internet can only send a packet to the private IP address and port if the private IP address and port has previously sent a packet to the IP address and port of that host.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
124 Chapter 8 Network Address Translation (NAT) Screens
In
, B can send packets, with source IP address e.f.g.h and port 20202 to
A because A previously sent a packet to IP address e.f.g.h and port 20202. B cannot send packets, with source IP address e.f.g.h and port 10101 to A because A has not sent a packet to IP address e.f.g.h and port 10101.
Figure 33 Port Restricted Cone NAT
NAT application
Figure 34 illustrates a possible NAT application, where three inside LANs
(logical LANs using IP Alias) behind the BCM50a Integrated Router can communicate with three distinct WAN networks. More examples follow at the end of this chapter.
N0115790
Chapter 8 Network Address Translation (NAT) Screens 125
Figure 34 NAT application with IP Alias
BCM50a Integrated Router
NAT mapping types
NAT supports five types of IP/port mapping. They are:
• One to One: In One-to-One mode, the BCM50a Integrated Router maps one local IP address to one global IP address.
• Many to One: In Many-to-One mode, the BCM50a Integrated Router maps multiple local IP addresses to one global IP address. This is equivalent to
SUA (for example, PAT, port address translation), the Single User Account feature (the SUA Only option).
• Many to Many Overload: In Many-to-Many Overload mode, the BCM50a
Integrated Router maps the multiple local IP addresses to shared global IP addresses.
• Many One to One: In Many-One-to-One mode, the BCM50a Integrated
Router maps each local IP address to a unique global IP address.
• Server: With this type you can specify inside servers of different services behind the NAT to be accessible to the outside world. Port numbers do not change for One-to-One and Many-One-to-One NAT mapping types.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
126 Chapter 8 Network Address Translation (NAT) Screens
Table 24 summarizes these types.
Table 24 NAT mapping type
Type
One-to-One
Many-to-One (SUA/PAT)
Many-to-Many Overload
Many-One-to-One
Server
IP Mapping
ILA1
ÅÆ IGA1
ILA1
ÅÆ IGA1
ILA2 ÅÆ IGA1
…
ILA1
ÅÆ IGA1
ILA2 ÅÆ IGA2
ILA3
ÅÆ IGA1
ILA4 ÅÆ IGA2
…
ILA1
ÅÆ IGA1
ILA2 ÅÆ IGA2
ILA3
ÅÆ IGA3
…
Server 1 IP ÅÆ IGA1
Server 2 IP
ÅÆ IGA1
Server 3 IP ÅÆ IGA1
SMT Abbreviations
1-1
M-1
M-M Ov
M-1-1
Server
Using NAT
Note: You must create a firewall rule in addition to setting up SUA/
NAT, to allow traffic from the WAN to be forwarded through the
BCM50a Integrated Router.
SUA (Single User Account) versus NAT
SUA (Single User Account) is an implementation of a subset of NAT that supports two types of mapping, Many-to-One and Server. The BCM50a
Integrated Router also supports Full Feature NAT to map multiple global IP addresses to multiple private LAN IP addresses of clients or servers using mapping types. Select either SUA Only or Full Feature in WAN IP.
N0115790
Chapter 8 Network Address Translation (NAT) Screens 127
SUA Server
A SUA server set is a list of inside (behind NAT on the LAN) servers, for example, web or FTP, that you can make visible to the outside world even though
SUA makes your whole inside network appear as a single computer to the outside world.
You can enter a single port number or a range of port numbers to be forwarded, and the local IP address of the desired server. The port number identifies a service; for example, web service is on port 80 and FTP on port 21. In some cases, such as for unknown services or where one server can support more than one service (for example, both FTP and web service), it is better to specify a range of port numbers. You can allocate a server IP address that corresponds to a port or a range of ports.
With many residential broadband ISP accounts you cannot run any server processes (such as a Web or FTP server) from your location. Your ISP periodically checks for servers and can suspend your account if it discovers any active services at your location. If you are unsure, refer to your ISP.
Default server IP address
In addition to the servers for specified services, NAT supports a default server IP address. A default server receives packets from ports that are not specified in this screen.
Note: If you do not assign a Default Server IP Address, the BCM50a
Integrated Router discards all packets received for ports that are not specified here or in the remote management setup.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
128 Chapter 8 Network Address Translation (NAT) Screens
Port forwarding: Services and Port Numbers
The most often used port numbers are shown in
. Refer to Assigned
Numbers (RFC 1700) for further information about port numbers.
Table 25 Services and port numbers
Services
ECHO
FTP (File Transfer Protocol)
SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol)
DNS (Domain Name System)
Finger
HTTP (Hyper Text Transfer protocol or WWW, Web)
POP3 (Post Office Protocol)
NNTP (Network News Transport Protocol)
SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol)
SNMP trap
PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol)
Port Number
79
80
110
119
7
21
25
53
161
162
1723
Configuring servers behind SUA (example)
For example, you want to assign ports 22-25 to one server, port 80 to another and assign a default server IP address of 192.168.1.35, as shown in
N0115790
Chapter 8 Network Address Translation (NAT) Screens 129
Figure 35 Multiple servers behind NAT example
BCM50a Integrated Router
Configuring SUA Server
Note: If you do not assign a Default Server IP Address, then all packets received for ports not specified in this screen are discarded.
Click SUA/NAT to open the SUA Server screen.
Refer to
Chapter 10, “Firewalls,” on page 145
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
130 Chapter 8 Network Address Translation (NAT) Screens
Figure 36 SUA/NAT setup
N0115790
Table 26 describes the fields in Figure 36
.
Table 26 SUA/NAT setup
Label
Default Server
#
Description
In addition to the servers for specified services, NAT supports a default server. A default server receives packets from ports that are not specified in this screen. If you do not assign a default server IP address, then all packets received for ports not specified in this screen are discarded.
Number of an individual SUA server entry.
Chapter 8 Network Address Translation (NAT) Screens 131
Table 26 SUA/NAT setup
Label
Active
Name
Start Port
Description
Select this check box to enable the SUA server entry. Clear this check box to disallow forwarding of these ports to an inside server without having to delete the entry.
Enter a name to identify this port forwarding rule.
Enter a port number here. To forward only one port, enter it again in the End Port field. To specify a range of ports, enter the last port to be forwarded in the End Port No field
End Port
Server IP
Address
Apply
Reset
Enter the inside IP address of the server here.
Click Apply to save your changes to the BCM50a Integrated Router.
Click Reset to clear your changes.
Configuring Address Mapping
Ordering your rules is important because the BCM50a Integrated Router applies the rules in the order that you specify. When a rule matches the current packet, the
BCM50a Integrated Router takes the corresponding action and the remaining rules are ignored. If there are any empty rules before your new configured rule, your configured rule is pushed up by that number of empty rules. For example, if you have already configured rules 1 to 6 in your current set and you configure rule number 9. In the set summary screen, the new rule becomes rule 7, not 9. If you delete rule 4, rules 5 to 7 are pushed up by 1 rule, so old rules 5, 6, and 7 become new rules 4, 5, and 6.
To change the NAT address mapping settings, click SUA/NAT, then the Address
Mapping tab. The screen appears as shown in Figure 37 .
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
132 Chapter 8 Network Address Translation (NAT) Screens
Figure 37 Address Mapping
N0115790
Table 27 describes the fields in Figure 37
.
Table 27 Address Mapping
Label Description
Local Start IP
Local End IP
This refers to the Inside Local Address (ILA), that is the starting local IP address. Local IP addresses are N/A for Server port mapping.
This is the end Inside Local Address (ILA). If the rule is for all local IP addresses, then this field displays 0.0.0.0 and 255.255.255.255 as the
Local End IP address. This field is N/A for One-to-One and Server mapping types.
Global Start IP This refers to the Inside Global IP Address (IGA). 0.0.0.0 is for a dynamic IP address from your ISP with Many-to-One and Server mapping types.
Global End IP This is the ending Inside Global Address (IGA), that is the starting global IP address. This field is N/A for One-to-One, Many-to-One and
Server mapping types.
Chapter 8 Network Address Translation (NAT) Screens 133
Table 27 Address Mapping
Label
Type
Edit
Delete
Insert
Description
1. One-to-One mode maps one local IP address to one global IP address. Note that port numbers do not change for the One-to-one NAT mapping type.
2. Many-to-One mode maps multiple local IP addresses to one global
IP address. This is equivalent to SUA (that is, PAT, port address translation), the Single User Account feature.
3. Many-to-Many Overload mode maps multiple local IP addresses to shared global IP addresses.
4. Many One-to-One mode maps each local IP address to unique global IP addresses.
5. Server permits you to specify inside servers of different services behind the NAT to be accessible to the outside world.
Click Edit to go to the Address Mapping Rule screen.
Click Delete to delete an address mapping rule.
Click Insert to insert a new mapping rule before an existing one.
Configuring Address Mapping
To edit an Address Mapping rule, click the Edit button to display the screen
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
134 Chapter 8 Network Address Translation (NAT) Screens
Figure 38 Address Mapping edit
N0115790
Table 28 describes the fields in Figure 38
.
Table 28 Address Mapping edit
Label
Type
Local Start IP
Local End IP
Global Start IP
Description
Choose the port mapping type from one of the following.
1. One-to-One: One-to-one mode maps one local IP address to one global IP address. Note that port numbers do not change for
One-to-one NAT mapping type.
2. Many-to-One: Many-to-One mode maps multiple local IP addresses to one global IP address. This is equivalent to SUA (for example, PAT, port address translation), the Single User Account feature.
3. Many-to-Many Ov (Overload): Many-to-Many Overload mode maps multiple local IP addresses to shared global IP addresses.
4. Many One-to-One: Many One-to-one mode maps each local IP address to unique global IP addresses.
5. Server: With this type, you can specify inside servers of different services behind the NAT to be accessible to the outside world.
This is the starting Inside Local IP Address (ILA). Local IP addresses are N/A for Server port mapping.
This is the end Inside Local IP Address (ILA). If your rule is for all local IP addresses, then enter 0.0.0.0 as the Local Start IP address and 255.255.255.255 as the Local End IP address.
This field is N/A for One-to-One and Server mapping types.
This is the starting Inside Global IP Address (IGA). Enter 0.0.0.0 here if you have a dynamic IP address from your ISP.
Chapter 8 Network Address Translation (NAT) Screens 135
Table 28 Address Mapping edit
Label
Global End IP
Apply
Reset
Description
This is the ending Inside Global IP Address (IGA). This field is N/A for One-to-One, Many-to-One and Server mapping types.
Click Apply to save your changes to the BCM50a Integrated
Router.
Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Trigger Port Forwarding
Some services use a dedicated range of ports on the client side and a dedicated range of ports on the server side. With regular port forwarding you set a forwarding port in NAT to forward a service (coming in from the server on the
WAN) to the IP address of a computer on the client side (LAN). The problem is that port forwarding only forwards a service to a single LAN IP address. In order to use the same service on a different LAN computer, you have to manually replace the LAN computer's IP address in the forwarding port with another LAN computer's IP address,
Trigger port forwarding solves this problem by allowing computers on the LAN to dynamically take turns using the service. The BCM50a Integrated Router records the IP address of a LAN computer that sends traffic to the WAN to request a service with a specific port number and protocol (a trigger port). When the WAN port on the BCM50a Integrated Router receives a response with a specific port number and protocol (incoming port), the BCM50a Integrated Router forwards the traffic to the LAN IP address of the computer that sent the request. After that connection closes, another computer on the LAN can use the service in the same manner. This way, you do not need to configure a new IP address each time you want a different LAN computer to use the application.
Trigger Port Forwarding example
Figure 39 illustrates an example of trigger port forwarding.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
136 Chapter 8 Network Address Translation (NAT) Screens
Figure 39 Trigger Port Forwarding process: example
BCM50a Integrated Router
1 Jane (A) requests a file from the Real Audio server (port 7070).
2 Port 7070 is a trigger port and causes the BCM50a Integrated Router to record
Jane’s computer IP address. The BCM50a Integrated Router associates Jane's computer IP address with the incoming port range of 6970-7170.
3 The Real Audio server responds using a port number ranging between
6970-7170.
4 The BCM50a Integrated Router forwards the traffic to Jane’s computer IP address.
5 Only Jane can connect to the Real Audio server until the connection is closed or times out. The BCM50a Integrated Router times out in three minutes with
UDP (User Datagram Protocol) or two hours with TCP/IP (Transfer Control
Protocol/Internet Protocol).
Two points to remember about Trigger Ports
Trigger events only happen on data that is coming from inside the BCM50a
Integrated Router and going to the outside.
If an application needs a continuous data stream, that port (range) is tied up so that another computer on the LAN cannot trigger it.
N0115790
Chapter 8 Network Address Translation (NAT) Screens 137
Configuring Trigger Port Forwarding
To change trigger port settings of your BCM50a Integrated Router, click SUA/
NAT and the Trigger Port tab. The screen appears as shown in
.
Note: Only one LAN computer can use a trigger port (range) at a time.
Figure 40 Trigger Port
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
138 Chapter 8 Network Address Translation (NAT) Screens
describes the fields in Figure 40
.
Table 29 Trigger Port
Label
No.
Name
Incoming
Start Port
End Port
Trigger
Start Port
End Port
Apply
Reset
Description
This is the rule index number (read-only).
Type a unique name (up to 15 characters) for identification purposes. All characters are permitted, including spaces.
Incoming is a port (or a range of ports) that a server on the WAN uses when it sends out a particular service. The BCM50a Integrated Router forwards the traffic with this port (or range of ports) to the client computer on the LAN that requested the service.
Type a port number or the starting port number in a range of port numbers.
Type a port number or the ending port number in a range of port numbers.
The trigger port is a port (or a range of ports) that causes (or triggers) the BCM50a Integrated Router to record the IP address of the LAN computer that sent the traffic to a server on the WAN.
Type a port number or the starting port number in a range of port numbers.
Type a port number or the ending port number in a range of port numbers.
Click Apply to save your changes to the BCM50a Integrated Router.
Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.
N0115790
139
Chapter 9
Static Route screens
This chapter shows you how to configure static routes for your BCM50a
Integrated Router.
Static Route overview
Each remote node specifies only the network to which the gateway is directly connected, and the BCM50a Integrated Router has no knowledge of the networks beyond. For instance, the BCM50a Integrated Router knows about network N2 in
Figure 41 through remote node Router 1. However, the BCM50a Integrated
Router is unable to route a packet to network N3 because it does not know that there is a route through the same remote node Router 1 (through gateway Router
2). The static routes are for you to tell the BCM50a Integrated Router about the networks beyond the remote nodes.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
140 Chapter 9 Static Route screens
Figure 41 Example of Static Routing topology
BCM50a Integrated Router
Configuring IP Static Route
Click STATIC ROUTE to open the Route Entry screen.
Note: The first static route entry is for the default WAN route. You cannot modify or delete this static default route.
N0115790
Figure 42 Static Route screen
Chapter 9 Static Route screens 141
describes the fields in Figure 41
.
Table 30 IP Static Route summary
Label
#
Name
Active
Destination
Gateway
Edit
Description
Number of an individual static route.
Name that describes or identifies this route.
This field shows whether this static route is active (Yes) or not (No).
This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination. Routing is always based on network number.
This is the IP address of the gateway. The gateway is a router or switch on the same network segment as the BCM50a Integrated
Router LAN or WAN port. The gateway helps forward packets to their destinations.
Click a static route index number and then click Edit to set up a static route on the BCM50a Integrated Router.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
142 Chapter 9 Static Route screens
Configuring Route entry
Select a static route index number and click Edit. The screen is illustrated in
Figure 43 . Fill in the required information for each static route.
Figure 43 Edit IP Static Route
N0115790
Table 31 describes the fields in Figure 43
.
Table 31 Edit IP Static Route
Label Description
Route Name
Active
Destination IP
Address
Enter the name of the IP static route. Leave this field blank to delete this static route.
This field allows you to activate or deactivate this static route.
This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination. Routing is always based on network number. If you need to specify a route to a single host, use a subnet mask of
255.255.255.255 in the subnet mask field to force the network number to be identical to the host ID.
IP Subnet Mask Enter the IP subnet mask here.
Gateway IP
Address
Enter the IP address of the gateway. The gateway is a router or switch on the same network segment as the BCM50a Integrated
Router LAN or WAN port. The gateway helps forward packets to their destinations.
Chapter 9 Static Route screens 143
Table 31 Edit IP Static Route
Label
Metric
Private
Apply
Reset
Description
Metric represents the cost of transmission for routing purposes. IP routing uses hop count as the measurement of cost, with a minimum of 1 for directly connected networks. Enter a number that approximates the cost for this link. The number need not be precise, but it must be between 1 and 15. In practice, 2 or 3 is usually a good number.
This parameter determines if the BCM50a Integrated Router includes this route to a remote node in its RIP broadcasts.
Select this check box to keep this route private and not included in
RIP broadcasts. Clear this check box to propagate this route to other hosts through RIP broadcasts.
Click Apply to save your changes to the BCM50a Integrated Router.
Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
144 Chapter 9 Static Route screens
N0115790
145
Chapter 10
Firewalls
This chapter gives some background information on firewalls and introduces the
BCM50a Integrated Router firewall.
Firewall overview
Originally, the term firewall referred to a construction technique designed to prevent the spread of fire from one room to another. The networking term firewall is a system or group of systems that enforces an access control policy between two networks. It can also be defined as a mechanism used to protect a trusted network from an untrusted network. Of course, firewalls cannot solve every security problem. A firewall is one of the mechanisms used to establish a network security perimeter in support of a network security policy. It must never be the only mechanism or method employed. For a firewall to guard effectively, you must design and deploy it appropriately. This requires integrating the firewall into a broad information security policy. In addition, specific policies must be implemented within the firewall itself.
Types of firewalls
There are three main types of firewalls:
1 Packet Filtering firewalls
2 Application level firewalls
3 Stateful Inspection firewalls
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
146 Chapter 10 Firewalls
Packet filtering firewalls
Packet filtering firewalls restrict access based on the source or destination computer network address of a packet and the type of application.
Application level firewalls
Application level firewalls restrict access by serving as proxies for external servers. Because they use programs written for specific Internet services, such as
HTTP, FTP and Telnet, they can evaluate network packets for valid application specific data. Application level firewalls have a number of general advantages over the default mode of permitting application traffic directly to internal hosts:
1 Information hiding prevents the names of internal systems from being made known through DNS to outside systems, because the application gateway is the only host whose name must be made known to outside systems.
2 Robust authentication and logging preauthenticates application traffic before it reaches internal hosts and causes it to be logged more effectively than if it were logged with standard host logging. Filtering rules at the packet filtering router can be less complex than if the router needed to filter application traffic and direct it to a number of specific systems. The router need only allow application traffic destined for the application gateway and reject the rest.
Stateful Inspection firewalls
Stateful inspection firewalls restrict access by screening data packets against defined access rules. They make access control decisions based on IP address and protocol. They also inspect the session data to assure the integrity of the connection and to adapt to dynamic protocols. These firewalls generally provide the best speed and transparency; however, they often lack the granular application level access control or caching that some proxies support. For more information,
see “Stateful inspection” on page 153
.
Firewalls, of one type or another, have become an integral part of standard security solutions for enterprises.
N0115790
Chapter 10 Firewalls 147
Introduction to the BCM50a Integrated Router firewall
The BCM50a Integrated Router firewall is a stateful inspection firewall 1 is designed to protect against Denial of Service attacks when activated (in SMT menu 21.2 or in the WebGUI). The BCM50a Integrated Router allows a private
Local Area Network (LAN) to be securely connected to the Internet. The
BCM50a Integrated Router can be used to prevent theft, destruction, and modification of data, as well as log events, which is important to the security of your network. The BCM50a Integrated Router also has packet filtering capabilities.
The BCM50a Integrated Router is installed between the LAN and a broadband modem connecting to the Internet, so that it can allow it to act as a secure gateway for all data passing between the Internet and the LAN.
The BCM50a Integrated Router has one Ethernet WAN port and one Ethernet
LAN port, which are used to physically separate the network into two areas.
• The WAN (Wide Area Network) port attaches to the broadband modem
(cable or ADSL) connecting to the Internet.
• The LAN (Local Area Network) port attaches to a network of computers, which needs security from the outside world. These computers have access to
Internet services such as e-mail, FTP, and the World Wide Web. However, inbound access is not allowed unless the remote host is authorized to use a specific service.
1
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
148 Chapter 10 Firewalls
Figure 44 BCM50a Integrated Router firewall application
BCM50a Integrated Router
Denial of Service
Denials of Service (DoS) attacks are aimed at devices and networks with a connection to the Internet. Their goal is not to steal information, but to disable a device or network so users no longer have access to network resources. The
BCM50a Integrated Router is preconfigured to automatically detect and thwart currently known DoS attacks.
Basics
Computers share information over the Internet using a common language called
TCP/IP. TCP/IP, in turn, is a set of application protocols that perform specific functions. An extension number, called the TCP port or UDP port, identifies these protocols, such as HTTP (Web), FTP (File Transfer Protocol), and POP3
(E-mail). For example, Web traffic uses TCP port 80, by default.
N0115790
Chapter 10 Firewalls 149
When computers communicate on the Internet, they use the client/server model, where the server listens on a specific TCP/UDP port for information requests from remote client computers on the network. For example, a Web server typically listens on port 80. Note that, while a computer can be intended for use over a single port, such as Web on port 80, other ports are also active and vulnerable to attack by hackers.
Some of the most common IP ports are:
Table 32 Common IP ports
21
23
25
FTP
Telnet
SMTP
53
80
110
DNS
HTTP
POP3
Types of DoS attacks
There are four types of DoS attacks:
• Those that exploit bugs in a TCP/IP implementation.
• Those that exploit weaknesses in the TCP/IP specification.
• Brute force attacks that flood a network with useless data.
• IP Spoofing.
1 Ping of Death and Teardrop attacks exploit bugs in the TCP/IP implementations of various computer and host systems.
Ping of Death uses a ping utility to create an IP packet that exceeds the maximum
65 536 bytes of data allowed by the IP specification. The oversize packet is then sent to an unsuspecting system, and can cause systems to crash, hang, or reboot.
Teardrop attack exploits weaknesses in the reassembly of IP packet fragments. As data is transmitted through a network, IP packets are often broken up into smaller chunks. Each fragment looks like the original IP packet except that it contains an offset field that says, for instance, “This fragment is carrying bytes 200 through
400 of the original (non fragmented) IP packet.” The Teardrop program creates a series of IP fragments with overlapping offset fields. After these fragments are reassembled at the destination, some systems crash, hang, or reboot.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
150 Chapter 10 Firewalls
2 Weaknesses in the TCP/IP specification leave it open to SYN Flood and
LAND attacks. These attacks are executed during the handshake that initiates a communication session between two applications.
Figure 45 Three-way handshake
Under normal circumstances, the application that initiates a session sends a SYN
(synchronize) packet to the receiving server. The receiver sends back an ACK
(acknowledgment) packet and its own SYN, and then the initiator responds with an ACK (acknowledgment). After this handshake, a connection is established.
SYN Attack floods a targeted system with a series of SYN packets. Each packet causes the targeted system to issue a SYN-ACK response. While the targeted system waits for the ACK that follows the SYN-ACK, it queues up all outstanding
SYN-ACK responses on what is known as a backlog queue. SYN-ACKs are moved off the queue only when an ACK comes back or when an internal timer
(which is set at relatively long intervals) terminates the three-way handshake.
Once the queue is full, the system ignores all incoming SYN requests, making the system unavailable for legitimate users.
N0115790
Figure 46 SYN flood
Chapter 10 Firewalls 151
In a LAND Attack, hackers flood SYN packets into the network with a spoofed source IP address of the targeted system. This makes it appear as if the host computer sent the packets to itself, making the system unavailable while the target system tries to respond to itself.
3 A brute force attack, such as a Smurf attack, targets a feature in the IP specification known as directed or subnet broadcasting, to quickly flood the target network with useless data. A Smurf hacker floods a router with Internet
Control Message Protocol (ICMP) echo request packets (pings). Since the destination IP address of each packet is the broadcast address of the network, the router broadcasts the ICMP echo request packet to all hosts on the network. If there are numerous hosts, this creates a large amount of ICMP echo request and response traffic. If a hacker chooses to spoof the source IP address of the ICMP echo request packet, the resulting ICMP traffic not only clogs up the intermediary network, but also congests the network of the spoofed source IP address, known as the victim network. This flood of broadcast traffic consumes all available bandwidth, making communications impossible.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
152 Chapter 10 Firewalls
Figure 47 Smurf attack
N0115790
• ICMP vulnerability
ICMP is an error reporting protocol that works in concert with IP. The following
ICMP types trigger an alert:
Table 33 ICMP commands that trigger alerts
5
13
14
17
18
REDIRECT
TIMESTAMP_REQUEST
TIMESTAMP_REPLY
ADDRESS_MASK_REQUEST
ADDRESS_MASK_REPLY
• Illegal Commands (NetBIOS and SMTP)
The only legal NetBIOS commands are shown in Table 34
— all others are illegal.
Table 34 Legal NetBIOS commands
MESSAGE:
REQUEST:
POSITIVE:
NEGATIVE:
RETARGET:
KEEPALIVE:
Chapter 10 Firewalls 153
All SMTP commands are illegal except for those displayed in Table 35 .
Table 35 Legal SMTP commands
AUTH DATA
QUIT RCPT
EHLO ETRN EXPN HELO HELP MAIL NOOP
RSET SAML SEND SOML TURN VRFY
• Traceroute
Traceroute is a utility used to determine the path a packet takes between two endpoints. Sometimes, when a packet filter firewall is configured incorrectly, an attacker can traceroute the firewall and gain knowledge of the network topology inside the firewall.
4 Often, many DoS attacks also employ a technique known as IP Spoofing as part of their attack. IP Spoofing can be used to break into systems, to hide the hacker's identity, or to magnify the effect of the DoS attack. IP Spoofing is a technique used to gain unauthorized access to computers by tricking a router or firewall into thinking that the communications are coming from within the trusted network. To engage in IP spoofing, a hacker must modify the packet headers so that it appears that the packets originate from a trusted host and is allowed through the router or firewall. The BCM50a Integrated Router blocks all IP Spoofing attempts.
Stateful inspection
With stateful inspection, fields of the packets are compared to packets that are already known to be trusted. For example, if you access an outside service, the proxy server remembers things about your original request, like the port number and source and destination addresses. This remembering is called saving the state.
When the outside system responds to your request, the firewall compares the received packets with the saved state to determine if they are allowed in. The
BCM50a Integrated Router uses stateful packet inspection to protect the private
LAN from hackers and vandals on the Internet. By default, the BCM50a
Integrated Router stateful inspection allows all communications to the Internet that originate from the LAN, and blocks all traffic to the LAN that originates from the Internet.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
154 Chapter 10 Firewalls
In summary, stateful inspection:
• Allows all sessions originating from the LAN (local network) to the WAN
(Internet).
• Denies all sessions originating from the WAN to the LAN.
Figure 48 Stateful inspection
BCM50a Integrated Router
Figure 48 shows the BCM50a Integrated Router default firewall rules in action,
and demonstrates how stateful inspection works. User A can initiate a Telnet session from within the LAN and responses to this request are allowed. However, other Telnet traffic initiated from the WAN is blocked.
Stateful inspection process
In the following example, the following sequence of events occurs when a TCP packet leaves the LAN network through the firewall's WAN interface. The TCP packet is the first in a session, and the packet's application layer protocol is configured for a firewall rule inspection:
1 The packet travels from the firewall's LAN to the WAN.
2 The packet is evaluated against the interface's existing outbound access list, and the packet is permitted (a denied packet is dropped at this point).
N0115790
Chapter 10 Firewalls 155
3 The packet is inspected by a firewall rule to determine and record information about the state of the packet's connection. This information is recorded in a new state table entry created for the new connection. If there is not a firewall rule for this packet and it is not an attack, the Action for packets that don’t
match firewall rules field determines the action for this packet.
4 Based on the obtained state information, a firewall rule creates a temporary access list entry that is inserted at the beginning of the WAN interface's inbound extended access list. This temporary access list entry is designed to permit inbound packets of the same connection as the outbound packet just inspected.
5 The outbound packet is forwarded out through the interface.
6 Later, an inbound packet reaches the interface. This packet is part of the connection previously established with the outbound packet. The inbound packet is evaluated against the inbound access list, and is permitted because of the temporary access list entry previously created.
7 The packet is inspected by a firewall rule, and the connection's state table entry is updated as necessary. You can modify the inbound extended access list temporary entries based on the updated state information, in order to permit only packets that are valid for the current state of the connection.
8 Any additional inbound or outbound packets that belong to the connection are inspected to update the state table entry and to modify the temporary inbound access list entries as required, and are forwarded through the interface.
9 When the connection terminates or times out, the connection's state table entry is deleted and the connection's temporary inbound access list entries are deleted.
Stateful inspection and the BCM50a Integrated Router
Additional rules can be defined to extend or override the default rules. For example, a rule can be created that will:
• Block all traffic of a certain type, such as IRC (Internet Relay Chat), from the
LAN to the Internet.
• Allow certain types of traffic from the Internet to specific hosts on the LAN.
• Allow access to a Web server to everyone but competitors.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
156 Chapter 10 Firewalls
• Restrict use of certain protocols, such as Telnet, to authorized users on the
LAN.
These custom rules work by evaluating the network traffic source IP address, destination IP address, IP protocol type, and comparing these to rules set by the administrator.
Note: The ability to define firewall rules is a very powerful tool. Using custom rules, it is possible to disable all firewall protection or block all access to the Internet. Use extreme caution when creating or deleting firewall rules. Test changes after creating them to make sure they work correctly.
Below is a brief technical description of how these connections are tracked.
Connections can either be defined by the upper protocols (for instance, TCP), or by the BCM50a Integrated Router itself (as with the virtual connections created for UDP and ICMP).
TCP security
The BCM50a Integrated Router uses state information embedded in TCP packets.
The first packet of any new connection has its SYN flag set and its ACK flag cleared; these are initiation packets. All packets that do not have this flag structure are called subsequent packets, since they represent data that occurs later in the
TCP stream.
If an initiation packet originates on the WAN, someone is trying to make a connection from the Internet into the LAN. Except in a few special cases, (see
“Upper layer protocols” on page 157 ), these packets are dropped and logged.
If an initiation packet originates on the LAN, someone is trying to make a connection from the LAN to the Internet. Assuming that this is an acceptable part of the security policy (as is the case with the default policy), the connection is allowed. A cache entry is added, which includes connection information such as
IP addresses, TCP ports, and sequence numbers.
N0115790
Chapter 10 Firewalls 157
After the BCM50a Integrated Router receives any subsequent packet (from the
Internet or from the LAN), its connection information is extracted and checked against the cache. A packet is only allowed to pass through if it corresponds to a valid connection (that is, if it is a response to a connection that originated on the
LAN).
UDP/ICMP security
UDP and ICMP do not contain any connection information (such as sequence numbers). However, at the very minimum, they contain an IP address pair (source and destination). UDP also contains port pairs, and ICMP has type and code information. All of this data can be analyzed in order to build virtual connections in the cache.
For instance, any UDP packet that originates on the LAN creates a cache entry. Its
IP address and port pairs are stored. For a short period of time, UDP packets from the WAN that have matching IP and UDP information are allowed back in through the firewall.
A similar situation exists for ICMP, except that the BCM50a Integrated Router is even more restrictive. Specifically, only outgoing echoes allow incoming echo replies, outgoing address mask requests allow incoming address mask replies, and outgoing timestamp requests allow incoming timestamp replies. No other ICMP packets are allowed in through the firewall, simply because they are too dangerous and contain too little tracking information. For instance, ICMP redirect packets are never allowed in, since they can be used to reroute traffic through attacking machines.
Upper layer protocols
Some higher layer protocols (such as FTP and RealAudio) utilize multiple network connections simultaneously. In general terms, they usually have a control connection, which is used for sending commands between endpoints, and then data connections, which are used for transmitting bulk information.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
158 Chapter 10 Firewalls
Consider the FTP protocol. A user on the LAN opens a control connection to a server on the Internet and requests a file. At this point, the remote server opens a data connection from the Internet. For FTP to work properly, this connection must be allowed to pass through even though a connection from the Internet is normally rejected.
In order to achieve the above scenario, the BCM50a Integrated Router inspects the application level FTP data. Specifically, it searches for outgoing PORT commands, and when it sees these; it adds a cache entry for the anticipated data connection. This can be done safely, since the PORT command contains address and port information, which can be used to uniquely identify the connection.
Any protocol that operates in this way must be supported on a case-by-case basis.
You can use the Custom Ports feature in the WebGUI to do this.
Guidelines for enhancing security with your firewall
1 Change the default password through SMT or WebGUI.
2 Think about access control before you connect your device to the network in any way.
3 Limit who can Telnet into your router.
4 Do not enable any local service (such as SNMP or NTP) that you do not use.
Any enabled service can present a potential security risk. A determined hacker can find creative ways to misuse the enabled services to access the firewall or the network.
5 For local services that are enabled, protect against misuse. Protect by configuring the services to communicate only with specific peers, and protect by configuring rules to block packets for the services at specific interfaces.
6 Protect against IP spoofing by making sure the firewall is active.
7 Keep the firewall in a secured (locked) room.
Packet filtering vs. firewall
Below are some comparisons between the filtering and firewall functions of the
BCM50a Integrated Router.
N0115790
Chapter 10 Firewalls 159
Packet filtering:
• The router filters packets as they pass through the router interface according to the filter rules you designed.
• Packet filtering is a powerful tool, yet can be complex to configure and maintain, especially if you need a chain of rules to filter a service.
• Packet filtering only checks the header portion of an IP packet.
When to use filtering
1 To block or allow LAN packets by their MAC addresses.
2 To block or allow special IP packets that are neither TCP nor UDP, nor ICMP packets.
3 To block or allow both inbound (WAN to LAN) and outbound (LAN to
WAN) traffic between the specific inside host or network A and outside host or network B. If the filter blocks the traffic from A to B, it also blocks the traffic from B to A. Filters cannot distinguish traffic originating from an inside host or an outside host by IP address.
4 To block or allow IP trace route.
Firewall
• The firewall inspects packet contents as well as their source and destination addresses. Firewalls of this type employ an inspection module, applicable to all protocols, that understands data in the packet is intended for other layers, from the network layer (IP headers) up to the application layer.
• The firewall performs stateful inspection. It takes into account the state of the connections it handles, so that, for example, a legitimate incoming packet can be matched with the outbound request for that packet and allowed in.
Conversely, an incoming packet masquerading as a response to a nonexistent outbound request can be blocked.
• The firewall uses session filtering, or smart rules, that enhance the filtering process and control the network session rather than control individual packets in a session.
• The firewall provides e-mail service to notify you of routine reports and when alerts occur.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
160 Chapter 10 Firewalls
When to use the firewall
1 To prevent DoS attacks and prevent hackers cracking your network.
2 A range of source and destination IP addresses as well as port numbers can be specified within one firewall rule, making the firewall a better choice when complex rules are required.
3 To selectively block or allow inbound or outbound traffic between inside host or networks and outside host or networks. Remember that filters cannot distinguish traffic originating from an inside host or an outside host by IP address.
4 The firewall performs better than filtering if you need to check many rules.
5 Use the firewall if you need routine e-mail reports about your system or need to be alerted when attacks occur.
6 The firewall can block any specific URL traffic that occurs in the future. The
URL can be saved in an Access Control List (ACL) database.
N0115790
Chapter 11
Firewall screens
This chapter shows you how to configure your BCM50a Integrated Router firewall.
161
Access methods
The WebGUI is, by far, the most comprehensive firewall configuration tool your
BCM50a Integrated Router has to offer. For this reason, Nortel recommends that you configure your firewall using the WebGUI. With SMT screens, you can activate the firewall. CLI commands provide limited configuration options and are only recommended for advanced users, refer to for firewall CLI commands.
Firewall policies overview
Firewall rules are grouped based on the direction of travel of packets to which they apply:
LAN to LAN/BCM50a Integrated Router WAN to LAN
LAN to WAN WAN to WAN/BCM50a Integrated Router
By default, BCM50a Integrated Router stateful packet inspection allows packets traveling in the following directions:
• LAN to LAN/BCM50a Integrated Router
This allows computers on the LAN to manage the BCM50a Integrated Router and communicate between networks or subnets connected to the LAN interface.
• LAN to WAN
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
162 Chapter 11 Firewall screens
By default, the BCM50a Integrated Router stateful packet inspection blocks packets traveling in the following directions:
• WAN to LAN
• WAN to WAN/BCM50a Integrated Router
This prevents computers on the WAN from using the BCM50a Integrated
Router as a gateway to communicate with other computers on the WAN, or to manage the BCM50a Integrated Router, or both.
You can define additional rules and sets or modify existing ones, but exercise extreme caution in doing so.
Note: If you configure firewall rules without a good understanding of how they work, you can inadvertently introduce security risks to the firewall and to the protected network. Make sure you test your rules after you configure them.
For example, you can create rules to:
• Block certain types of traffic, such as IRC (Internet Relay Chat), from the
LAN to the Internet.
• Allow certain types of traffic, such as Lotus Notes database synchronization, from specific hosts on the Internet to specific hosts on the LAN.
• Allow everyone except your competitors to access a Web server.
• Restrict use of certain protocols, such as Telnet, to authorized users on the
LAN.
These custom rules work by comparing the Source IP address, Destination IP address and IP protocol type of network traffic to rules set by the administrator.
Your customized rules take precedence and override the BCM50a Integrated
Router default rules.
N0115790
Chapter 11 Firewall screens 163
Rule logic overview
Note: Study these points carefully before configuring rules.
Rule checklist
1 State the intent of the rule. For example, “This restricts all IRC access from the LAN to the Internet.” Or, “This allows a remote Lotus Notes server to synchronize over the Internet to an inside Notes server.”
2 Is the intent of the rule to forward or block traffic?
3 What direction of traffic does the rule apply to?
4 What IP services are affected?
5 What computers on the LAN are affected (if any)?
6 What computers on the Internet are affected? The more specific, the better.
For example, if traffic is allowed from the Internet to the LAN, it is better to allow only certain machines on the Internet to access the LAN.
Security ramifications
Once the logic of the rule has been defined, it is critical to consider the security ramifications created by the rule:
1 Does this rule stop LAN users from accessing critical resources on the
Internet? For example, if IRC is blocked, are there users that require this service?
2 Is it possible to modify the rule to be more specific? For example, if IRC is blocked for all users, a rule that blocks just certain users can be more effective.
3 Does a rule that allows Internet users access to resources on the LAN create a security vulnerability? For example, if FTP ports (TCP 20, 21) are allowed from the Internet to the LAN, Internet users can connect to computers with running FTP servers.
4 Does this rule conflict with any existing rules?
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
164 Chapter 11 Firewall screens
Once these questions have been answered, adding rules is simply a matter of plugging the information into the correct fields in the WebGUI screens.
Key fields for configuring rules
Action
Set the action to either Block or Forward.
Note: Block means the firewall silently discards the packet.
Service
Select the service from the Service scrolling list box. If the service is not listed, it is necessary to first define it. For more information on predefined services, see
“Predefined services” on page 178 .
Source address
What is the source address of the connection; is it on the LAN or WAN? Is it a single IP, a range of IPs, or a subnet?
Destination address
What is the destination address of the connection; is it on the LAN or WAN? Is it a single IP, a range of IPs or a subnet?
Connection direction examples
This section describes examples for firewall rules for connections going from
LAN to WAN and from WAN to LAN.
LAN to LAN/BCM50a Integrated Router rules apply to packets coming in through the LAN interface that are destined for either the BCM50a Integrated
Router LAN interface itself or a different subnet on the LAN. A management
N0115790
Chapter 11 Firewall screens 165 session through the LAN interface is an example of traffic destined for the
BCM50a Integrated Router LAN interface itself. You can also use LAN to LAN/
BCM50a Integrated Router rules with IP alias to control routing between two subnets on the LAN.
WAN to WAN/BCM50a Integrated Router rules apply to packets coming in through the WAN interface that are destined for either the BCM50a Integrated
Router WAN interface itself or a different subnet on the WAN. A management session through the WAN interface is an example of traffic destined for the
BCM50a Integrated Router WAN interface itself. By default, the BCM50a
Integrated Router stops WAN computers from using the BCM50a Integrated
Router as a gateway to communicate with other computers on the WAN. You can configure one of these rules to allow a WAN computer to manage the BCM50a
Integrated Router.
LAN to WAN rules
The default rule for LAN to WAN traffic is that all users on the LAN are allowed unrestricted access to the WAN. When you configure a LAN to WAN rule, you in essence want to limit some or all users from accessing certain services on the
WAN.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
166 Chapter 11 Firewall screens
Figure 49 LAN to WAN traffic
BCM50a Integrated Router
WAN to LAN rules
The default rule for WAN to LAN traffic blocks all incoming connections (WAN to LAN). If you want to allow certain WAN users to have access to your LAN, you need to create custom rules to allow it.
Figure 50 WAN to LAN traffic
BCM50a Integrated Router
Configuring firewall
Click FIREWALL to open the Summary screen. Enable (or activate) the firewall by selecting the Enable Firewall check box as seen in
.
N0115790
Chapter 11 Firewall screens 167
The BCM50a Integrated Router applies the firewall rules in order, starting from the first rule for the direction of travel of a packet. When the traffic matches a rule, the BCM50a Integrated Router takes the action in the rule and stops checking the firewall rules.
For example, you have one general rule that blocks all LAN to WAN IRC
(Internet Relay Chat). And you have another rule that allows IRC traffic from your company president’s LAN IP address to go to the WAN. In order for the president’s IRC traffic to get through, the rule for the president’s IP address must come before the rule that blocks all LAN to WAN IRC traffic. If the rule that blocks all LAN to WAN IRC traffic comes first, all LAN to WAN IRC traffic matches that rule and the BCM50a Integrated Router drops the president’s connection and does not check any other firewall rules.
If you list a general rule before a specific rule, traffic that you want to be controlled by the specific rule can get the general rule applied to it instead. Any traffic that does not match the first firewall rule matches the default rule and the
BCM50a Integrated Router forwards the traffic.
Note: If an alternate gateway on the LAN has an IP address in the same subnet as the BCM50a Integrated Router LAN IP address, return traffic does not go through the BCM50a Integrated Router. This is called an asymmetrical or triangle route, and causes the BCM50a Integrated
Router to reset the connection, as the connection has not been acknowledged.
Note: Allowing asymmetrical routes can let traffic from the WAN go directly to the LAN without passing through the BCM50a Integrated
Router. A better solution is to use IP alias to put the BCM50a Integrated
Router and the backup gateway on separate subnets. See the Appendix B
“Triangle Route” of for more about triangle route topology.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
168 Chapter 11 Firewall screens
Figure 51 Enabling the firewall
N0115790
Table 36 describes the fields in Figure 51
.
Table 36 Firewall rules summary: First screen
Label
Enable Firewall
Description
Select this check box to activate the firewall. The BCM50a Integrated
Router performs access control and protects against Denial of
Service (DoS) attacks when the firewall is activated.
The firewall allows traffic to go through your VPN tunnels.
Chapter 11 Firewall screens 169
Table 36 Firewall rules summary: First screen
Label Description
Bypass Triangle
Route
Firewall Rules
Storage Space in
Use
Select this check box to have the BCM50a Integrated Router permit the use of asymmetrical route topology on the network (not reset the connection).
This read-only bar shows how much of the BCM50a Integrated
Router's memory for recording firewall rules is currently being used.
The bar turns from green to red when the maximum is approached.
You can typically configure up to ten rules per traffic direction.
Packet Direction Use the drop-down list to select a direction of travel of packets for which you want to display firewall rules.
Block/
Forward
Use the option buttons to select whether to Block (silently discard) or
Forward (allow the passage of) packets that are traveling in the selected direction.
Log packets that don’t match these rules.
Select the check box to create a log (when the above action is taken) for packets that are traveling in the selected direction and do not match any of the rules below.
#
Status
The following read-only fields summarize the rules you have created that apply to traffic traveling in the selected packet direction. The firewall rules that you configure (summarized below) take priority over the general firewall action settings above.
This is your firewall rule number. The ordering of your rules is important as rules are applied in turn. The Move field allows you to reorder your rules.
This field displays whether a firewall is turned on (Active) or not
(Inactive). Rules that have not been configured display Empty.
Source Address
Destination
Address
Service Type
Action
This drop-down list displays the source addresses or ranges of addresses to which this firewall rule applies. Note that a blank source or destination address is equivalent to Any.
This drop-down list displays the destination addresses or ranges of addresses to which this firewall rule applies. Note that a blank source or destination address is equivalent to Any.
This drop-down list displays the services to which this firewall rule applies. Note that a blank service type is equivalent to Any. For more
information, see Table 40 on page 179 .
This is the specified action for the selected rule, either Block or
Forward. Note that Block means the firewall silently discards the packet.
Log
Alert
This field shows you if a log is created for packets that match the rule
(Match), don't match the rule (Not Match), both (Both), or no log is created (None).
This field tells you whether this rule generates an alert (Yes) or not
(No) when the rule is matched.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
170 Chapter 11 Firewall screens
Table 36 Firewall rules summary: First screen
Label
Insert
Move
Rule to (Rule
Number)
Edit
Delete
Apply
Reset
Description
Type the index number for where you want to put a rule. For example, if you type “6”, your new rule becomes number 6 and the previous rule 6 (if there is one) becomes rule 7.
Click Insert to display the screen where you configure a firewall rule.
Select the Index option button of a rule and type a number for where you want to put that rule. Click Move to move the rule to the number that you typed. The ordering of your rules is important as they are applied in order of their numbering.
Click a rule's option button and type the number for where you want to put that rule.
Click Edit to create or edit a rule.
Click Delete to delete an existing firewall rule. Note that subsequent firewall rules move up by one when you take this action.
Click Apply to save your changes to the BCM50a Integrated Router.
Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Configuring firewall rules
Follow these directions to create a new rule.
In the Summary screen, type the index number for where you want to put the rule. For example, if you type 1, your new rule becomes number 1 and the previous rule 1 (if there is one) becomes rule 2.
Click Insert to display the screen shown in Figure 52 .
N0115790
Figure 52 Creating and editing a firewall rule
Chapter 11 Firewall screens 171
Table 37 describes the fields in Figure 52
.
Table 37 Creating and editing a firewall rule
Label
Active
Packet Direction
Description
Check the Active check box to have the BCM50a Integrated
Router use this rule. Leave it unchecked if you do not want the
BCM50a Integrated Router to use the rule after you apply it.
Use the drop-down list to select the direction of packet travel to which you want to apply this firewall rule.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
172 Chapter 11 Firewall screens
Table 37 Creating and editing a firewall rule
Label Description
Source Address Click SrcAdd to add a new address, SrcEdit to edit an existing one or SrcDelete to delete one.
The source address can be a particular (single) IP, a range of IP addresses (for example, 192.168.1.10 to 192.169.1.50), a subnet or any IP address. See the next section for more information about adding and editing source addresses.
Destination Address Click DestAdd to add a new address, DestEdit to edit an existing one or DestDelete to delete one.
The destination address can be a particular (single) IP, a range of
IP addresses (for example, 192.168.1.10 to 192.169.1.50), a subnet or any IP address. See section
“Configuring source and destination addresses” on page 173 for information about adding
and editing destination addresses.
Services
Available/ Selected
Services
the left, then click >> to add it to the Selected Services box on the right. To remove a service, highlight it in the Selected Services box on the right, then click <<.
Custom Port
Add
Edit
Delete
Action for Matched
Packets
Log
Click this button to bring up the screen that you use to configure a new custom service that is not in the predefined list of services.
Select a custom service (denoted by an “*”) from the Available
Services list and click this button to edit the service.
Select a custom service (denoted by an “*”) from the Available
Services list and click this button to remove the service.
Use the drop-down list to select whether to discard (Block) or allow the passage of (Forward) packets that match this rule.
This field determines if a log is created for packets that match the rule (Match), don't match the rule (Not Match), both (Both) or no log is created (None). Go to the Log Settings page and select the
Access Control logs category to have the BCM50a Integrated
Router record these logs.
Alert
Apply
Cancel
Check the Alert check box to determine that this rule generates an alert when the rule is matched.
Click Apply to save your changes to the BCM50a Integrated
Router and exit this screen.
Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving,
N0115790
Chapter 11 Firewall screens 173
Configuring source and destination addresses
To add a new source or destination address, click SrcAdd or DestAdd from the previous screen. To edit an existing source or destination address, select it from the box and click SrcEdit or DestEdit from the previous screen. Either action displays the screen shown in
.
Figure 53 Adding or editing source and destination addresses
Table 38 describes the fields in Figure 53
.
Table 38 Adding or editing source and destination addresses
Label Description
Address Type Select an option from the drop-down list that includes: Single
Address, Range Address, Subnet Address and Any Address.
Start IP Address Enter the single IP address or the starting IP address in a range here.
Use a numerical IP address in dotted decimal notation (for example,
192.168.1.10).
End IP Address Enter the ending IP address in a range here. Use a numerical IP address in dotted decimal notation (for example, 192.168.1.10).
Subnet Mask
Apply
Enter the subnet mask here, if applicable.
Click Apply to save your changes to the BCM50a Integrated Router and exit this screen.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
174 Chapter 11 Firewall screens
Configuring custom ports
You can also configure customized ports for services not predefined by the
BCM50a Integrated Router (see
“Predefined services” on page 178 for a list of
predefined services). For a comprehensive list of port numbers and services, visit the IANA (Internet Assigned Number Authority) Web site.
Click the Add button under Custom Port while editing a firewall to configure a custom port. This displays the screen illustrated in
.
Figure 54 Creating or editing a custom port
N0115790
Table 39 describes the fields in Figure 54
.
Table 39 Creating/Editing A Custom Port
Label
Service Name
Service Type
Description
Enter a unique name to identify the service (a service that is not predefined in the BCM50a Integrated Router).
Choose the IP port (TCP, UDP or Both) that defines your customized port from the drop-down list.
Port Configuration
Type
Port Number
Apply
Cancel
Click Single to specify one port only or Range to specify a span of ports that define your customized service.
Enter a single port number or the range of port numbers that define your customized service.
Click Apply to save your changes to the BCM50a Integrated Router and exit this screen.
Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
Chapter 11 Firewall screens 175
Example firewall rule
The following Internet firewall rule example allows a hypothetical My Service connection from the Internet.
1 Click the Firewall link and then the Summary tab.
2 In the Summary screen, type the index number for where you want to put the rule. For example, if you type “6”, your new rule becomes number 6 and the previous rule 6 (if there is one) becomes rule 7.
3 Click Insert to display the firewall rule configuration screen.
Figure 55 Firewall edit rule screen example
4 Select WAN to LAN as the Packet Direction.
5 Select Any in the Destination Address box and then click DestEdit.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
176 Chapter 11 Firewall screens
6 Configure the Firewall Rule Edit IP screen as follows and click Apply.
Figure 56 Firewall rule edit IP example
7 In the firewall rule configuration screen, click Add under Custom Port to open the Edit Custom Port screen. Configure it as shown in
and click Apply.
Figure 57 Edit custom port example
N0115790
8 The firewall rule configuration screen displays. Use the arrows between
Available Services and Selected Services to configure it as shown in
Figure 58 . Click Apply after you are done.
Note: Custom ports show up with an * before their names in the
Services list box and the Rule Summary list box. Click Apply after you have created your custom port.
Chapter 11 Firewall screens 177
Figure 58 MyService rule configuration example
After completing the configuration procedure for this Internet firewall rule, the
Rule Summary screen will look like the on illustrated in
Allows a My Service connection from the WAN to IP addresses 10.0.0.10 through
10.0.0.15 on the LAN. Remember to click Apply after you finish configuring your rules to save your settings to the BCM50a Integrated Router.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
178 Chapter 11 Firewall screens
Figure 59 My Service example rule summary
Predefined services
The Available Services list box in the Edit Rule screen (see
) displays all predefined services that the BCM50a Integrated Router already supports. Next to the name of the service, two fields appear in brackets. The first field indicates the IP protocol type (TCP, UDP, or ICMP). The second field indicates the IP port number that defines the service. (Note that there can be more than one IP protocol
N0115790
Chapter 11 Firewall screens 179 type. For example, look at the default configuration labeled “(DNS)”.
(UDP/
TCP:53) means UDP port 53 and TCP port 53. Custom services can also be
Table 40 Predefined services
Service Description
AIM/New-ICQ(TCP:5190)
AUTH(TCP:113)
BGP(TCP:179)
AOL Internet Messenger service, used as a listening port by ICQ.
Authentication protocol used by some servers.
Border Gateway Protocol.
BOOTP_CLIENT(UDP:68) DHCP Client.
BOOTP_SERVER(UDP:67) DHCP Server.
CU-SEEME(TCP/UDP:7648,
24032)
A popular videoconferencing solution from White Pines
Software.
DNS(UDP/TCP:53)
FINGER(TCP:79)
Domain Name Server, a service that matches Web names
(for example, www.nortel.com) to IP numbers.
Finger is a UNIX or Internet-related command that can be used to find out if a user is logged on.
FTP(TCP:20.21)
H.323(TCP:1720)
HTTP(TCP:80)
HTTPS(TCP:443)
File Transfer Program is a program to enable fast transfer of files, including large files that cannot be sent by e-mail.
NetMeeting uses this protocol.
Hyper Text Transfer Protocol is a client/server protocol for the World Wide Web.
HTTPS is a secured http session often used in e-commerce.
This is a popular Internet chat program.
ICQ(UDP:4000)
IKE(UDP:500)
IPSEC_TUNNEL(AH:0)
The Internet Key Exchange algorithm is used for key distribution and management.
The IPSEC AH (Authentication Header) tunneling protocol uses this service.
IPSEC_TUNNEL(ESP:0) The IPSEC ESP (Encapsulation Security Protocol) tunneling protocol uses this service.
This is another popular Internet chat program.
IRC(TCP/UDP:6667)
MSN Messenger(TCP:1863) Microsoft Networks’ messenger service uses this protocol.
MULTICAST(IGMP:0) Internet Group Multicast Protocol is used when sending packets to a specific group of hosts.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
180 Chapter 11 Firewall screens
Table 40 Predefined services
Service
NEW-ICQ(TCP:5190)
NEWS(TCP:144)
NFS(UDP:2049)
NNTP(TCP:119)
PING(ICMP:0)
POP3(TCP:110)
PPTP(TCP:1723)
PPTP_TUNNEL(GRE:0)
RCMD(TCP:512)
REAL_AUDIO(TCP:7070)
REXEC(TCP:514)
RLOGIN(TCP:513)
RTELNET(TCP:107)
RTSP(TCP/UDP:554)
SFTP(TCP:115)
SMTP(TCP:25)
SNMP(TCP/UDP:161)
SNMP-TRAPS(TCP/
UDP:162)
SQL-NET(TCP:1521)
Description
An Internet chat program.
A protocol for news groups.
Network File System (NFS) is a client/server distributed file service that provides transparent file sharing for network environments.
Network News Transport Protocol is the delivery mechanism for the USENET newsgroup service.
Packet INternet Groper is a protocol that sends out ICMP echo requests to test whether or not a remote host is reachable.
Post Office Protocol version 3 lets a client computer receive e-mail from a POP3 server through a temporary connection (TCP/IP or other).
Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol enables secure transfer of data over public networks. This is the control channel.
Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol enables secure transfer of data over public networks. This is the data channel.
Remote Command Service.
A streaming audio service that enables real time sound over the web.
Remote Execution Daemon.
Remote Logon.
Remote Telnet.
The Real Time Streaming (media control) Protocol
(RTSP) is a remote control for multimedia on the Internet.
Simple File Transfer Protocol.
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is the message exchange standard for the Internet. SMTP enables you to move messages from one e-mail server to another.
Simple Network Management Program.
Traps for use with the SNMP (RFC:1215).
Structured Query Language is an interface to access data on many different types of database systems, including mainframes, midrange systems, UNIX systems and network servers.
N0115790
Chapter 11 Firewall screens 181
Table 40 Predefined services
Service Description
SIP-V2(UDP:5060) The Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) is an application layer control (signaling) protocol that handles the setting up, altering and tearing down of voice and multimedia sessions over the Internet. SIP is used in VoIP (Voice over
IP), the sending of voice signals over the Internet
Protocol.
SSH(TCP/UDP:22) Secure Shell Remote Logon Program.
STRM WORKS(UDP:1558) Stream Works Protocol.
SYSLOG(UDP:514)
TACACS(UDP:49)
TELNET(TCP:23)
TFTP(UDP:69)
VDOLIVE(TCP:7000)
Using syslog, you can send system logs to a UNIX server.
Login Host Protocol used for (Terminal Access Controller
Access Control System).
Telnet is the logon and terminal emulation protocol common on the Internet and in UNIX environments. It operates over TCP/IP networks. Its primary function is to allow users to log into remote host systems.
Trivial File Transfer Protocol is an Internet file transfer protocol similar to FTP, but uses the UDP (User
Datagram Protocol) rather than TCP (Transmission
Control Protocol).
Another videoconferencing solution.
Alerts
Alerts are reports on events, such as attacks, that you want to know about right away. You can choose to generate an alert when an attack is detected in the
Attack Alert screen (
, check the Generate alert when attack detected
check box) or when a rule is matched in the Rule Edit screen ( see Figure 52 )
.
Configure the Log Settings screen to have the BCM50a Integrated Router send an immediate e-mail message to you when an event generates an alert.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
182 Chapter 11 Firewall screens
Configuring attack alert
Attack alerts are the first defense against DOS attacks. In the Attack Alert screen
) you can choose to generate an alert whenever an attack is detected.
For DoS attacks, the BCM50a Integrated Router uses thresholds to determine when to drop sessions that do not become fully established. These thresholds apply globally to all sessions.
You can use the default threshold values, or you can change them to values more suitable to your security requirements.
Threshold values
Tune these parameters when something is not working and after you have checked the firewall counters. These default values work fine for normal, small offices with ADSL bandwidth. Factors influencing choices for threshold values are:
• The maximum number of opened sessions
• The minimum capacity of server backlog in your LAN network
• The CPU power of servers in your LAN network
• Network bandwidth
• Type of traffic for certain servers
If your network is slower than average for any of these factors (especially if you have servers that are slow or handle many tasks and are often busy), then the default values must be reduced.
You must make any changes to the threshold values before you continue configuring firewall rules.
Half-open sessions
An unusually high number of half-open sessions (either an absolute number or measured as the arrival rate) indicates that a Denial of Service attack is occurring.
For TCP, half-open means that the session has not reached the established state, and the TCP three-way handshake has not yet been completed (see
UDP, half-open means that the firewall has detected no return traffic.
N0115790
Chapter 11 Firewall screens 183
The BCM50a Integrated Router measures both the total number of existing half-open sessions and the rate of session establishment attempts. Both TCP and
UDP half-open sessions are counted in the total number and rate measurements.
Measurements are made once a minute.
After the number of existing half-open sessions rises above a threshold
(max-incomplete high), the BCM50a Integrated Router starts deleting half-open sessions as required to accommodate new connection requests. The BCM50a
Integrated Router continues to delete half-open requests as necessary, until the number of existing half-open sessions drops below another threshold
(max-incomplete low).
After the rate of new connection attempts rises above a threshold (one-minute
high), the BCM50a Integrated Router starts deleting half-open sessions to accommodate new connection requests as required. The BCM50a Integrated
Router continues to delete half-open sessions, as necessary, until the rate of new connection attempts drops below another threshold (one-minute low). The rate is the number of new attempts detected in the last one minute sample period.
TCP maximum incomplete and blocking period
An unusually high number of half-open sessions with the same destination host address indicates that a Denial of Service attack is being launched against the host.
Whenever the number of half-open sessions with the same destination host address rises above a threshold (TCP Maximum Incomplete), the BCM50a
Integrated Router starts deleting half-open sessions according to one of the following methods:
• If the Blocking Period timeout is 0 (the default), the BCM50a Integrated
Router deletes the oldest existing half-open session for the host for every new connection request to the host. This ensures that the number of half-open sessions to a given host never exceeds the threshold.
• If the Blocking Period timeout is greater than 0, the BCM50a Integrated
Router blocks all new connection requests to the host giving the server time to handle the present connections. The BCM50a Integrated Router continues to block all new connection requests until the Blocking Period expires.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
184 Chapter 11 Firewall screens
The BCM50a Integrated Router also sends alerts whenever TCP Maximum
Incomplete is exceeded. The global values specified for the threshold and timeout apply to all TCP connections. Click the Attack Alert tab to bring up the screen
Figure 60 Attack alert
N0115790
Table 41 describes the fields in Figure 60
.
Table 41 Attack alert
Label Description
Generate alert when attack detected
A detected attack automatically generates a log entry. Check this box to generate an alert (as well as a log) whenever an attack is detected.
Denial of Service Thresholds
One Minute Low This is the rate of new half-open sessions that causes the firewall to stop deleting half-open sessions. The BCM50a Integrated
Router continues to delete half-open sessions, as necessary, until the rate of new connection attempts drops below this number.
Chapter 11 Firewall screens 185
Table 41 Attack alert
Label
One Minute High
Maximum
Incomplete Low
Maximum
Incomplete High
TCP Maximum
Incomplete
Blocking Period
(min)
Description
This is the rate of new half-open sessions that causes the firewall to start deleting half-open sessions. When the rate of new connection attempts rises above this number, the BCM50a
Integrated Router deletes half-open sessions, as required, to accommodate new connection attempts.
The numbers, for example, 80 in the One Minute Low field and
100 in this field, cause the BCM50a Integrated Router to start deleting half-open sessions when more than 100 session establishment attempts are detected in the last minute, and to stop deleting half-open sessions when fewer than 80 session establishment attempts are detected in the last minute.
This is the number of existing half-open sessions that causes the firewall to stop deleting half-open sessions. The BCM50a
Integrated Router continues to delete half-open requests, as necessary, until the number of existing half-open sessions drops below this number.
This is the number of existing half-open sessions that causes the firewall to start deleting half-open sessions. When the number of existing half-open sessions rises above this number, the BCM50a
Integrated Router deletes half-open sessions, as required, to accommodate new connection requests. Do not set Maximum
Incomplete High to lower than the current Maximum Incomplete
Low number.
The above values, say 80 in the Maximum Incomplete Low field and 100 in this field, cause the BCM50a Integrated Router to start deleting half-open sessions when the number of existing half-open sessions rises above 100, and to stop deleting half-open sessions with the number of existing half-open sessions drops below 80.
This is the number of existing half-open TCP sessions with the same destination host IP address that causes the firewall to start dropping half-open sessions to that same destination host IP address. Enter a number between 1 and 256. As a general rule, choose a smaller number for a smaller network, a slower system or limited bandwidth.
When TCP Maximum Incomplete is reached you can choose to either allow or block the next session. If you select the Blocking
Period check box, any new sessions are blocked for the length of time you specify in the next field (min) and all old incomplete sessions are cleared during this period. If you want strong security, it is better to block the traffic for a short time, as it gives the server some time to digest the loading.
Enter the length of Blocking Period in minutes.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
186 Chapter 11 Firewall screens
Table 41 Attack alert
Label
Apply
Reset
Description
Click Apply to save your changes to the BCM50a Integrated
Router.
Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.
N0115790
Chapter 12
Content filtering
This chapter provides a brief overview of content filtering using the embedded
WebGUI.
187
Introduction to content filtering
With Internet content filtering, you can create and enforce Internet access policies tailored to their needs. Content filtering is the ability to block certain web features or specific URL keywords and is not to be confused with packet filtering through
SMT menu 21.1. To access these functions, from the Main Menu, click Content
Filter to expand the Content Filter menus.
Restrict web features
The BCM50a Integrated Router can block web features such as ActiveX controls,
Java applets, and cookies and disable web proxies.
Days and Times
With the BCM50a Integrated Router, you can also define time periods and days during which the BCM50a Integrated Router performs content filtering.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
188 Chapter 12 Content filtering
Configure Content Filtering
Click Content Filter on the navigation panel, to open the screen show in
Figure 61 Content filter
N0115790
Chapter 12 Content filtering 189
describes the fields in Figure 61
.
Table 42 Content filter
Label
Restrict Web
Features
ActiveX
Java
Cookies
Web Proxy
Enable URL
Keyword
Blocking
Keyword
Keyword List
Add
Delete
Clear All
Day to Block
Description
Select the boxes to restrict a feature. When you download a page containing a restricted feature, that part of the web page appears blank or grayed out.
A tool for building dynamic and active Web pages and distributed object applications. When you visit an ActiveX Web site, ActiveX controls are downloaded to your browser, where they remain in case you visit the site again.
A programming language and development environment for building downloadable Web components or Internet and intranet business applications of all kinds.
Used by Web servers to track usage and provide service based on ID.
A server that acts as an intermediary between a user and the Internet to provide security, administrative control, and caching service. When a proxy server is located on the WAN, it is possible for LAN users to circumvent content filtering by pointing to this proxy server.
The BCM50a Integrated Router can block Web sites with URLs that contain certain keywords in the domain name or IP address. For example, if the keyword bad was enabled, all sites containing this keyword in the domain name or IP address will be blocked, for example, URL http://www.website.com/bad.html is blocked. Select this check box to enable this feature.
Type a keyword in this field. You can use any character (up to 64 characters). Wildcards are not allowed. You can also enter a numerical
IP address.
This list displays the keywords already added.
Click Add after you have typed a keyword.
Repeat this procedure to add other keywords. Up to 64 keywords are allowed.
When you try to access a web page containing a keyword, you will receive a message telling you that the content filter is blocking this request.
Highlight a keyword in the lower box and click Delete to remove it. The keyword disappears from the text box after you click Apply.
Click this button to remove all of the listed keywords.
Select check boxes for the days that you want the BCM50a Integrated
Router to perform content filtering. Select the Everyday check box to have content filtering turned on all days of the week.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
190 Chapter 12 Content filtering
Table 42 Content filter
Label
Time of Day to
Block
Apply
Reset
Description
Time of Day to Block allows the administrator to define during which time periods content filtering is enabled. Time of Day to Block restrictions only apply to the keywords (see above). Restrict web server data, such as ActiveX, Java, Cookies and Web Proxy are not affected.
Enter the time period, in 24-hour format, during which content filtering will be enforced. Select the All Day check box to have content filtering always active on the days selected in Day to Block with time of day limitations not enforced.
Click Apply to save your changes.
Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh
N0115790
191
Chapter 13
VPN
This chapter introduces the basics of IPSec VPNs and covers the VPN WebGUI.
See
Chapter 19, “Logs Screens,” on page 359 for information about viewing logs
and the appendices for IPSec log descriptions.
VPN
A VPN (Virtual Private Network) provides secure communications between sites without the expense of leased site-to-site lines. A secure VPN is a combination of tunneling, encryption, authentication, access control, and auditing technologies or services used to transport traffic over the Internet or any insecure network that uses the TCP/IP protocol suite for communication.
Use the screens documented in this chapter to configure rules for VPN connections and manage VPN connections.
IPSec
Internet Protocol Security (IPSec) is a standards based VPN that offers flexible solutions for secure data communications across a public network like the
Internet. IPSec is built around a number of standardized cryptographic techniques to provide confidentiality, data integrity and authentication at the IP layer.
BCM50a Integrated Router VPN functions
You can use the BCM50a Integrated Router as either:
• A Contivity Client (for an encrypted connection to a single VPN router).
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
192 Chapter 13 VPN or
• As a VPN router that can have encrypted connections to multiple remote VPN routers.
See
for details about the VPN specifications of the BCM50a
Integrated Router.
VPN screens overview
Table 43 summarizes the main functions of the VPN screens.
Security Association
A Security Association (SA) is a contract between two parties indicating which security parameters, such as keys and algorithms, they use.
Table 43 VPN Screens Overview
Screens
Summary
SA Monitor
Global Setting
Contivity Client
Rule Setup
Branch Office
Rule Setup
Description
This screen lists all of your VPN rules.
Use these screens to configure simple VPN rules that have the BCM50a Integrated Router operate as a
VPN client.
Use these screens to manually configure VPN rules that have the BCM50a Integrated Router operate as a
VPN router.
Use this screen to display and manage active VPN connections.
Use this screen to configure the IPSec timer settings.
N0115790
Chapter 13 VPN 193
Other terminology
Encryption
Encryption is a mathematical operation that transforms data from plaintext
(readable) to ciphertext (scrambled text) using a key. The key and clear text are processed by the encryption operation, which leads to the data scrambling that makes encryption secure. Decryption is the opposite of encryption; it is a mathematical operation that transforms “ciphertext” to plaintext. Decryption also requires a key.
Figure 62 Encryption and decryption
Data confidentiality
The IPSec sender can encrypt packets before transmitting them across a network.
Data integrity
The IPSec receiver can validate packets sent by the IPSec sender to ensure that the data is not altered during transmission.
Data origin authentication
The IPSec receiver can verify the source of IPSec packets. This service depends on the data integrity service.
VPN applications
The BCM50a Integrated Router supports the following VPN applications:
• Linking Two or More Private Networks Together
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
194 Chapter 13 VPN
Connect branch offices and business partners over the Internet with significant cost savings and improved performance when compared to leased lines between sites.
• Accessing Network Resources When NAT Is Enabled
When NAT is enabled between the WAN and the LAN, remote users are not able to access hosts on the LAN unless the host is designated a public LAN server for that specific protocol. Since the VPN tunnel terminates inside the
LAN, remote users can access all computers that use private IP addresses on the LAN.
• Unsupported IP Applications
A VPN tunnel can be created to add support for unsupported emerging IP applications.
IPSec architecture
The overall IPSec architecture is shown as follows in
.
N0115790
Figure 63 IPSec architecture
Chapter 13 VPN 195
IPSec algorithms
The ESP (Encapsulating Security Payload) Protocol (RFC 2406) and AH
(Authentication Header) protocol (RFC 2402) describe the packet formats and the default standards for packet structure (including implementation algorithms).
The Encryption Algorithm describes the use of encryption techniques such as
DES (Data Encryption Standard), AES (Advanced Encryption Standard), and
Triple DES algorithms.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
196 Chapter 13 VPN
The Authentication Algorithms, HMAC-MD5 (RFC 2403) and HMAC-SHA-1
(RFC 2404), provide an authentication mechanism for the AH and ESP protocols.
The ESP and AH protocols are necessary to create a Security Association (SA), the foundation of an IPSec VPN. An SA is built from the authentication provided by the AH and ESP protocols. The primary function of key management is to establish and maintain the SA between systems. After the SA is established, the transport of data can commence.
AH (Authentication Header) protocol
AH protocol (RFC 2402) was designed for integrity, authentication, sequence integrity (replay resistance), and nonrepudiation but not for confidentiality, for which the ESP was designed.
In applications where confidentiality is not required or not sanctioned by government encryption restrictions, an AH can be employed to ensure integrity.
This type of implementation does not protect the information from dissemination but can be used for verification of the integrity of the information and authentication of the originator.
ESP (Encapsulating Security Payload) protocol
The ESP protocol (RFC 2406) provides encryption, as well as the services offered by AH. ESP authenticating properties are limited compared to the AH due to the exclusion of the IP header information during the authentication process.
However, ESP is sufficient if only the upper layer protocols need to be authenticated.
N0115790
Chapter 13 VPN 197
An added feature of the ESP is payload padding, which further protects communications by concealing the size of the packet being transmitted.
Table 44 AH and ESP
ESP AH
Encryption DES (default)
Data Encryption Standard (DES) is a widely used method of data encryption using a secret key. DES applies a 56-bit key to each 64-bit block of data.
3DES
Triple DES (3DES) is a variant of DES, which iterates 3 times with 3 separate keys (3 x 56 = 168 bits), effectively doubling the strength of DES.
AES
Advanced Encryption Standard is a newer method of data encryption that also uses a secret key. This implementation of AES applies a 128-bit key to 128-bit blocks of data during phase 1. You can configure the device to use a 128-bit, 192-bit or 256-bit key for phase 2. AES is faster than 3DES.
Select NULL to set up a phase 2 tunnel without encryption.
Authentication MD5 (default)
MD5 (Message Digest 5) produces a
128-bit digest to authenticate packet data.
MD5 (default)
MD5 (Message Digest 5) produces a 128-bit digest to authenticate packet data.
SHA1
SHA1 (Secure Hash Algorithm) produces a 160-bit digest to authenticate packet data.
SHA1
SHA1 (Secure Hash
Algorithm) produces a 160-bit digest to authenticate packet data.
Select MD5 for minimal security and SHA-1 for maximum security.
Key management
Your BCM50a Integrated Router uses IKE (ISAKMP) key management in order to set up a VPN.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
198 Chapter 13 VPN
Encapsulation
The two modes of operation for IPSec VPNs are Transport mode and Tunnel mode.
Figure 64 Transport and Tunnel mode IPSec encapsulation
Transport mode
Transport mode is used to protect upper layer protocols and only affects the data in the IP packet. In Transport mode, the IP packet contains the security protocol
(AH or ESP) located after the original IP header and options, but before any upper layer protocols contained in the packet (such as TCP and UDP).
With ESP, protection is applied only to the upper layer protocols contained in the packet. The IP header information and options are not used in the authentication process. Therefore, the originating IP address cannot be verified for integrity against the data.
With the use of AH as the security protocol, protection is extended forward into the IP header to verify the integrity of the entire packet by use of portions of the original IP header in the hashing process.
N0115790
Chapter 13 VPN 199
Tunnel mode
Tunnel mode encapsulates the entire IP packet to transmit it securely. A Tunnel mode is required for gateway services to provide access to internal systems.
Tunnel mode is fundamentally an IP tunnel with authentication and encryption.
This is the most common mode of operation. Tunnel mode is required for
BCM50a Integrated Router to BCM50a Integrated Router and host to BCM50a
Integrated Router communications. Tunnel mode communications have two sets of IP headers:
Outside header: The outside IP header contains the destination IP address of the
BCM50a Integrated Router.
Inside header: The inside IP header contains the destination IP address of the final system behind the BCM50a Integrated Router. The security protocol appears after the outer IP header and before the inside IP header.
IPSec and NAT
Read this section if you are running IPSec on a host computer behind the BCM50a
Integrated Router.
NAT is incompatible with the AH protocol in both Transport and Tunnel mode.
An IPSec VPN using the AH protocol digitally signs the outbound packet, both data payload and headers, with a hash value appended to the packet. When using
AH protocol, packet contents (the data payload) are not encrypted.
A NAT device in between the IPSec endpoints rewrites either the source or destination address with one of its own choosing. The VPN device at the receiving end verifies the integrity of the incoming packet by computing its own hash value, and complains that the hash value appended to the received packet does not match. The VPN device at the receiving end does not know about the NAT in the middle, so it assumes that the data was maliciously altered.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
200 Chapter 13 VPN
IPSec using ESP in Tunnel mode encapsulates the entire original packet
(including headers) in a new IP packet. The new IP packet's source address is the outbound address of the sending BCM50a Integrated Router, and its destination address is the inbound address of the VPN device at the receiving end. When using ESP protocol with authentication, the packet contents (in this case, the entire original packet) are encrypted. The encrypted contents, but not the new headers, are signed with a hash value appended to the packet.
Tunnel mode ESP with authentication is compatible with NAT because integrity checks are performed over the combination of the original header plus original payload, which is unchanged by a NAT device. Transport mode ESP with authentication is not compatible with NAT, although NAT traversal provides a way to use Transport mode ESP when there is a NAT router between the IPSec endpoints (see
for details).
Table 45 VPN and NAT
Security Protocol Mode
AH
AH
ESP
ESP
Transport
Tunnel
NAT
N
N
Transport N
Tunnel Y
Secure Gateway Address
Secure Gateway Address is the WAN IP address or domain name of the remote secure gateway. You can specify this for a VPN rule in the VPN Branch Office
Rule Setup screen (see Figure 70 on page 214 ).
If the remote secure gateway has a static WAN IP address, enter it in the Secure
Gateway Address field. You can alternatively enter the domain name of the remote secure gateway (if it has one) in the Secure Gateway Address field.
N0115790
Chapter 13 VPN 201
You can also enter the domain name of the remote secure gateway in the Secure
Gateway Address field if the remote secure gateway has a dynamic WAN IP address and is using DDNS. The BCM50a Integrated Router has to rebuild the
VPN tunnel each time the WAN IP address of the remote secure gateway changes
(there can be a delay until the DDNS servers are updated with the new WAN IP address of the remote secure gateway).
Dynamic Secure Gateway Address
If the remote secure gateway has a dynamic WAN IP address and does not use
DDNS, enter 0.0.0.0 as the address of the remote secure gateway. In this case, only the remote secure gateway can initiate SAs. This is useful for telecommuters initiating a VPN tunnel to the company network.
Summary screen
Figure 65 helps explain the main fields in the WebGUI.
Figure 65 IPSec summary fields
BCM50a Integrated Router
Click VPN to open the Summary screen. This is a read-only menu of your IPSec rules (tunnels). Edit or create an IPSec rule by selecting an index number and then clicking Edit to configure the associated submenus.
The firewall allows traffic to go through your VPN tunnels.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
202 Chapter 13 VPN
Figure 66 Summary
IP Policies
N0115790
Chapter 13 VPN 203
describes the fields in Figure 66
.
Table 46 Summary
Label Description
Contivity VPN
Client
#
Name
The Contivity VPN Client is a simple VPN rule that lets you define and store connection information for accessing your corporate network using the BCM50a Integrated Router. The Contivity VPN Client uses the
IPSec protocol to establish a secure end-to-end connection. If you want to set the Contivity Client rule to active, you must set all other VPN rules to inactive.
When this button displays Connect, click it to create a VPN connection to the remote Contivity switch.
When this button displays Disconnect, click it to drop the Contivity VPN connection.
This is the VPN rule index number.
This field displays the name you specified in the VPN Branch Office
Rule Setup screen to identify this VPN policy.
Active This field displays whether the VPN rule is active or not. A Yes signifies that this VPN rule is active. No signifies that this VPN rule is not active.
Private /Local /
Remote Policy
IP Address
These are the IP addresses of the computers that can use the VPN tunnel. Ranges of IP addresses are indicated by the starting and ending
IP addresses separated by a dash. You configure these IP addresses in the VPN Branch Office IP Policy screen. This field is empty if you do not configure the VPN branch office rule to use an IP policy.
Private IP addresses are IP addresses of computers on your BCM50a
Integrated Router's local network, for which you have configured the IP policy to use NAT for the VPN tunnel.
Local IP addresses are the IP addresses of the computers on your
BCM50a Integrated Router's local network that can use the VPN tunnel.
Remote IP addresses are the IP addresses of the computers behind the remote IPSec router that can use the VPN tunnel. When 0.0.0.0 displays, only the remote IPSec router can initiate the VPN. The address 0.0.0.0 displays when the Secure Gateway Address field is configured to 0.0.0.0 or the IP policy's Remote Starting IP Address field is set to 0.0.0.0 in the IP Policy screen.
Encap
IPSec
Algorithm
Secure
Gateway
Address
This field displays Tunnel or Transport mode.
This field displays the security protocols used for an SA.
Both AH and ESP increase BCM50a Integrated Router processing requirements and communications latency (delay).
This is the static WAN IP address or URL of the remote IPSec router.
This field displays 0.0.0.0 when you configure the Secure Gateway
Address field in the VPN Branch Office screen to 0.0.0.0.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
204 Chapter 13 VPN
Table 46 Summary
Label
Edit
Delete
Description
Click the radio button next to a VPN index number and then click Edit to edit a specific VPN policy.
Click the radio button next to a VPN policy number you want to delete and then click Delete. When a VPN policy is deleted, subsequent policies do not move up in the page list.
Keep Alive
When you initiate an IPSec tunnel with keep alive enabled, the BCM50a
Integrated Router automatically renegotiates the tunnel when the IPSec SA lifetime period expires (see
alive option is available with the Contivity Client rule. See the VPN Contivity
Client Rule Setup screen ( Figure 68 on page 207 ). In effect, the IPSec tunnel
becomes an always on connection after you initiate it. Both IPSec routers must have a BCM50a Integrated Router compatible keep alive feature enabled in order for this feature to work.
If the BCM50a Integrated Router has its maximum number of simultaneous IPSec tunnels connected to it and they all have keep alive enabled, then no other tunnels can take a turn connecting to the BCM50a Integrated Router because the BCM50a
Integrated Router does not drop the tunnels that are already connected (unless there is outbound traffic with no inbound traffic).
Note: No matter whether or not keep alive is set, when there is outbound traffic with no inbound traffic, the BCM50a Integrated Router automatically drops the tunnel after two minutes.
Nailed up
The nailed up feature is similar to the keep alive feature. When you initiate an
IPSec tunnel with nailed up enabled, the BCM50a Integrated Router automatically renegotiates the tunnel when the IPSec SA lifetime period expires
(see
“Configuring advanced Branch office setup” on page 233 for more
N0115790
Chapter 13 VPN 205 information about the IPSec SA lifetime). The nailed up option is available with the branch office rules. See the VPN Branch Office Rule Setup screen
( Figure 70 on page 214 ). Unlike keep alive, any time the BCM50a Integrated
Router restarts, it also automatically renegotiates any nailed up tunnels. In effect, the IPSec tunnel becomes an “always on” connection after you initiate it. Also different from keep alive, the peer IPSec router does not have to have a BCM50a
Integrated Router compatible nailed up feature enabled in order for this feature to work.
If the BCM50a Integrated Router has its maximum number of simultaneous IPSec tunnels connected to it and they all have nailed up enabled, no other tunnels can take a turn connecting to the BCM50a Integrated Router because the BCM50a
Integrated Router does not drop the tunnels that are already connected (unless there is outbound traffic with no inbound traffic).
Note: No matter whether or not nailed up is set, when there is outbound traffic with no inbound traffic, the BCM50a Integrated Router automatically drops the tunnel after two minutes.
NAT Traversal
NAT traversal allows you to set up a VPN connection when there are NAT routers between the BCM50a Integrated Router and the remote IPSec router.
Figure 67 NAT router between IPSec routers
Normally, you cannot set up a VPN connection with a NAT router between the two IPSec routers because the NAT router changes the header of the IPSec packet.
In the previous figure, IPSec router A sends an IPSec packet in an attempt to initiate a VPN. The NAT router changes the header of the IPSec packet so it does not match the header for which IPSec router B is checking. Therefore, IPSec router B does not respond and the VPN connection cannot be built.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
206 Chapter 13 VPN
NAT traversal solves the problem by adding a UDP port 500 header to the IPSec packet. The NAT router forwards the IPSec packet with the UDP port 500 header unchanged. IPSec router B checks the UDP port 500 header and responds. IPSec routers A and B build a VPN connection.
NAT Traversal configuration
Enable or disable NAT traversal in the VPN Branch Office Rule Setup screen
(see
Figure 70 on page 214 ). For NAT traversal to work, you must:
• Use ESP security protocol (in either transport or tunnel mode)
• Use IKE keying mode
• Enable NAT traversal on both IPSec endpoints
In order for IPSec router A (see
) to receive an initiating
IPSec packet from IPSec router B, set the NAT router to forward UDP port 500 to
IPSec router A.
Preshared key
A preshared key identifies a communicating party during a phase 1 IKE negotiation (see
“IKE phases” on page 230 for more information). It is called
preshared because you have to share it with another party before you can communicate with them over a secure connection. For Contivity Client VPN connections, the BCM50a Integrated Router generates the preshared key from the username and password.
Configuring Contivity Client VPN Rule Setup
Select one of the VPN rules in the VPN Summary screen and click Edit to configure the rule. If the Branch Office screen is displayed, select Contivity
Client from the Connection Type list box. The VPN Contivity Client Rule
Setup screen is shown in
.
N0115790
Figure 68 VPN Contivity Client rule setup
Chapter 13 VPN 207
Table 47 VPN Contivity Client rule setup
Label
Connection Type
Active
Keep Alive
Description
Description
Select Branch Office to manually configure a VPN rule. This has the BCM50a Integrated Router operate as a VPN router.
Select Contivity Client to use a simple VPN rule that lets you define and store connection information for accessing your corporate network through a IPSec router. This has the BCM50a
Integrated Router operate as a VPN client.
Select this check box to turn on this rule. Clear this check box if you do not want to use this rule after you apply it. If you want to set the Contivity Client rule to active, you must set all other VPN rules to inactive.
To set a Contivity Client rule to active, all of the other VPN rules must be disabled.
Select this check box to turn on the Keep Alive feature for this SA.
Turn on Keep Alive to have the BCM50a Integrated Router automatically reinitiate the SA after the SA lifetime times out, even if there is no traffic. The remote IPSec router must also have keep alive enabled in order for this feature to work.
Enter a brief description about this rule for identification purposes.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
208 Chapter 13 VPN
Table 47 VPN Contivity Client rule setup
Label
Destination
User Name
Password
Advanced
Apply
Cancel
Description
This field specifies the IP address or the domain name (up to 31 case-sensitive characters) of the remote IPSec router. You can use alphanumeric characters, the underscore, dash, period and the @ symbol in a domain name. No spaces are allowed.
Enter the username exactly as the IPSec router administrator gives it to you.
Enter the password exactly as the IPSec router administrator gives it to you.
Click Advanced to configure group authentication and on- demand client tunnel settings.
Click Apply to save your changes to the BCM50a Integrated
Router.
Click Cancel to return to the VPN Summary screen without saving your changes.
Configuring Advanced Setup
Select one of the VPN rules in the VPN Summary screen and click Edit to configure the rule. If the Branch Office screen is displayed, select Contivity
Client from the Connection Type list box. Click Advanced to display the VPN
Contivity Client Advanced Rule Setup screen as shown in Figure 69
.
N0115790
Figure 69 VPN Contivity Client advanced rule setup
Chapter 13 VPN 209
Table 48 describes the fields in Figure 69
.
Table 48 VPN Contivity Client advanced rule setup
Label Description
Group Authentication Enable Group Authentication to have the BCM50a Integrated
Router send a Group ID and Group Password to the remote
IPSec router for initial authentication. After a successful initial authentication, a RADIUS server associated with the remote
IPSec router uses the User Name and Password to authenticate the BCM50a Integrated Router. You must also configure the
Group ID and Group Password fields when you enable Group
Authentication.
After Group Authentication is not enabled, the remote IPSec router uses the User Name and Password to authenticate the
BCM50a Integrated Router.
Group ID
Group Password
Enter the group ID exactly as the IPSec router administrator gives it to you. This field only applies when you enable Group
Authentication.
Enter the group password exactly as the IPSec router administrator gives you. This field only applies when you enable
Group Authentication.
On Demand Client
Tunnel
Select this check box to have any outgoing packets automatically trigger a VPN connection to the remote IPSec router.
When On Demand Client Tunnel is not enabled, you need to go to the VPN Summary screen and click the Connect button to create a VPN connection to the remote IPSec router.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
210 Chapter 13 VPN
Table 48 VPN Contivity Client advanced rule setup
Label
Apply
Cancel
Description
Click Apply to temporarily save the settings and return to the
VPN - Contivity Client screen. The Group Authentication settings are saved to the BCM50a Integrated Router if you click
Apply in the VPN - Contivity Client screen.
Click Cancel to return to the VPN Contivity Client Rule Setup screen without saving your changes.
ID Type and content
With aggressive negotiation mode (see
“Negotiation Mode” on page 232 for more
information), the BCM50a Integrated Router identifies incoming SAs by ID type and content since this identifying information is not encrypted, so that is can distinguish between multiple rules for SAs that connect from remote IPSec routers that have dynamic WAN IP addresses. Telecommuters can use separate passwords to simultaneously connect to the BCM50a Integrated Router from
IPSec routers with dynamic IP addresses.
Note: Regardless of the ID type and content configuration, you cannot save multiple active rules with overlapping local and remote IP addresses with the BCM50a Integrated Router.
With the main negotiation mode (see “Negotiation Mode” on page 232
for more information), the ID type and content are encrypted to provide identity protection.
In this case the BCM50a Integrated Router can only distinguish between up to 12 different incoming SAs that connect from remote IPSec routers that have dynamic
WAN IP addresses. The BCM50a Integrated Router can distinguish up to 12 incoming SAs because you can select between two encryption algorithms (DES and 3DES), two authentication algorithms (MD5 and SHA1) and three key groups
). The ID type and content act as an extra level of identification for incoming SAs.
N0115790
Chapter 13 VPN 211
Configure the ID type and content in the VPN Branch Office Rule Setup screen
(see Figure 70 on page 214 ). The type of ID can be a domain name, an IP address,
or an e-mail address. The content is the IP address, domain name, or e-mail address.
Table 49 Local ID type and content fields
Local ID type= Content=
IP
DNS
Type the IP address of your computer or leave the field blank to have the BCM50a Integrated Router automatically use its own IP address.
Type a domain name (up to 31 characters) by which to identify this
BCM50a Integrated Router.
E-mail Type an e-mail address (up to 31 characters) by which to identify this
BCM50a Integrated Router.
The domain name or e-mail address that you use in the Content field is used for identification purposes only and does not need to be a real domain name or e-mail address.
Table 50 Peer ID type and content fields
Peer ID type= Content=
IP
DNS
Type the IP address of the computer with which you make the VPN connection or leave the field blank to have the BCM50a Integrated
Router automatically use the address in the Secure Gateway field.
Type a domain name (up to 31 characters) by which to identify the remote IPSec router.
Type an e-mail address (up to 31 characters) by which to identify the remote IPSec router.
The domain name or e-mail address that you use in the Content field is used for identification purposes only and does not need to be a real domain name or e-mail address. The domain name also does not have to match the IP address of the remote
IPSec router or what you configure in the Secure Gateway Address field below.
ID type and content examples
Two IPSec routers must have matching ID type and content configuration in order to set up a VPN tunnel.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
212 Chapter 13 VPN
The two BCM50a Integrated Routers shown in
Table 51 can complete negotiation
and establish a VPN tunnel.
Table 51 Matching ID type and content configuration example
BCM50a Integrated Router A
Local ID type: E-mail
Local ID content: [email protected]
Peer ID type: IP
Peer ID content: 1.1.1.2
BCM50a Integrated Router B
Local ID type: IP
Local ID content: 1.1.1.2
Peer ID type: E-mail
Peer ID content: [email protected]
The two BCM50a Integrated Routers shown in
Table 52 cannot complete their
negotiation because the Local ID type of BCM50a Integrated Router B is IP, but the Peer ID type in BCM50a Integrated Router A is set to E-mail. An “ID mismatched” message displays in the IPSEC LOG.
Table 52 Mismatching ID Type and Content Configuration Example
BCM50a Integrated Router A
Local ID type: IP
Local ID content: 1.1.1.10
Peer ID type: E-mail
Peer ID content: [email protected]
BCM50a Integrated Router B
Local ID type: IP
Local ID content: 1.1.1.10
Peer ID type: IP
Peer ID content: N/A
My IP Address
My IP Address is the WAN IP address of the BCM50a Integrated Router. The
BCM50a Integrated Router has to rebuild the VPN tunnel if the My IP Address changes after setup.
The following applies if this field is configured as 0.0.0.0:
• The BCM50a Integrated Router uses the current BCM50a Integrated Router
WAN IP address (static or dynamic) to set up the VPN tunnel.
N0115790
Chapter 13 VPN 213
Configuring Branch Office VPN Rule Setup
Select one of the VPN rules in the VPN Summary screen and click Edit to configure the rule. The VPN Branch Office Rule Setup screen is shown in
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
214 Chapter 13 VPN
Figure 70 VPN Branch Office rule setup
N0115790
Chapter 13 VPN 215
describes the fields in Figure 70
.
Table 53 VPN Branch Office rule setup
Label Description
Connection Type
Active
Nailed Up
Select Branch Office to manually configure a VPN rule.
Select Contivity Client to use a simple VPN rule that lets you define and store connection information for accessing your corporate network using the BCM50a Integrated Router. You can only configure one Contivity client rule.
If you want to set the Contivity Client rule to active, you must set all other VPN rules to inactive.
Select this check box to activate this VPN tunnel. This option determines whether a VPN rule is applied.
Select this check box to turn on the nailed up feature for this SA.
Turn on nailed up to have the BCM50a Integrated Router automatically reinitiate the SA after the SA lifetime times out, even if there is no traffic. The BCM50a Integrated Router also reinitiates the SA when it restarts.
NAT Traversal
Name
Key Management
Select this check box to enable NAT traversal. With NAT traversal, you can set up a VPN connection when there are NAT routers between the two IPSec routers.
The remote IPSec router must also have NAT traversal enabled.
You can use NAT traversal with ESP protocol using Transport or
Tunnel mode, but not with AH protocol. In order for a IPSec router behind a NAT router to receive an initiating IPSec packet, set the NAT router to forward UDP port 500 to the IPSec router behind the NAT router.
Type a name to identify this VPN policy. You can use any character, including spaces, but the BCM50a Integrated Router drops trailing spaces.
Your BCM50a Integrated Router uses IKE (ISAKMP) key management in order to set up a VPN.
Negotiation Mode Select Main for identity protection. Select Aggressive to allow more incoming connections from dynamic IP addresses to use separate passwords. Multiple SAs connecting through a IPSec router must have the same negotiation mode.
Encapsulation Mode Select Tunnel mode or Transport mode from the drop-down list.
Tunnel is compatible with NAT, Transport is not.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
216 Chapter 13 VPN
Table 53 VPN Branch Office rule setup
Label Description
Available/ Selected IP
Policy
The Available IP Policy table displays network routes. Use the
Add, Edit and Delete buttons to configure this list.
Move the network routes that you want to use the VPN tunnel down into the Selected IP Policy table.
Select a network route's radio button in the Available IP Policy table, then click the down arrows to move it into the Selected IP
Policy table. To remove a network route from the Selected IP
Policy table, select its radio button in the Selected IP Policy table and click the up arrows.
A network route that is already selected for a VPN tunnel does not display in the Available IP Policy table.
Private IP Address This field displays the IP address (or a range of IP addresses) of the computers on your BCM50a Integrated Router's local network, for which you have configured this VPN rule. For a range of addresses, the starting and ending IP addresses are displayed separated by a dash.
This field applies when you configure the IP policy to use a branch tunnel NAT address mapping rule in the IP Policy screen.
This field displays a single (static) IP address when the IP policy's
Branch Tunnel NAT Address Mapping Rule Type field is configured to One-to-One in the IP Policy screen.
This field displays the beginning and ending (static) IP addresses of a range of computers when the IP policy's Branch Tunnel NAT
Address Mapping Rule Type field is configured to Many-to-One or Many One-to-one in the IP Policy screen.
N0115790
Chapter 13 VPN 217
Table 53 VPN Branch Office rule setup
Label
Local IP Address
Description
This field displays the IP address (or range of IP addresses) of the computers on your BCM50a Integrated Router's local network, for which you have configured this IP policy.
This field displays the IP policy's virtual IP address (or range of addresses) when you enable branch tunnel NAT address mapping in the IP Policy screen.
This field displays a single (static) IP address when the IP policy's
Branch Tunnel NAT Address Mapping Rule Type field is configured to One-to-one or Many-to-One in the IP Policy screen.
This field displays the beginning and ending (static) IP addresses of a range of computers when the policy's Branch Tunnel NAT
Address Mapping Rule Type field is configured to Many
One-to-one in the IP Policy screen.
This field displays the policy's local IP address (or range of addresses) when you disable branch tunnel NAT address mapping in the IP Policy screen.
This field displays a single (static) IP address when the IP policy's
Local Address Type field is configured to Single Address in the
IP Policy screen.
This field displays the beginning and ending (static) IP addresses of a range of computers when the IP policy's Local Address
Type field is configured to Range Address in the IP Policy screen.
This field displays a (static) IP address and a subnet mask when the IP policy's Local Address Type field is configured to Subnet
Address in the IP Policy screen.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
218 Chapter 13 VPN
Table 53 VPN Branch Office rule setup
Label Description
Remote IP Address This field displays the IP addresses of computers on the remote network behind the remote IPSec router.
This field displays a single (static) IP address when the IP policy's
Remote Address Type field is configured to Single Address in the IP Policy screen.
This field displays the beginning and ending (static) IP addresses of a range of computers when the IP policy's Remote Address
Type field is configured to Range Address in the IP Policy screen.
This field displays a (static) IP address and a subnet mask when the IP policy's Remote Address Type field is configured to
Subnet Address in the IP Policy screen.
This field displays ALL whenever the Secure Gateway Address field is set to 0.0.0.0.
This field also displays ALL whenever the IP policy's Remote
Starting IP Address field is set to 0.0.0.0 in the IP Policy screen.
When ALL displays, only the remote IPSec router can initiate the
VPN.
Add
Edit
Select Add to open a screen where you can configure an IP policy.
Select the radio button next to an IP policy and then click Edit to edit that IP policy.
Delete
Authentication
Method
Pre-Shared Key
Retype to Confirm
Select the radio button next to an IP policy that you want to remove and then click Delete.
Select the Pre-Shared Key radio button to use a preshared secret key to identify the BCM50a Integrated Router.
Select the Certificate radio button to identify the BCM50a
Integrated Router by a certificate.
Type your preshared key in this field. A preshared key identifies a communicating party during a phase 1 IKE negotiation. It is called preshared because you must share it with another party before you can communicate with that party over a secure connection.
Type from 8 to 32 case-sensitive ASCII characters or from 16 to
62 hexadecimal (0-9, A-F) characters. You must precede a hexadecimal key with a 0x (zero x), which is not counted as part of the 16 to 62 character range for the key. For example, in
0x0123456789ABCDEF, “0x” denotes that the key is hexadecimal and “0123456789ABCDEF” is the key itself.
Both ends of the VPN tunnel must use the same preshared key.
You see a “PYLD_MALFORMED” (payload malformed) log if the same preshared key is not used on both ends.
Type your preshared key again in this field.
N0115790
Chapter 13 VPN 219
Table 53 VPN Branch Office rule setup
Label
Certificate
Local ID Type
Local Content
Peer ID Type
Description
Use the drop-down list to select the certificate to use for this VPN tunnel.
You must have certificates already configured in the My
Certificates screen. Click My Certificates to go to the My
Certificates screen, where you can view the BCM50a Integrated
Router's list of certificates.
Select IP to identify this BCM50a Integrated Router by its IP address.
Select DNS to identify this BCM50a Integrated Router by a domain name.
Select E-mail to identify this BCM50a Integrated Router by an e-mail address.
When you select IP in the Local ID Type field, type an IP address or leave the field blank to have the BCM50a Integrated Router automatically use its own IP address.
When you select DNS in the Local ID Type field, type a domain name (up to 31 characters) by which to identify this BCM50a
Integrated Router.
When you select E-mail in the Local ID Type field, type an e-mail address (up to 31 characters) by which to identify this BCM50a
Integrated Router.
The IP address, domain name, or e-mail address that you use in the Content field is used for identification purposes only and does not need to be a real domain name or e-mail address.
Select IP to identify the remote IPSec router by its IP address.
Select DNS to identify the remote IPSec router by a domain name.
Select E-mail to identify the remote IPSec router by an e-mail address.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
220 Chapter 13 VPN
Table 53 VPN Branch Office rule setup
Label
Peer Content
My IP Address
Secure Gateway
Address
Description
When you select IP in the Peer ID Type field, type the IP address of the computer with which you make the VPN connection or leave the field blank to have the BCM50a Integrated Router automatically use the address in the Secure Gateway Address field.
When you select DNS in the Peer ID Type field, type a domain name (up to 31 characters) by which to identify the remote IPSec router.
When you select E-mail in the Peer ID Type field, type an e-mail address (up to 31 characters) by which to identify the remote
IPSec router.
The domain name or e-mail address that you use in the Content field is used for identification purposes only and does not need to be a real domain name or e-mail address. The domain name also does not have to match the remote router's IP address or what you configure in the Secure Gateway Address field.
Regardless of how you configure the ID Type and Content fields, two active SAs cannot have both the local and remote IP address ranges overlap between rules.
Enter the WAN IP address of your BCM50a Integrated Router.
The VPN tunnel has to be rebuilt if this IP address changes.
The following applies if this field is configured as 0.0.0.0 (the default):
• The BCM50a Integrated Router uses the current BCM50a
Integrated Router WAN IP address (static or dynamic) to set up the VPN tunnel.
Type the WAN IP address or the domain name (up to 31 characters) of the IPSec router with which you are making the
VPN connection. Set this field to 0.0.0.0 if the remote IPSec router has a dynamic WAN IP address (the Key Management field must be set to IKE). The remote address fields do not apply when the Secure Gateway Address field is configured to 0.0.0.0.
In this case, only the remote IPSec router can initiate the VPN.
In order to have more than one active rule with the Secure
Gateway Address field set to 0.0.0.0, the ranges of the local IP addresses cannot overlap between rules.
If you configure an active rule with 0.0.0.0 in the Secure Gateway
Address field and the full IP address range of the LAN as the local IP address, then you cannot configure any other active rules with the Secure Gateway Address field set to 0.0.0.0.
N0115790
Chapter 13 VPN 221
Table 53 VPN Branch Office rule setup
Label Description
ESP
AH
Cancel
Select ESP if you want to use ESP (Encapsulation Security
Payload). The ESP protocol (RFC 2406) provides encryption as well as the services offered by AH. If you select ESP here, you must select options from the Encryption Algorithm and
Authentication Algorithm fields (described next).
Select AH if you want to use AH (Authentication Header
Protocol). The AH protocol (RFC 2402) was designed for integrity, authentication, sequence integrity (replay resistance), and nonrepudiation, but not for confidentiality, for which the ESP was designed. If you select AH here, you must select options from the
Authentication Algorithm field.
Encryption Algorithm Select DES, 3DES, AES 128, AES 192, AES 256 or NULL from the drop-down list.
When you use one of these encryption algorithms for data communications, both the sending device and the receiving device must use the same secret key, which can be used to encrypt and decrypt the message or to generate and verify a message authentication code. The DES encryption algorithm uses a 56-bit key. Triple DES (3DES) is a variation on DES that uses a 168-bit key. As a result, 3DES is more secure than DES. It also requires more processing power, resulting in increased latency and decreased throughput. You can select a 128-bit,
192-bit, or 256-bit key with this implementation of AES. AES is faster than 3DES.
Select NULL to set up a tunnel without encryption. When you select NULL, you do not enter an encryption key.
Authentication
Algorithm
Advanced
Select SHA1 or MD5 from the drop-down list. MD5 (Message
Digest 5) and SHA1 (Secure Hash Algorithm) are hash algorithms used to authenticate packet data. The SHA1 algorithm is generally considered stronger than MD5, but is slower. Select
MD5 for minimal security and SHA-1 for maximum security.
Click Advanced to go to a screen where you can configure detailed IKE (Internet Key Exchange) negotiation–phase 1
(Authentication) and phase 2 (Key Exchange) settings for the rule.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the BCM50a Integrated
Router.
Click Cancel to return to the VPN Summary screen without saving your changes.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
222 Chapter 13 VPN
Configuring an IP Policy
Select one of the IP policies in the VPN Branch Office screen and click Add or
Edit to configure the policy. The Branch Office – IP Policy setup screen is
N0115790
Figure 71 VPN Branch Office — IP Policy
Chapter 13 VPN 223
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
224 Chapter 13 VPN
describes the fields in Figure 71
.
Table 54 VPN Branch Office — IP Policy
Label Description
Protocol Enter a number to specify what type of traffic is allowed to go through the VPN tunnel that is built using this IP policy. For example, use 1 for ICMP, 6 for TCP, 17 for UDP. 0 is the default and signifies any protocol. For example, if you select 1 (ICMP), only ICMP packets can go through the tunnel.
If you specify a protocol other than 1 (ICMP) or 0 (any protocol), you cannot use the control ping feature.
If you set this field to 6 (TCP) or 17 (UDP), you can use the Port field to specify the port number of the allowed traffic.
Enable Control Ping Select the check box and configure an IP address in the Control
Ping IP Address field to have the BCM50a Integrated Router periodically test the VPN tunnel to the branch office.
The BCM50a Integrated Router pings the IP address every minute. The BCM50a Integrated Router starts the IPSec connection idle timeout timer when it sends the ping packet. If there is no traffic from the remote IPSec router by the time the timeout period expires, the BCM50a Integrated Router disconnects the VPN tunnel.
Control Ping IP
Address
If you select Enable Control Ping, enter the IP address of a computer at the branch office. The computer's IP address must be in this IP policy's remote range (see the Remote fields).
Branch Tunnel NAT Address Mapping Rule
Port Forwarding
Server
Click Port Forwarding Server to configure a list of inside (behind
NAT on the LAN) servers, for example, web or FTP. The BCM50a
Integrated Router makes these servers visible to the devices using the VPN branch NAT tunnel (from behind the remote IPSec router) even though NAT makes your inside network appear as a single machine. This option applies when the Type field is configured to
Many-to-One.
Active Enable this feature to have the BCM50a Integrated Router use a different (virtual) IP address for the VPN connection. When you enable branch tunnel NAT address mapping, you do not configure the local section.
N0115790
Chapter 13 VPN 225
Table 54 VPN Branch Office — IP Policy
Label
Type
Private Starting IP
Address
Private Ending IP
Address
Virtual Starting IP
Address
Description
Select one of the following port mapping types.
1. One-to-One: One-to-one mode maps one private IP address to one virtual IP address. Port numbers do not change with one-to-one NAT mapping.
2. Many-to-One: Many-to-One mode maps multiple private IP addresses to one virtual IP address. This is equivalent to SUA (for example, PAT, port address translation), BCM50a Integrated
Router's Single User Account feature.
3. Many One-to-one: Many One-to-one mode maps each private
IP address to a unique virtual IP address. Port numbers do not change with many one-to-one NAT mapping.
When the Type field is configured to One-to-one, enter the (static)
IP address of the computer on your BCM50a Integrated Router's
LAN that is to use the VPN tunnel.
When the Type field is configured to Many-to-One or Many
One-to-one, enter the beginning (static) IP address of the range of computers on your BCM50a Integrated Router's LAN that are to use the VPN tunnel.
When the Type field is configured to One-to-one, this field is N/A.
When the Type field is configured to Many-to-One or Many
One-to-one, enter the ending (static) IP address of the range of computers on your BCM50a Integrated Router's LAN that are to use the VPN tunnel.
Virtual addresses must be static and correspond to the remote
IPSec router's configured remote IP addresses.
The computers on the BCM50a Integrated Router's LAN and the remote network can function as if they were on the same subnet when the virtual IP address(es) is on the same subnet as the remote IP addresses.
Two active SAs can have the same virtual or remote IP address, but not both. You can configure multiple SAs between the same virtual and remote IP addresses, as long as only one is active at a time.
When the Type field is configured to One-to-one or
Many-to-One, enter the (static) IP address that you want to use for the VPN tunnel.
When the Type field is configured to Many One-to-one, enter the beginning (static) IP address of the range of IP addresses that you want to use for the VPN tunnel.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
226 Chapter 13 VPN
Table 54 VPN Branch Office — IP Policy
Label
Virtual Ending IP
Address
Local
Description
When the Type field is configured to One-to-one or
Many-to-One, this field is N/A.
When the Type field is configured to Many One-to-one, enter the ending (static) IP address of the range of IP addresses that you want to use for the VPN tunnel.
Local IP addresses must be static and correspond to the remote
IPSec router's configured remote IP addresses.
Two active SAs can have the same local or remote IP address, but not both. You can configure multiple SAs between the same local and remote IP addresses, as long as only one is active at a time.
Two IP policies can have the same local or remote IP address, but not both.
In order to have more than one active rule with the Secure
Gateway Address field set to 0.0.0.0, the ranges of the local IP addresses cannot overlap between rules.
If you configure an active rule with 0.0.0.0 in the Secure Gateway
Address field and the full IP address range of the LAN as the local
IP address, then you cannot configure any other active rules with the Secure Gateway Address field set to 0.0.0.0.
Address Type
Starting IP Address When the Address Type field is configured to Single Address, enter a (static) IP address on the LAN behind your BCM50a
Integrated Router. When the Address Type field is configured to
Range Address, enter the beginning (static) IP address, in a range of computers on your LAN behind your BCM50a Integrated
Router. When the Address Type field is configured to Subnet
Address, this is a (static) IP address on the LAN behind your
BCM50a Integrated Router.
Ending IP Address /
Subnet Mask
Use the drop-down menu to choose Single Address, Range
Address, or Subnet Address. Select Single Address for a single
IP address. Select Range Address for a specific range of IP addresses. Select Subnet Address to specify IP addresses on a network by their subnet mask.
When the Address Type field is configured to Single Address, this field is N/A. When the Address Type field is configured to
Range Address, enter the end (static) IP address, in a range of computers on the LAN behind your BCM50a Integrated Router.
When the Address Type field is configured to Subnet Address, this is a subnet mask on the LAN behind your BCM50a Integrated
Router.
N0115790
Chapter 13 VPN 227
Table 54 VPN Branch Office — IP Policy
Label
Protocol
Port
Remote
Description
Enter a number to specify what type of traffic is allowed to go through the VPN tunnel that is built using this IP policy. For example, use 1 for ICMP, 6 for TCP, 17 for UDP. 0 is the default and signifies any protocol. For example, if you select 1 (ICMP), only ICMP packets can go through the tunnel.
If you specify a protocol other than 1 (ICMP) or 0 (any protocol), you cannot use the control ping feature.
If you set this field to 6 (TCP) or 17 (UDP), you can use the Port field to specify the port number of the allowed traffic.
This field is available when you set the Protocol field to 6 (TCP) or
17 (UDP). Use this field to specify the port number of the traffic that is allowed to go through the VPN tunnel that is built using this
IP policy.
The default is 0 and it signifies any port. Type a port number from
0 to 65 535. Some of the most common IP ports are: 21, FTP; 53,
DNS; 23, Telnet; 80, HTTP; 25, SMTP; 110, POP3.
Do this if you want to allow only traffic of a particular port number to go through the VPN tunnel. For example, if you only wanted to allow FTP traffic to go through the VPN tunnel, specify 6 (TCP) in the Protocol field and 21 (FTP) in the Port field.
Remote IP addresses must be static and correspond to the remote
IPSec router's configured local IP addresses. The remote fields do not apply when the Secure Gateway Address field is configured to 0.0.0.0. In this case, only the remote IPSec router can initiate the VPN.
Two active SAs cannot have the local and remote IP addresses both the same. You can configure multiple SAs between the same local and remote IP addresses, as long as only one is active at any time.
Two IP policies can have the same local or remote IP address, but not both.
Address Type Use the drop-down menu to choose Single Address, Range
Address, or Subnet Address. Select Single Address for a single
IP address. Select Range Address for a specific range of IP addresses. Select Subnet Address to specify IP addresses on a network by their subnet mask.
Starting IP Address When the Address Type field is configured to Single Address, enter a (static) IP address on the LAN behind your BCM50a
Integrated Router. When the Address Type field is configured to
Range Address, enter the beginning (static) IP address, in a range of computers on your LAN behind your BCM50a Integrated
Router. When the Address Type field is configured to Subnet
Address, this is a (static) IP address on the LAN behind your
BCM50a Integrated Router.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
228 Chapter 13 VPN
Table 54 VPN Branch Office — IP Policy
Label Description
Ending IP Address /
Subnet Mask
Port
Apply
Cancel
When the Address Type field is configured to Single Address, this field is N/A. When the Address Type field is configured to
Range Address, enter the end (static) IP address, in a range of computers on the LAN behind your BCM50a Integrated Router.
When the Address Type field is configured to Subnet Address, this is a subnet mask on the LAN behind your BCM50a Integrated
Router.
By default, 0 signifies any port. Type a port number from 0 to 65
535. Some of the most common IP ports are: 21, FTP; 53, DNS;
23, Telnet; 80, HTTP; 25, SMTP; 110, POP3.
Click Apply to save your changes to the BCM50a Integrated
Router.
Click Cancel to return to the VPN Branch Office screen without saving your changes.
Port forwarding server
A NAT server set is a list of inside (behind NAT on the LAN) servers, for example, web or FTP, that you can make visible to the devices using the VPN branch NAT tunnel (from behind the remote IPSec router) even though NAT makes your inside network appear as a single machine. The servers must be using the VPN branch NAT tunnel (from behind the BCM50a Integrated Router).
You can enter a single port or a range of ports to be forwarded and then the local
IP address of the desired inside servers.
Configuring a port forwarding server
Select one of the IP Policies in the VPN Branch Office screen and click Edit to display the Branch Office – IP Policy setup screen. For the Mapping Rule Type, select Many-to-One, enter the private and virtual IP addresses and click the Port
Forwarding Server button to display the screen shown in
.
N0115790
Chapter 13 VPN 229
Figure 72 VPN Branch Office — IP Policy - Port Forwarding Server
Table 55 describes the fields in Figure 72
.
Table 55 VPN Branch Office — IP Policy - Port Forwarding Server
Label
Default Server
#
Active
Name
Description
In addition to the servers for specified services, NAT supports a default server. A default server receives packets from ports that are not specified in this screen. If you do not assign a default server IP address, all packets received for ports not specified in this screen are discarded.
Number of an individual port forwarding server entry.
Select this check box to activate the port forwarding server entry.
Enter a descriptive name for identifying purposes.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
230 Chapter 13 VPN
Table 55 VPN Branch Office — IP Policy - Port Forwarding Server
Label
Start Port
End Port
Server IP Address
Apply
Reset
Cancel
Description
Type a port number in this field.
To forward only one port, type the port number again in the End
Port field.
To forward a series of ports, type the start port number here and the end port number in the End Port field.
Type a port number in this field.
To forward only one port, type the port number in the Start Port field above and then type it again in this field.
To forward a series of ports, type the last port number in a series that begins with the port number in the Start Port field above.
Type your server IP address in this field.
Click this button to save these settings and return to the VPN
Branch Office - IP Policy screen.
Click this button to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Click this button to return to the VPN Branch Office - IP Policy screen without saving your changes.
IKE phases
There are two phases to every IKE (Internet Key Exchange) negotiation–phase 1
(Authentication) and phase 2 (Key Exchange). A phase 1 exchange establishes an
IKE SA and the second one uses that SA to negotiate SAs for IPSec.
N0115790
Figure 73 Two phases to set up the IPSec SA
Chapter 13 VPN 231
In Phase 1 you must:
• Choose a negotiation mode.
• Authenticate the connection by entering a preshared key.
• Choose an encryption algorithm.
• Choose an authentication algorithm.
• Choose a Diffie-Hellman public-key cryptography key group (DH1, DH2, and DH5).
• Set the IKE SA lifetime. In this field you can determine how long an IKE SA will stay up before it times out. An IKE SA times out when the IKE SA lifetime period expires. If an IKE SA times out when an IPSec SA is already established, the IPSec SA stays connected.
In Phase 2 you must:
• Choose which protocol to use (ESP or AH) for the IKE key exchange.
• Choose an encryption algorithm.
• Choose an authentication algorithm
• Choose whether to enable Perfect Forward Secrecy (PFS) using
Diffie-Hellman public-key cryptography–see “Perfect Forward Secrecy
. Select None (the default) to disable PFS.
• Choose Tunnel mode or Transport mode.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
232 Chapter 13 VPN
• Set the IPSec SA lifetime. In this field, you can determine how long the IPSec
SA will stay up before it times out. The BCM50a Integrated Router automatically renegotiates the IPSec SA if there is traffic when the IPSec SA lifetime period expires. The BCM50a Integrated Router also automatically renegotiates the IPSec SA if both IPSec routers have keep alive enabled, even if there is no traffic. If an IPSec SA times out, the IPSec router must renegotiate the SA the next time someone attempts to send traffic.
Negotiation Mode
The phase 1 Negotiation Mode you select determines how the Security
Association (SA) is established for each connection through IKE negotiations.
Main Mode ensures the highest level of security when the communicating parties are negotiating authentication (phase 1). It uses six messages in three round trips:
SA negotiation, Diffie-Hellman exchange, and an exchange of nonces (a nonce is a random number). This mode features identity protection (your identity is not revealed in the negotiation).
Aggressive Mode is quicker than Main Mode because it eliminates several steps when the communicating parties are negotiating authentication (phase 1).
However the trade-off is that faster speed limits its negotiating power and it also does not provide identity protection. It is useful in remote access situations where the address of the initiator is not known by the responder and both parties want to use preshared key authentication.
Preshared key
A preshared key identifies a communicating party during a phase 1 IKE negotiation. It is called preshared because you have to share it with another party before you can communicate with the party over a secure connection.
N0115790
Chapter 13 VPN 233
Diffie-Hellman (DH) Key Groups
Diffie-Hellman (DH) is a public-key cryptography protocol that allows two parties to establish a shared secret over an unsecured communications channel.
Diffie-Hellman is used within IKE SA setup to establish session keys. 768-bit
(Group 1 - DH1), 1 024-bit (Group 2 – DH2) and 1 536-bit (Group 5 - DH5)
Diffie-Hellman groups are supported. Upon completion of the Diffie-Hellman exchange, the two peers have a shared secret, but the IKE SA is not authenticated.
For authentication, use preshared keys.
Perfect Forward Secrecy (PFS)
Enabling PFS means that the key is transient. The key is thrown away and replaced by a brand new key using a new Diffie-Hellman exchange for each new
IPSec SA setup. With PFS enabled, if one key is compromised, previous and subsequent keys are not compromised, because subsequent keys are not derived from previous keys. The (time consuming) Diffie-Hellman exchange is the trade-off for this extra security.
This can be unnecessary for data that does not require such security, so PFS is disabled (None) by default in the BCM50a Integrated Router. Disabling PFS means new authentication and encryption keys are derived from the same root secret (which can have security implications in the long run) but allows faster SA setup (by bypassing the Diffie-Hellman key exchange).
Configuring advanced Branch office setup
Select one of the VPN rules in the VPN Summary screen and click Edit to configure the rule. The basic IKE rule setup screen displays.
In the VPN Branch Office Rule Setup screen, click the Advanced button to display the VPN Branch Office Advanced Rule Setup screen.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
234 Chapter 13 VPN
Figure 74 VPN Branch Office advanced rule setup
N0115790
Table 56 describes the fields in Figure 74
.
Table 56 VPN Branch Office Advanced Rule Setup
Label
Enable Replay
Detection
Phase 1
Description
As a VPN setup is processing intensive, the system is vulnerable to
Denial of Service (DoS) attacks. The IPSec receiver can detect and reject old or duplicate packets to protect against replay attacks.
Enable replay detection by setting this field to YES.
A phase 1 exchange establishes an IKE SA (Security Association).
Chapter 13 VPN 235
Table 56 VPN Branch Office Advanced Rule Setup
Label Description
Multiple Proposal Select this check box to allow the BCM50a Integrated Router to use any of its phase 1 encryption and authentication algorithms when negotiating an IKE SA.
Clear this check box to have the BCM50a Integrated Router use only the phase 1 encryption and authentication algorithms configured below when negotiating an IKE SA.
Negotiation Mode Select Main for identity protection. Select Aggressive to allow more incoming connections from dynamic IP addresses to use separate passwords. The BCM50a Integrated Router's negotiation mode must be identical to that on the remote IPSec router. Multiple SAs connecting through a IPSec router must have the same negotiation mode.
Encryption
Algorithm
Select DES, 3DES or AES from the drop-down list.
When you use one of these encryption algorithms for data communications, both the sending device and the receiving device must use the same secret key, which can be used to encrypt and decrypt the message or to generate and verify a message authentication code. The DES encryption algorithm uses a 56-bit key.
Triple DES (3DES) is a variation on DES that uses a 168-bit key. As a result, 3DES is more secure than DES. It also requires more processing power, resulting in increased latency and decreased throughput. This implementation of AES uses a 128-bit key. AES is faster than 3DES.
Authentication
Algorithm
SA Life Time
Select SHA1 or MD5 from the drop-down list. The BCM50a Integrated
Router's authentication algorithm must be identical to the remote
IPSec router. MD5 (Message Digest 5) and SHA1 (Secure Hash
Algorithm) are hash algorithms used to authenticate the source and integrity of packet data. The SHA1 algorithm is generally considered stronger than MD5, but is slower. Select SHA-1 for maximum security.
Define the length of time before an IKE SA automatically renegotiates in this field. It can range from 60 to 3 000 000 seconds (almost 35 days). A short SA life time increases security by forcing the two IPSec routers to update the encryption and authentication keys. However, every time the VPN tunnel renegotiates, all users accessing remote resources are temporarily disconnected.
Key Group
Phase 2
You must choose a key group for phase 1 IKE setup.
DH1 (default) refers to Diffie-Hellman Group 1, a 768-bit random number.
DH2 refers to Diffie-Hellman Group 2, a 1 024-bit (1Kb) random number.
DH5 refers to Diffie-Hellman Group 5, a 1 536-bit random number.
A phase 2 exchange uses the IKE SA established in phase 1 to negotiate the SA for IPSec.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
236 Chapter 13 VPN
Table 56 VPN Branch Office Advanced Rule Setup
Label Description
Multiple Proposal Select this check box to allow the BCM50a Integrated Router to use any of its phase 2 encryption and authentication algorithms when negotiating an IPSec SA.
Clear this check box to have the BCM50a Integrated Router use only the phase 2 encryption and authentication algorithms when negotiating an IPSec SA.
Active Protocol Select ESP or AH from the drop-down list. The BCM50a Integrated
Router's IPSec Protocol must be identical to the remote IPSec router.
The ESP (Encapsulation Security Payload) protocol (RFC 2406) provides encryption as well as the authentication offered by AH. If you select ESP here, you must select options from the Encryption
Algorithm and Authentication Algorithm fields. The AH protocol
(Authentication Header Protocol) (RFC 2402) was designed for integrity, authentication, sequence integrity (replay resistance), and nonrepudiation, but not for confidentiality, for which the ESP was designed. If you select AH here, you must select options from the
Authentication Algorithm field.
Encryption
Algorithm
Select DES, 3DES, AES or NULL from the drop-down list.
When you use one of these encryption algorithms for data communications, both the sending device and the receiving device must use the same secret key, which can be used to encrypt and decrypt the message or to generate and verify a message authentication code. The DES encryption algorithm uses a 56-bit key.
Triple DES (3DES) is a variation on DES that uses a 168-bit key. As a result, 3DES is more secure than DES. It also requires more processing power, resulting in increased latency and decreased throughput. You can select a 128-bit, 192-bit, or 256-bit key with this implementation of AES. AES is faster than 3DES.
Select NULL to set up a tunnel without encryption. When you select
NULL, you do not enter an encryption key.
Authentication
Algorithm
SA Life Time
Encapsulation
Select SHA1 or MD5 from the drop-down list. MD5 (Message Digest
5) and SHA1 (Secure Hash Algorithm) are hash algorithms used to authenticate packet data. The SHA1 algorithm is generally considered stronger than MD5, but is slower. Select MD5 for minimal security and
SHA-1 for maximum security.
Define the length of time before an IKE SA automatically renegotiates in this field. It can range from 60 to 3 000 000 seconds (almost 35 days). A short SA life time increases security by forcing the two IPSec routers to update the encryption and authentication keys. However, every time the VPN tunnel renegotiates, all users accessing remote resources are temporarily disconnected.
Select Tunnel mode or Transport mode from the drop-down list. The
BCM50a Integrated Router's encapsulation mode must be identical to the remote IPSec router. Tunnel is compatible with NAT, Transport is not.
N0115790
Chapter 13 VPN 237
Table 56 VPN Branch Office Advanced Rule Setup
Label Description
Perfect Forward
Secrecy (PFS)
Apply
Cancel
Perfect Forward Secrecy (PFS) is disabled (None) by default in phase
2 IPSec SA setup. This allows faster IPSec setup, but is not as secure. Choose from DH1, DH2, or DH5 to enable PFS.
DH1 refers to Diffie-Hellman Group 1, a 768-bit random number.
DH2 refers to Diffie-Hellman Group 2, a 1 024-bit (1Kb) random number (more secure, yet slower).
DH5 refers to Diffie-Hellman Group 5, a 1 536-bit random number.
Click Apply to temporarily save the settings and return to the VPN -
Branch Office Rule Setup screen. The advanced settings are saved to the BCM50a Integrated Router if you click Apply in the VPN -
Branch Office Rule Setup screen.
Click Cancel to return to the VPN Branch Office screen without saving your changes.
SA Monitor
In the WebGUI, click VPN and the SA Monitor tab. Use this screen to display and manage all of the active VPN connections (IPSec sessions).
A Security Association (SA) is the group of security settings related to a specific
VPN tunnel. This screen displays active VPN connections. Use Refresh to
display active VPN connections. This screen is read-only. Table 57
describes the fields in this tab.
Note: When there is outbound traffic but no inbound traffic, the SA times out automatically after two minutes. A tunnel with no outbound or inbound traffic is idle and does not time out until the SA lifetime period expires. See the section
“Keep Alive” on page 204 about keep alive to
have the BCM50a Integrated Router renegotiate an IPSec SA when the
SA lifetime expires, even if there is no traffic.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
238 Chapter 13 VPN
Figure 75 VPN SA Monitor
N0115790
Table 57 describes the fields in Figure 75
.
Table 57 VPN SA Monitor
Label Description
#
Name
This is the security association index number.
This field displays the identification name for this VPN policy.
Connection Type This field displays whether this is a connection to another IPSec router or to a Contivity VPN client.
Local IP Address This field displays the IP address of the computer using the VPN
IPSec feature of your BCM50a Integrated Router.
Remote IP
Address
Encapsulation
IPSec Algorithm
This field displays IP address (in a range) of computers on the remote network behind the remote IPSec router.
This field displays Tunnel or Transport mode.
This field displays the security protocols used for an SA.
Refresh
Disconnect
Next Page
(if applicable)
Both AH and ESP increase BCM50a Integrated Router processing requirements and communications latency (delay).
Click Refresh to display the current active VPN connections. This button is available when you have active VPN connections.
Select a security association index number that you want to disconnect and then click Disconnect. This button is available when you have active VPN connections.
Click Next Page to view more items in the summary (if you have a summary list that exceeds this page)
Chapter 13 VPN 239
Global settings
In the WebGUI, click VPN on the navigation panel, then click the Global Setting tab.
Figure 76 VPN Global Setting
Table 58 describes the fields in Figure 76
.
Table 58 VPN Global Setting
Label
Windows Networking
(NetBIOS over TCP/IP)
Allow Through IPSec
Tunnel
Exclusive Use Mode for
Client Tunnel
Description
NetBIOS (Network Basic Input/Output System) are TCP or
UDP packets that enable a computer to connect to and communicate with a LAN. It is sometimes necessary to allow NetBIOS packets to pass through VPN tunnels in order to allow local computers to find computers on the remote network and vice versa.
Select this check box to send NetBIOS packets through the VPN connection.
Select this check box to permit only the computer with the
MAC address that you specify to set up a VPN connection to the remote IPSec router.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
240 Chapter 13 VPN
Table 58 VPN Global Setting
Label
MAC Address Allowed
Contivity Client Fail-Over
First Gateway
Second Gateway
Third Gateway
Apply
Reset
Description
Enter the MAC address of the computer you want to allow to use the VPN tunnel.
The Contivity Client fail-over feature allows a Contivity client to establish a VPN connection to a backup IPSec router when the default remote IPSec router (specified in the Destination field) is not accessible.
The VPN fail-over feature must also be set up in the remote IPSec router.
These read-only fields display the IP addresses of the backup IPSec routers. The BCM50a Integrated Router automatically gets this information from the default remote
IPSec router.
After the remote IPSec router is unreachable or fails to respond to IKE negotiation, the BCM50a Integrated
Router tries to establish a VPN connection to a backup
IPSec router.
Click Apply to save your changes to the BCM50a
Integrated Router.
Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.
VPN Client Termination
Use these screens to configure the BCM50a Integrated Router for VPN connections from computers using Nortel Contivity VPN Client software. In the
WebGUI, click VPN on the navigation panel and the Client Termination tab to open the screen illustrated in
. This screen sets the general settings for use with all of the Contivity VPN client tunnels.
N0115790
Figure 77 VPN Client Termination
Chapter 13 VPN 241
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
242 Chapter 13 VPN
describes the fields in Figure 77
.
Table 59 VPN Client Termination
Label Description
Enable Client
Termination
Turn on the client termination feature if you want the BCM50a
Integrated Router to support VPN connections from computers using Contivity VPN Client software.
Local User Database Select this option to have the BCM50a Integrated Router use its internal list of users to authenticate the Contivity VPN clients.
Click Configure Local User Database to edit the list of users and their usernames and passwords.
User Name and
Password/
Pre-Shared Key
RADIUS Server
Select this option to have the BCM50a Integrated Router use the
Contivity VPN clients’ usernames and passwords as a preshared key to identify them during phase 1 IKE negotiations.
Select this option to have the BCM50a Integrated Router use an external RADIUS server to identify the Contivity VPN clients during phase 1 IKE negotiations. Click Configure RADIUS
Server to specify the associated external RADIUS server.
Group ID
Group Password
Retype to Confirm
The Contivity VPN clients send the group ID and group password to the BCM50a Integrated Router for or initial authentication. After a successful initial authentication, the associated external
RADIUS server uses the username and password from the
Contivity VPN client to authenticate the Contivity VPN client.
Enter a group ID of up to 31 ASCII characters.
Enter a group password of up to 31 ASCII characters. Enter it a second time to make sure you have entered it correctly.
Authentication Type Select User Name and Password to have the external RADIUS server use the Contivity VPN clients’ usernames and passwords to authenticate them during phase 1 IKE negotiations.
N0115790
Chapter 13 VPN 243
Table 59 VPN Client Termination
Label Description
Encryption
IKE Encryption and
Diffie-Hellman Group
Assignment of Client
IP
Select the combinations of protocol and encryption and authentication algorithms that the BCM50a Integrated Router is to use for the phase 2 VPN connections (VPN tunnels) with Contivity
VPN clients.
The ESP (Encapsulation Security Payload) protocol (RFC 2406) uses encryption as well as the services offered by AH.
The AH (Authentication Header Protocol) protocol (RFC 2402) was designed for integrity, authentication, sequence integrity
(replay resistance), and nonrepudiation but not for confidentiality, for which the ESP was designed. It does not use encryption.
When you use one of the encryption algorithms for data communications, both the sending device and the receiving device must use the same secret key, which can be used to encrypt and decrypt the message or to generate and verify a message authentication code.
The DES encryption algorithm uses a 56-bit key.
Triple DES is a variation on DES that uses a 168-bit key. Triple
DES is more secure than DES. It also requires more processing power, resulting in increased latency and decreased throughput.
You can select a 128-bit key implementation of AES. AES is faster than 3DES.
SHA1 (Secure Hash Algorithm) and MD5 (Message Digest 5) are hash algorithms used to authenticate packet data. SHA1 algorithm is generally considered stronger than MD5, but is slower.
Select the combinations of encryption algorithm and
Diffie-Hellman key group that the BCM50a Integrated Router is to use for phase 1 IKE setup with Contivity VPN clients.
The DES encryption algorithm uses a 56-bit key.
Triple DES is a variation on DES that uses a 168-bit key. Triple
DES is more secure than DES. It also requires more processing power, resulting in increased latency and decreased throughput.
You can select a 128-bit key implementation of AES. AES is faster than 3DES.
Diffie-Hellman (DH) is a public-key cryptography protocol that is used within IKE SA setup to establish session keys. The larger the Diffie-Hellman Group, the higher the security.
Diffie-Hellman Group 1 uses a 768-bit random number.
Diffie-Hellman Group 2 uses a 1 024-bit (1Kb) random number.
Diffie-Hellman Group 5 uses a 1 536-bit random number.
Select Use Static Addresses if the Contivity VPN clients are using static IP addresses. You must specify these in the remote user profiles.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
244 Chapter 13 VPN
Table 59 VPN Client Termination
Label
IP Address Pool
Enable Perfect
Forward Secrecy
Rekey Timeout
Rekey Data Count
Advanced
Apply
Reset
Description
Have the BCM50a Integrated Router assign IP addresses to the
Contivity VPN clients from a pool of IP address that you define.
Select the pool to use. Click Configure IP Address Pool to define the ranges of IP addresses that you can select from.
Perfect Forward Secrecy (PFS) is disabled by default in phase 2
IPSec SA setup. This allows faster IPSec setup, but is not so secure. Turn on PFS to use the Diffie-Hellman exchange to create a new key for each IPSec SA setup.
Set the allowed lifetime for an individual key used for data encryption before negotiating a new key. A setting of 00:00:00 disables the rekey timeout.
Set how much data can be transmitted through the VPN tunnel before negotiating a new key. A setting of 0 disables the rekey data count.
Click Advanced to configure detailed VPN client tunnel termination settings.
Click Apply to save your changes to the BCM50a Integrated
Router.
Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.
VPN Client Termination IP pool summary
In the WebGUI, click VPN on the navigation panel and the Client Termination tab to open the VPN Client Termination screen. Then click the Configure IP
Address Pool link to open the screen in Figure 78 . Use this screen to manage the
list of ranges of IP addresses to assign to the Contivity VPN clients.
N0115790
Figure 78 VPN Client Termination IP pool summary
Chapter 13 VPN 245
Table 60 describes the fields in Figure 78
.
Table 60 VPN Client Termination IP pool summary
Label
Return to ->Client
Termination Page
#
Name
Active
Starting Address
Subnet mask
Pool size
Edit
Delete
Description
Click this link to return to the screen used to configure the general settings for use with all of the Contivity VPN Client tunnels.
These numbers are an incremental value. The position of the IP address pool in the list does not matter.
This field displays the label that you configure for the IP address pool.
This field displays whether or not the IP address pool is turned on.
This field displays the first IP address in the IP address pool.
This field displays the subnet mask that you specified to define the IP address pool.
This field displays how many IP addresses you set the BCM50a
Integrated Router to give out from the pool created by the starting address and subnet mask.
Click the radio button next to an IP address pool entry and click
Edit to open the screen where you can configure the entry.
Click the radio button next to an IP address pool entry and click
Delete to remove it.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
246 Chapter 13 VPN
VPN Client Termination IP pool edit
In the WebGUI, click VPN on the navigation panel and the Client Termination tab to open the VPN Client Termination screen. Then click the Configure IP
Address Pool link to open the VPN Client Termination IP Pool Summary screen. Click the radio button next to an IP address pool entry and click Edit to open the following screen where you can configure the entry. Use this screen to configure a range of IP addresses to assign to the Contivity VPN clients.
Figure 79 VPN Client Termination IP pool edit
N0115790
Table 61 describes the fields in Figure 79
.
Table 61 VPN Client Termination IP pool edit
Label
Active
IP Pool Name
Starting Address
Subnet Mask
Description
Turn on the IP pool if you want the BCM50a Integrated Router to use it in assigning IP addresses to the Contivity VPN clients.
Specify a label for the IP address pool.
Specify the first of the IP addresses in the IP address pool.
Specify a subnet mask to define the IP address pool.
Chapter 13 VPN 247
Table 61 VPN Client Termination IP pool edit
Label
Pool Size
Apply
Cancel
Description
Specify how many IP addresses the BCM50a Integrated Router is to give out from the pool created by the starting address and subnet mask. 256 is the maximum.
Click Apply to save your changes to the BCM50a Integrated
Router.
Click Cancel to return to the IP Pool Summary screen without saving your changes.
VPN Client Termination advanced
In the WebGUI, click VPN on the navigation panel and the Client Termination tab to open the VPN Client Termination screen. Then click the Advanced button to open the following screen. Use this screen to configure detailed settings for use with all of the Contivity VPN Client tunnels.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
248 Chapter 13 VPN
Figure 80 VPN Client Termination advanced
N0115790
Chapter 13 VPN 249
describes the fields in Figure 80
.
Table 62 VPN Client Termination advanced
Label
NAT Traversal
Disable Client IKE
Source Port
Switching
UDP Port
Fail-Over
First Gateway
Second Gateway
Third Gateway
Enable Failover
Tuning
Interval
Max Number of
Retransmissions
Description
Select Enabled in order to Use NAT traversal when there is a
NAT router between the BCM50a Integrated Router and the
Contivity VPN clients.
The Contivity VPN clients must also have NAT traversal enabled.
You also need to specify the UDP port that is used for the VPN traffic.
With client IKE source port switching, if the BCM50a Integrated
Router detects that traffic is going through NAT, it asks the client to use a UDP port higher than the standard of 500 (such as port
1023). Turn off client source port switching if the NAT router requires IKE to use port 500.
Specifies the UDP port to use for the VPN traffic. In order for a
Contivity VPN client behind a NAT router to receive an initiating
IPSec packet, set the NAT router to forward this UDP port to the
VPN Contivity client behind the NAT router.
The fail-over feature allows a Contivity VPN client to establish a
VPN connection to a backup IPSec router when the BCM50a
Integrated Router is not accessible.
The VPN fail-over feature must also be set up in the Contivity
VPN clients.
Enter the IP addresses of the backup IPSec routers.
When the BCM50a Integrated Router is unreachable or fails to respond to IKE negotiation, the Contivity VPN client tries to establish a VPN connection to a backup IPSec router.
Enable the VPN fail-over feature to have the BCM50a Integrated
Router keep sending keep-alive packets to the Contivity VPN clients in order to check the connection and keep the connection alive.
Specifies how long the VPN Contivity client waits between VPN connection checks.
Specifies the maximum number of retransmissions (0~255) of the keep-alive packets. This is how many times the VPN Contivity client can resend the keep-alive packet to the BCM50a Integrated
Router to check the connection before attempting to use the first fail-over gateway.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
250 Chapter 13 VPN
Table 62 VPN Client Termination advanced
Label Description
Accept ISAKMP Initial
Contact Payload
The BCM50a Integrated Router can accept the
INITIAL-CONTACT status messages to inform it that the Contivity
VPN client is establishing a first SA. The BCM50a Integrated
Router then deletes the existing SAs because it assumes that the sending Contivity VPN client has restarted and no longer has access to any of the existing SAs.
Idle Timeout Specifies how long the Contivity VPN client connection can go without traffic before the BCM50a Integrated Router terminates the session. The BCM50a Integrated Router does not time out idle connections when this field is set to 00:00:00.
Domain Name
Primary DNS
Secondary DNS
Primary WINS
Secondary WINS
Specifies the domain name that is used while the VPN tunnel is connected.
Specifies the first and second DNS server IP addresses to assign to the Contivity VPN clients.
Specifies the first and second WINS server IP addresses to assign to the Contivity VPN clients.
Client Minimum
Version Requirement
Selects the lowest version of Contivity VPN client software that you require the clients to use.
Action Specifies what the BCM50a Integrated Router does when it detects a noncompliant version of Contivity VPN client software.
Select None to allow the VPN tunnel without displaying any messages to tell the user where to download the required version of the Contivity VPN client software.
Select Send Message to allow the VPN tunnel, but display a message to tell the user where to download the required version of the Contivity VPN client software.
Select Send Message and Force Logoff to disconnect the VPN tunnel and display a message to tell the user where to download the required version of the Contivity VPN client software.
Message
Display Banner
Banner
Allow Password
Storage on Client
Enter a message that tells where to download the required version of the Contivity VPN client software. Use from 1 to 255
ASCII characters.
Select Enabled to have the BCM50a Integrated Router show the
Contivity VPN client users a message across the top of the screen after they log on.
Enter the message (such as the name of your company) that you want to show at the top of the Contivity VPN client users’ screens after they log on. Use from 1 to 255 ASCII characters.
Use this to let the Contivity VPN clients save their logon passwords instead of always having to enter them manually.
N0115790
Chapter 13 VPN 251
Table 62 VPN Client Termination advanced
Label
Password
Management
Alpha-Numeric
Password Required
Maximum Password
Age
Minimum Password
Length
Apply
Reset
Description
You can have the BCM50a Integrated Router use some password requirements to enhance security.
Use this to have the BCM50a Integrated Router require the
Contivity VPN client passwords to have both numbers and letters.
Enter the maximum number of days that a Contivity VPN client can use a password before it has to be changed. 0 means that a password never expires.
Enter the minimum number of characters that can be used for a
Contivity VPN client password.
Click Apply to save your changes to the BCM50a Integrated
Router.
Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
252 Chapter 13 VPN
N0115790
Chapter 14
Certificates
This chapter gives background information about public-key certificates and explains how to use them.
253
Certificates overview
The BCM50a Integrated Router can use certificates (also called digital IDs) to authenticate users. Certificates are based on public-private key pairs. A certificate contains the identity and public key of the certificate owner. Certificates provide a way to exchange public keys for use in authentication.
A Certification Authority (CA) issues certificates and guarantees the identity of each certificate owner. There are commercial certification authorities like
CyberTrust or VeriSign and government certification authorities. You can use the
BCM50a Integrated Router to generate certification requests that contain identifying information and public keys and then send the certification requests to a certification authority.
In public-key encryption and decryption, each host has two keys. One key is public and can be made openly available; the other key is private and must be kept secure. Public-key encryption in general works as follows.
1 Tim wants to send a private message to Jenny. Tim generates a public key pair. What is encrypted with one key can only be decrypted using the other.
2 Tim keeps the private key and makes the public key openly available.
3 Tim uses his private key to encrypt the message and sends it to Jenny.
4 Jenny receives the message and uses Tim’s public key to decrypt it.
5 Additionally, Jenny uses her own private key to encrypt a message and Tim uses Jenny’s public key to decrypt the message.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
254 Chapter 14 Certificates
The BCM50a Integrated Router uses certificates based on public-key cryptology to authenticate users attempting to establish a connection, not to encrypt the data that is sent after establishing a connection. The method used to secure the data that is sent through an established connection depends on the type of connection. For example, a VPN tunnel can use the triple DES encryption algorithm.
The certification authority uses its private key to sign certificates. Anyone can use the certification authority’s public key to verify the certificates.
A certification path is the hierarchy of certification authority certificates that validate a certificate. The BCM50a Integrated Router does not trust a certificate if any certificate on its path has expired or been revoked.
Certification authorities maintain directory servers with databases of valid and revoked certificates. A directory of certificates that have been revoked before the scheduled expiration is called a CRL (Certificate Revocation List). The BCM50a
Integrated Router can check a peer’s certificate against a list of revoked certificates on a directory server. The framework of servers, software, procedures, and policies that handles keys is called PKI (public-key infrastructure).
Advantages of certificates
Certificates offer the following benefits:
• The BCM50a Integrated Router only has to store the certificates of the certification authorities that you decide to trust, no matter how many devices you need to authenticate.
• Key distribution is simple and very secure because you can freely distribute public keys and you never need to transmit private keys.
Self-signed certificates
Until public-key infrastructure becomes more mature, it is not available in some areas. You can have the BCM50a Integrated Router act as a certification authority and sign its own certificates.
N0115790
Chapter 14 Certificates 255
Configuration summary
This section summarizes how to manage certificates on the BCM50a Integrated
Router.
Figure 81 Certificate configuration overview
Use the My Certificate screens to generate and export self-signed certificates or certification requests and import the CA-signed certificates.
Use the Trusted CA screens to save CA certificates to the BCM50a Integrated
Router.
Use the Trusted Remote Hosts screens to import self-signed certificates.
Use the Directory Servers screen to configure a list of addresses of directory servers (that contain lists of valid and revoked certificates).
My Certificates
Click CERTIFICATES, My Certificates to open summary list of certificates and certification requests stored on the BCM50a Integrated Router. Certificates
display in black and certification requests display in gray, as shown in Figure 82 .
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
256 Chapter 14 Certificates
Figure 82 My Certificates
N0115790
Chapter 14 Certificates 257
describes the labels in Figure 82 .
Table 63 My Certificates
Label
PKI Storage
Space in Use
Replace
#
Name
Type
Subject
Issuer
Valid From
Valid To
Description
This bar displays the percentage of the PKI storage space that is currently in use. The bar turns from green to red when the maximum is being approached. When the bar is red, consider deleting expired or unnecessary certificates before adding more certificates.
This button displays when the BCM50a Integrated Router has the factory default certificate. The factory default certificate is common to all
BCM50a Integrated Routers that use certificates. Nortel recommends that you use this button to replace the factory default certificate with one that uses your BCM50a Integrated Router's MAC address.
This field displays the certificate index number. The certificates are listed in alphabetical order.
This field displays the name used to identify this certificate. Nortel recommends that you give each certificate a unique name.
This field displays what kind of certificate this is.
REQ represents a certification request and is not yet a valid certificate.
Send a certification request to a certification authority, which then issues a certificate. Use the My Certificate Import screen to import the certificate and replace the request.
SELF represents a self-signed certificate.
*SELF represents the default self-signed certificate, which the BCM50a
Integrated Router uses to sign imported trusted remote host certificates.
CERT represents a certificate issued by a certification authority.
This field displays identifying information about the owner of the certificate, such as CN (Common Name), OU (Organizational Unit or department), O (Organization or company) and C (Country). Nortel recommends that each certificate have unique subject information.
This field displays identifying information about the certification authority that issued the certificate, such as a common name, organizational unit or department, organization, or company and country. With self-signed certificates, this is the same information as in the Subject field.
This field displays the date that the certificate becomes applicable. The text displays in red and includes a Not Yet Valid! message if the certificate has not yet become applicable.
This field displays the date that the certificate expires. The text displays in red and includes an Expiring! or Expired! message if the certificate is about to expire or has already expired.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
258 Chapter 14 Certificates
Table 63 My Certificates
Label
Modify
Import
Create
Refresh
Description
Click the details icon to open a screen with an in-depth list of information about the certificate.
Click the delete icon to remove the certificate. A window displays, asking you to confirm that you want to delete the certificate.
You cannot delete a certificate that one or more features are configured to use.
Do the following to delete a certificate that shows *SELF in the Type field.
1. Make sure that no other features, such as HTTPS, VPN, or SSH are configured to use the *SELF certificate.
2. Click the details icon next to another self-signed certificate (see the description on the Create button if you need to create a self-signed certificate).
3. Select the Default self-signed certificate which signs the
imported remote host certificates check box.
4. Click Apply to save the changes and return to the My Certificates screen.
5. The certificate that originally showed *SELF displays SELF and you can delete it now.
Note that subsequent certificates move up by one when you take this action.
Click Import to open a screen where you can save the certificate that you have enrolled from a certification authority from your computer to the BCM50a Integrated Router.
Click Create to go to the screen where you can have the BCM50a
Integrated Router generate a certificate or a certification request.
Click Refresh to display the current validity status of the certificates.
Certificate file formats
The certification authority certificate that you want to import has to be in one of these file formats:
• Binary X.509: This is an ITU-T recommendation that defines the formats for
X.509 certificates.
• PEM (Base-64) encoded X.509: This Privacy Enhanced Mail format uses 64
ASCII characters to convert a binary X.509 certificate into a printable form.
N0115790
Chapter 14 Certificates 259
• Binary PKCS#7: This is a standard that defines the general syntax for data
(including digital signatures) that can be encrypted. The BCM50a Integrated
Router currently allows the importation of a PKS#7 file that contains a single certificate.
• PEM (Base-64) encoded PKCS#7: This Privacy Enhanced Mail (PEM) format uses 64 ASCII characters to convert a binary PKCS#7 certificate into a printable form.
Importing a certificate
Click CERTIFICATES, My Certificates and then Import to open the My
Certificate Import screen. Follow the instructions on the screen shown in
Figure 83 to save an existing certificate to the BCM50a Integrated Router.
Note: 1. You can only import a certificate that matches a corresponding certification request generated by the BCM50a
Integrated Router.
Note: 2. The certificate you import replaces the corresponding request in the My Certificates screen.
Note: 3. You must remove any spaces from the certificate filename before you can import it.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
260 Chapter 14 Certificates
Figure 83 My Certificate Import
N0115790
Table 64 describes the labels in Figure 83 .
Table 64 My Certificate Import
Label Description
File Path Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse to find it.
Apply Click Apply to save the certificate to the BCM50a Integrated Router.
Cancel Click Cancel to quit and return to the My Certificates screen.
Chapter 14 Certificates 261
Creating a certificate
Click CERTIFICATES, My Certificates and then Create to open the My
Certificate Create screen. Use this screen to have the BCM50a Integrated Router create a self-signed certificate, enroll a certificate with a certification authority, or
generate a certification request. For more information, see Figure 84 .
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
262 Chapter 14 Certificates
Figure 84 My Certificate create
N0115790
Chapter 14 Certificates 263
Table 65 describes the labels in the
.
Table 65 My Certificate create
Label Description
Certificate Name Type up to 31 ASCII characters (not including spaces) to identify this certificate.
Subject Information Use these fields to record information that identifies the owner of the certificate. You do not have to fill in every field, although the
Common Name is mandatory. The certification authority can add fields (such as a serial number) to the subject information when it issues a certificate. Nortel recommends that each certificate have unique subject information.
Common Name Select a radio button to identify the owner of the certificate by IP address, domain name, or e-mail address. Type the IP address (in dotted decimal notation), domain name, or e-mail address in the field provided. The domain name or e-mail address can be up to 31
ASCII characters. The domain name or e-mail address is for identification purposes only and can be any string.
Organizational Unit Type up to 127 characters to identify the organizational unit or department to which the certificate owner belongs. You can use any character, including spaces, but the BCM50a Integrated Router drops trailing spaces.
Organization Type up to 127 characters to identify the company or group to which the certificate owner belongs. You can use any character, including spaces, but the BCM50a Integrated Router drops trailing spaces.
Country
Key Length
Type up to 127 characters to identify the nation where the certificate owner is located. You can use any character, including spaces, but the BCM50a Integrated Router drops trailing spaces.
Select a number from the drop-down list to determine how many bits are used for the key (512 to 2 048). The longer the key, the more secure it is. A longer key also uses more PKI storage space.
Enrollment Options These radio buttons deal with how and when the certificate is to be generated.
Create a self-signed certificate
Select Create a self-signed certificate to have the BCM50a
Integrated Router generate the certificate and act as the Certification
Authority (CA) itself. This way you do not need to apply to a certification authority for certificates.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
264 Chapter 14 Certificates
Table 65 My Certificate create
Label Description
Create a certification request and save it locally for later manual enrollment
Select Create a certification request and save it locally for later
manual enrollment to have the BCM50a Integrated Router generate and store a request for a certificate. Use the My
Certificate Details screen to view the certification request and copy it to send to the certification authority.
Copy the certification request from the My Certificate Details screen (see
“My Certificate details” on page 265
) and then send it to the certification authority.
Create a certification request and enroll for a certificate immediately online
Select Create a certification request and enroll for a certificate
immediately online to have the BCM50a Integrated Router generate a request for a certificate and apply to a certification authority for a certificate.
You must have the certification authority certificate already imported in the Trusted CAs screen.
When you select this option, you must select the certification authority enrollment protocol and the certification authority certificate from the drop-down list and enter the certification authority server address (or URL). You also need to fill in the Reference Number and Key if the certification authority requires it.
Enrollment
Protocol
CA Server Address Enter the IP address (or URL) of the certification authority server.
CA Certificate Select the certification authority certificate from the CA Certificate drop-down list.
You must have the certification authority certificate already imported in the Trusted CAs screen. Click Trusted CAs to go to the Trusted
CAs screen where you can view (and manage) the BCM50a
Integrated Router's list of certificates of trusted certification authorities.
Request
Authentication
Select the certification authority enrollment protocol from the drop-down list.
Simple Certificate Enrollment Protocol (SCEP) is a TCP-based enrollment protocol that was developed by VeriSign and Cisco.
Certificate Management Protocol (CMP) is a TCP-based enrollment protocol that was developed by the Public Key
Infrastructure X.509 working group of the Internet Engineering Task
Force (IETF) and is specified in RFC 2510.
Key
When you select Create a certification request and enroll for a
certificate immediately online, the certification authority can require you to include a reference number and key to identify you when you send a certification request. Fill in both the Reference
Number and the Key fields if your certification authority uses CMP enrollment protocol. Just fill in the Key field if your certification authority uses the SCEP enrollment protocol.
Type the key that the certification authority gave you.
N0115790
Chapter 14 Certificates 265
Table 65 My Certificate create
Label
Apply
Cancel
Description
Click Apply to begin certificate or certification request generation.
Click Cancel to quit and return to the My Certificates screen.
After you click Apply in the My Certificate Create screen, you see a screen that tells you the BCM50a Integrated Router is generating the self-signed certificate or certification request.
After the BCM50a Integrated Router successfully enrolls a certificate or generates a certification request or a self-signed certificate, you see a screen with a Return button that takes you back to the My Certificates screen.
If you configured the My Certificate Create screen to have the BCM50a
Integrated Router enroll a certificate and the certificate enrollment is not successful, you see a screen with a Return button that takes you back to the My
Certificate Create screen. Click Return and check your information in the My
Certificate Create screen. Make sure that the certification authority information is correct and that your Internet connection is working properly if you want the
BCM50a Integrated Router to enroll a certificate online.
My Certificate details
Click CERTIFICATES, and then My Certificates to open the My Certificates screen (see
). Click the details icon to open the My Certificate Details screen. You can use this screen (see
Figure 85 ) to view in-depth certificate
information and change the name of the certificate. In the case of a self-signed certificate, you can set it to be the one that the BCM50a Integrated Router uses to sign the trusted remote host certificates that you import to the BCM50a Integrated
Router.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
266 Chapter 14 Certificates
Figure 85 My Certificate details
N0115790
Chapter 14 Certificates 267
describes the labels in Figure 85 .
Table 66 My Certificate details
Label Description
Name
Property
Default self-signed certificate that signs the imported remote host certificates.
This field displays the identifying name of this certificate. If you want to change the name, type up to 31 characters to identify this certificate.
You can use any character (not including spaces).
Select this check box to have the BCM50a Integrated Router use this certificate to sign the trusted remote host certificates that you import to the BCM50a Integrated Router. This check box is only available with self-signed certificates.
If this check box is already selected, you cannot clear it in this screen, you must select this check box in the details screen of another self-signed certificate. This automatically clears the check box in the details screen of the certificate that was previously set to sign the imported trusted remote host certificates.
Certification Path Click the Refresh button to have this read-only text box display the hierarchy of certification authorities that validate the certificate (and the certificate itself).
If the issuing certification authority is one that you have imported as a trusted certification authority, it can be the only certification authority in the list (along with the certificate itself). If the certificate is a self-signed certificate, the certificate itself is the only one in the list. The BCM50a
Integrated Router does not trust the certificate and displays “Not trusted” in this field if any certificate on the path has expired or been revoked.
Refresh Click Refresh to display the certification path.
Certificate
Information
Type
Version
Serial Number
Subject
These read-only fields display detailed information about the certificate.
This field displays general information about the certificate. CA-signed means that a Certification Authority signed the certificate. Self-signed means that the owner of the certificate signed the certificate (not a certification authority). “X.509” means that this certificate was created and signed according to the ITU-T X.509 recommendation that defines the formats for public-key certificates.
This field displays the X.509 version number.
This field displays the identification number of the certificate given by the certification authority or generated by the BCM50a Integrated
Router.
This field displays information that identifies the owner of the certificate, such as Common Name (CN), Organizational Unit (OU),
Organization (O) or Country (C).
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
268 Chapter 14 Certificates
Table 66 My Certificate details
Label Description
Issuer
Signature
Algorithm
Valid From
This field displays identifying information about the certification authority that issued the certificate, such as Common Name,
Organizational Unit, Organization or Country.
With self-signed certificates, this is the same as the Subject Name field.
This field displays the type of algorithm that was used to sign the certificate. The BCM50a Integrated Router uses rsa-pkcs1-sha1 (RSA public-private key encryption algorithm and the SHA1 hash algorithm).
Some certification authorities can use rsa-pkcs1-md5 (RSA public-private key encryption algorithm and the MD5 hash algorithm).
This field displays the date that the certificate becomes applicable.
The text displays in red and includes a Not Yet Valid! message if the certificate has not yet become applicable.
Valid To
Key Algorithm
This field displays the date that the certificate expires. The text displays in red and includes an Expiring! or Expired! message if the certificate is about to expire or has already expired.
This field displays the type of algorithm that was used to generate the key pair (the BCM50a Integrated Router uses RSA encryption) of the certificate and the length of the key set in bits (1 024 bits for example).
This field displays the certificate owner‘s IP address (IP), domain name (DNS) or e-mail address (EMAIL).
Subject
Alternative Name
Key Usage This field displays for what functions the key of the certificate can be used. For example, “DigitalSignature” means that the key can be used to sign certificates and “KeyEncipherment” means that the key can be used to encrypt text.
Basic Constraint This field displays general information about the certificate. For example, Subject Type=CA means that this is a certification authority certificate and “Path Length Constraint=1” means that there can only be one certification authority in the certification path of the certificate.
MD5 Fingerprint This is the message digest of the certificate that the BCM50a
Integrated Router calculated using the MD5 algorithm.
SHA1 Fingerprint This is the message digest of the certificate that the BCM50a
Integrated Router calculated using the SHA1 algorithm.
N0115790
Chapter 14 Certificates 269
Table 66 My Certificate details
Label Description
Certificate in
PEM (Base-64)
Encoded Format
Export
Apply
Cancel
This read-only text box displays the certificate or certification request in Privacy Enhanced Mail (PEM) format. PEM uses 64 ASCII characters to convert the binary certificate into a printable form.
You can copy and paste a certification request into a certification authority Web page, an e-mail that you send to the certification authority or a text editor and save the file on a management computer for later manual enrollment.
You can copy and paste a certificate into an e-mail to send to friends or colleagues or you can copy and paste a certificate into a text editor and save the file on a management computer for later distribution
(through floppy disk, for example).
Click this button and then Save in the File Download screen. The
Save As screen displays, browse to the location that you want to use and click Save.
Click Apply to save your changes to the BCM50a Integrated Router.
You can only change the name, except in the case of a self-signed certificate, which you can also set to be the default self-signed certificate that signs the imported trusted remote host certificates.
Click Cancel to quit and return to the My Certificates screen.
Trusted CAs
Click CERTIFICATES, Trusted CAs to open the Trusted CAs screen, shown
in Figure 86 . This screen displays a summary list of certificates of the certification
authorities that you have set the BCM50a Integrated Router to accept as trusted.
The BCM50a Integrated Router accepts any valid certificate signed by a certification authority on this list as being trustworthy; thus you do not need to import any certificate that is signed by one of these certification authorities.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
270 Chapter 14 Certificates
Figure 86 Trusted CAs
N0115790
Table 67 describes the labels in Figure 86 .
Table 67 Trusted CAs
Label
PKI Storage Space in Use
#
Name
Subject
Description
This bar displays the percentage of the PKI storage space that is currently in use. The bar turns from green to red when the maximum is approached. When the bar is red, consider deleting expired or unnecessary certificates before adding more certificates.
This field displays the certificate index number. The certificates are listed in alphabetical order.
This field displays the name used to identify this certificate.
This field displays identifying information about the owner of the, such as CN (Common Name), OU (Organizational Unit or department), O (Organization or company) or C (Country). Nortel recommends that each certificate have unique subject information.
Chapter 14 Certificates 271
Table 67 Trusted CAs
Label
Issuer
Valid From
Valid To
CRL Issuer
Modify
Import
Refresh
Description
This field displays identifying information about the certification authority that issued the certificate, such as a common name, organizational unit or department, organization, or company and country. With self-signed certificates, this is the same information as in the Subject field.
This field displays the date that the certificate becomes applicable.
The text displays in red and includes a Not Yet Valid! message if the certificate has not yet become applicable.
This field displays the date that the certificate expires. The text displays in red and includes an Expiring! or Expired! message if the certificate is about to expire or has already expired.
This field displays Yes if the certification authority issues
Certificate Revocation Lists for the certificates that it has issued and you have selected the Issues certificate revocation lists
(CRL) check box in the certificate details screen to have the
BCM50a Integrated Router check the CRL before trusting any certificates issued by the certification authority. Otherwise the field displays “No”.
Click the details icon to open a screen with an in-depth list of information about the certificate.
Click the delete icon to remove the certificate. A window appears asking you to confirm that you want to delete the certificates. Note that subsequent certificates move up by one when you take this action. You cannot delete a certificate that is currently in use.
Click Import to open a screen where you can save the certificate of a certification authority that you trust, from your computer to the
BCM50a Integrated Router.
Click this button to display the current validity status of the certificates.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
272 Chapter 14 Certificates
Importing a Trusted CA certificate
Click CERTIFICATES, Trusted CAs to open the Trusted CAs screen and then
click Import to open the Trusted CA Import screen, shown in Figure 87 . Follow
the instructions in this screen to save a trusted certification authority certificate to the BCM50a Integrated Router.
Note: You must remove any spaces from the certificate filename before you can import the certificate.
Figure 87 Trusted CA import
N0115790
Table 68 describes the labels in Figure 87 .
Table 68 Trusted CA import
Label
File Path
Description
Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click
Browse to find it.
Chapter 14 Certificates 273
Table 68 Trusted CA import
Label
Apply
Cancel
Description
Click Apply to save the certificate on the BCM50a Integrated Router.
Click Cancel to quit and return to the Trusted CAs screen.
Trusted CA Certificate details
Click CERTIFICATES, Trusted CAs to open the Trusted CAs screen. Click
the details icon to open the Trusted CA Details screen, shown in Figure 88 . Use
this screen to view in-depth information about the certification authority certificate, change the certificate name, and set whether or not you want the
BCM50a Integrated Router to check a certification authority list of revoked certificates before trusting a certificate issued by the certification authority.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
274 Chapter 14 Certificates
Figure 88 Trusted CA details
N0115790
Chapter 14 Certificates 275
describes the labels in Figure 88 .
Table 69 Trusted CA details
Label Description
Name This field displays the identifying name of this certificate. If you want to change the name, type up to 31 characters to identify this key certificate. You can use any character (not including spaces).
Property
Check incoming certificates issued by this CA against a CRL
Select this check box to have the BCM50a Integrated Router check incoming certificates that are issued by this certification authority against a Certificate Revocation List (CRL).
Clear this check box to have the BCM50a Integrated Router not check incoming certificates that are issued by this certification authority against a Certificate Revocation List (CRL).
Certification Path Click the Refresh button to have this read-only text box display the certificate of the end entity and a list of certification authority certificates that shows the hierarchy of certification authorities that validate the end entity certificate. If the issuing certification authority is one that you have imported as a trusted certification authority, it can be the only certification authority in the list (along with the certificate of the end entity). The BCM50a Integrated Router does not trust the end entity certificate and displays “Not trusted” in this field if any certificate on the path has expired or been revoked.
Refresh
Certificate
Information
Type
Click Refresh to display the certification path.
These read-only fields display detailed information about the certificate.
This field displays general information about the certificate.
CA-signed means that a Certification Authority signed the certificate.
Self-signed means that the owner of the certificate signed the certificate (not a certification authority). X.509 means that this certificate was created and signed according to the ITU-T X.509 recommendation that defines the formats for public-key certificates.
Version
Serial Number
Subject
Issuer
This field displays the X.509 version number.
This field displays the certificate identification number given by the certification authority.
This field displays information that identifies the owner of the certificate, such as Common Name (CN), Organizational Unit (OU),
Organization (O), or Country (C).
This field displays identifying information about the certification authority that issued the certificate, such as Common Name,
Organizational Unit, Organization or Country.
With self-signed certificates, this is the same information as in the
Subject Name field.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
276 Chapter 14 Certificates
Table 69 Trusted CA details
Label Description
Signature
Algorithm
Valid From
Valid To
Key Algorithm
This field displays the type of algorithm that was used to sign the certificate. Some certification authorities use rsa-pkcs1-sha1 (RSA public-private key encryption algorithm and the SHA1 hash algorithm). Other certification authorities can use rsa-pkcs1-md5
(RSA public-private key encryption algorithm and the MD5 hash algorithm).
This field displays the date that the certificate becomes applicable.
The text displays in red and includes a Not Yet Valid! message if the certificate has not yet become applicable.
This field displays the date that the certificate expires. The text displays in red and includes an Expiring! or Expired! message if the certificate is about to expire or has already expired.
This field displays the type of algorithm that was used to generate the certificate key pair (the BCM50a Integrated Router uses RSA encryption) and the length of the key set in bits (1 024-bits, for example).
Subject
Alternative Name
Key Usage
This (optional) field displays the IP address (IP), domain name (DNS), or e-mail address (EMAIL) of the owner of the certificate.
This field displays for what functions the certificate key can be used.
For example, “DigitalSignature” means that the key can be used to sign certificates and “KeyEncipherment” means that the key can be used to encrypt text.
Basic Constraint This field displays general information about the certificate. For example, Subject Type=CA means that this is a certification authority certificate and “Path Length Constraint=1” means that there can only be one certification authority in the certification path.
CRL Distribution
Points
This field displays how many directory servers with Lists of revoked certificates the issuing certification authority of this certificate makes available. This field also displays the domain names or IP addresses of the servers.
MD5 Fingerprint This is the message digest of the certificate that the BCM50a
Integrated Router calculated using the MD5 algorithm. You can use this value to verify with the certification authority (over the phone, for example) that this is actually a valid certificate.
SHA1 Fingerprint This is the message digest of the certificate that the BCM50a
Integrated Router calculated using the SHA1 algorithm. You can use this value to verify with the certification authority (over the phone, for example) that this is actually a valid certificate.
N0115790
Chapter 14 Certificates 277
Table 69 Trusted CA details
Label Description
Certificate in PEM
(Base-64)
Encoded Format
This read-only text box displays the certificate or certification request in Privacy Enhanced Mail (PEM) format. PEM uses 64 ASCII characters to convert the binary certificate into a printable form.
You can copy and paste the certificate into an e-mail to send to friends or colleagues or you can copy and paste the certificate into a text editor and save the file on a management computer for later distribution (through floppy disk for example).
Export
Apply
Cancel
Click this button and then Save in the File Download screen. The
Save As screen displays, browse to the location that you want to use and click Save.
Click Apply to save your changes to the BCM50a Integrated Router.
You can only apply changes to the name, set the BCM50a Integrated
Router to check the CRL issued by the certification authority before trusting a certificate issued, or both.
Click Cancel to quit and return to the Trusted CAs screen.
Trusted remote hosts
Click CERTIFICATES, Trusted Remote Hosts to open the Trusted Remote
Hosts screen (see
Figure 89 ). This screen displays a list of the certificates of peers
that you trust but which are not signed by one of the certification authorities on the
Trusted CAs screen.
You do not need to add any certificate that is signed by one of the certification authorities on the Trusted CAs screen because the BCM50a Integrated Router automatically accepts any valid certificate signed by a trusted certification authority as being trustworthy.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
278 Chapter 14 Certificates
Figure 89 Trusted remote hosts
N0115790
Table 70 describes the labels in Figure 89 .
Table 70 Trusted Remote Hosts
Label
PKI Storage
Space in Use
Issuer (My
Default
Self-signed
Certificate)
#
Description
This bar displays the percentage of the PKI storage space that is currently in use. The bar turns from green to red when the maximum is approached. When the bar is red, consider deleting expired or unnecessary certificates before adding more certificates.
This field displays identifying information about the default self-signed certificate on the BCM50a Integrated Router that the BCM50a
Integrated Router uses to sign the trusted remote host certificates.
Name
Subject
This field displays the certificate index number. The certificates are listed in alphabetical order.
This field displays the name used to identify this certificate.
This field displays identifying information about the owner of the certificate, such as CN (Common Name), OU (Organizational Unit or department), O (Organization or company), or C (Country). Nortel recommends that each certificate have unique subject information.
Chapter 14 Certificates 279
Table 70 Trusted Remote Hosts
Label
Valid From
Valid To
Modify
Import
Refresh
Description
This field displays the date that the certificate becomes applicable. The text displays in red and includes a Not Yet Valid! message if the certificate has not yet become applicable.
This field displays the date that the certificate expires. The text displays in red and includes an Expiring! or Expired! message if the certificate is about to expire or has already expired.
Click the details icon to open a screen with an in-depth list of information about the certificate.
Click the delete icon to remove the certificate. A window displays asking you to confirm that you want to delete the certificate. Note that subsequent certificates move up by one when you take this action. You cannot delete a certificate that is currently in use.
Click Import to open a screen where you can save the certificate of a remote host (which you trust) from your computer to the BCM50a
Integrated Router.
Click this button to display the current validity status of the certificates.
Verifying a certificate of a trusted remote host
Certificates issued by certification authorities have the signature of the certification authority for you to check. Self-signed certificates only have the signature of the host itself. This means that you must be very careful when deciding to import (and thereby trust) the self-signed certificate of a remote host.
Trusted remote host certificate fingerprints
Certificate fingerprints are message digests calculated using the MD5 or SHA1 algorithms. The following procedure describes how to use a certificate fingerprint to verify that you have the remote host’s actual certificate.
1 Browse to where you have the remote host’s certificate saved on your computer.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
280 Chapter 14 Certificates
2 Make sure that the certificate has a “.cer” or “.crt” file name extension.
Figure 90 Remote host certificates
3 Double-click the certificate icon to open the Certificate window. Click the
Details tab and scroll down to the Thumbprint Algorithm and Thumbprint fields.
Figure 91 Certificate details
N0115790
Verify (over the phone, for example) that the remote host has the same information in the Thumbprint Algorithm and Thumbprint fields.
Chapter 14 Certificates 281
Importing a certificate of a trusted remote host
Click CERTIFICATES, Trusted Remote Hosts to open the Trusted Remote
Hosts screen and then click Import to open the Trusted Remote Host Import screen. Follow the instructions in this screen to save a trusted host certificate to
the BCM50a Integrated Router, see Figure 92 .
Note: The trusted remote host certificate must be a self-signed certificate; and you must remove any spaces from its file name before you can import it.
Figure 92 Trusted remote host import
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
282 Chapter 14 Certificates
describes the labels in Figure 92 .
Table 71 Trusted remote host import
Label Description
File Path Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse to find it.
Apply Click Apply to save the certificate on the BCM50a Integrated Router.
Cancel Click Cancel to quit and return to the Trusted Remote Hosts screen.
Trusted remote host certificate details
Click CERTIFICATES, Trusted Remote Hosts to open the Trusted Remote
Hosts screen. Click the details icon to open the Trusted Remote Host Details screen. You can use this screen to view in-depth information about the trusted remote host certificate and change the certificate name.
N0115790
Figure 93 Trusted remote host details
Chapter 14 Certificates 283
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
284 Chapter 14 Certificates
describes the labels in Figure 93 .
Table 72 Trusted remote host details
Label Description
Name This field displays the identifying name of this certificate. If you want to change the name, type up to 31 characters to identify this key certificate. You can use any character (not including spaces).
Certification Path Click the Refresh button to have this read-only text box display the end entity’s own certificate and a list of certification authority certificates in the hierarchy of certification authorities that validate a the certification authority that issued the certificate. For a trusted host, the list consists of the certificate of the end entity and the default self-signed certificate that the BCM50a Integrated Router uses to sign remote host certificates. Since the BCM50a Integrated
Router considers its own self-signed certificate to be a certification authority, the chain of certificates is complete and the BCM50a
Integrated Router trusts the certificate.
Refresh
Certificate
Information
Type
Version
Click Refresh to display the certification path.
These read-only fields display detailed information about the certificate.
This field displays general information about the certificate. With trusted remote host certificates, this field always displays CA-signed.
The BCM50a Integrated Router is the Certification Authority that signed the certificate. X.509 means that this certificate was created and signed according to the ITU-T X.509 recommendation that defines the formats for public-key certificates.
This field displays the X.509 version number.
Serial Number
Subject
Issuer
Signature
Algorithm
Valid From
This field displays the certificate identification number given by the device that created the certificate.
This field displays information that identifies the owner of the certificate, such as Common Name (CN), Organizational Unit (OU),
Organization (O), or Country (C).
This field displays identifying information about the default self-signed certificate on the BCM50a Integrated Router that the
BCM50a Integrated Router uses to sign the trusted remote host certificates.
This field displays the type of algorithm that the BCM50a Integrated
Router used to sign the certificate, which is rsa-pkcs1-sha1 (RSA public-private key encryption algorithm and the SHA1 hash algorithm).
This field displays the date that the certificate becomes applicable.
The text displays in red and includes a Not Yet Valid! message if the certificate has not yet become applicable.
N0115790
Chapter 14 Certificates 285
Table 72 Trusted remote host details
Label Description
Valid To
Key Algorithm
This field displays the date that the certificate expires. The text displays in red and includes an Expiring! or Expired! message if the certificate is about to expire or has already expired.
This field displays the type of algorithm that was used to generate the certificate key pair (the BCM50a Integrated Router uses RSA encryption) and the length of the key set in bits (1 024-bits, for example).
Subject Alternative
Name
This (optional) field displays the certificate owner‘s IP address (IP), domain name (DNS), or e-mail address (EMAIL).
Key Usage This field displays for what functions the certificate key can be used.
For example, DigitalSignature means that the key can be used to sign certificates and KeyEncipherment means that the key can be used to encrypt text.
Basic Constraint This field displays general information about the certificate. For example, Subject Type=CA means that this is a certification authority certificate and Path Length Constraint=1 means that there can only be one certification authority in the certification path of the certificate.
MD5 Fingerprint This is the message digest of the certificate that the BCM50a
Integrated Router calculated using the MD5 algorithm. You cannot use this value to verify that this is the remote host’s actual certificate because the BCM50a Integrated Router has signed the certificate; thus causing this value to be different from that of the remote host’s
SHA1 Fingerprint This is the message digest of the certificate that the BCM50a
Integrated Router calculated using the SHA1 algorithm. You cannot use this value to verify that this is the remote host’s actual certificate because the BCM50a Integrated Router has signed the certificate; thus causing this value to be different from that of the remote host’s
Certificate in PEM
(Base-64)
Encoded Format
This read-only text box displays the certificate or certification request in Privacy Enhanced Mail (PEM) format. PEM uses 64 ASCII characters to convert the binary certificate into a printable form.
You can copy and paste the certificate into an e-mail to send to friends or colleagues or you can copy and paste the certificate into a text editor and save the file on a management computer for later distribution (through floppy disk for example).
Export Click this button and then Save in the File Download screen. The
Save As screen displays. Browse to the location that you want to use and click Save.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
286 Chapter 14 Certificates
Table 72 Trusted remote host details
Label
Apply
Cancel
Description
Click Apply to save your changes to the BCM50a Integrated Router.
You can only change the name of the certificate.
Click Cancel to quit configuring this screen and return to the Trusted
Remote Hosts screen.
Directory servers
Click CERTIFICATES, Directory Servers to open the Directory Servers screen (
). This screen displays a summary list of directory servers (that contain lists of valid and revoked certificates) that have been saved into the
BCM50a Integrated Router. If you decide to have the BCM50a Integrated Router check incoming certificates against the issuing certification authority’s list of revoked certificates, the BCM50a Integrated Router first checks the servers listed in the CRL Distribution Points field of the incoming certificate. If the certificate does not list a server or the listed server is not available, the BCM50a Integrated
Router checks the servers listed here.
Figure 94 Directory servers
N0115790
Chapter 14 Certificates 287
describes the labels in Figure 94 .
Table 73 Directory Servers
Label
PKI Storage
Space in Use
#
Name
Address
Port
Protocol
Modify
Add
Description
This bar displays the percentage of the PKI storage space that is currently in use. The bar turns from green to red when the maximum is approached. When the bar is red, consider deleting expired or unnecessary certificates before adding more certificates.
The index number of the directory server. The servers are listed in alphabetical order.
This field displays the name used to identify this directory server.
This field displays the IP address or domain name of the directory server.
This field displays the port number that the directory server uses.
This field displays the protocol that the directory server uses.
Click the details icon to open a screen where you can change the information about the directory server.
Click the delete icon to remove the directory server entry. A window displays asking you to confirm that you want to delete the directory server. Note that subsequent certificates move up by one when you take this action. You cannot delete a certificate that is currently in use.
Click Add to open a screen where you can configure information about a directory server so that the BCM50a Integrated Router can access it.
Add or edit a directory server
Click CERTIFICATES, Directory Servers to open the Directory Servers
screen. Click Add (or the details icon) to display the screen shown in Figure 95
.
Use this screen to configure information about a directory server that the BCM50a
Integrated Router can access.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
288 Chapter 14 Certificates
Figure 95 Directory server add
N0115790
Table 74 describes the labels in Figure 95 .
Table 74 Directory server add
Label Description
Directory Service Setting
Name Type up to 31 ASCII characters (spaces are not permitted) to identify this directory server.
Access Protocol Use the drop-down list to select the access protocol used by the directory server.
LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) is a protocol over TCP that specifies how clients access directories certificates and lists of revoked certificates.
1
Server Address Type the IP address (in dotted decimal notation) or the domain name of the directory server.
Chapter 14 Certificates 289
Table 74 Directory server add
Label Description
Server Port This field displays the default server port number of the protocol that you select in the Access Protocol field.
You can change the server port number if needed, however, you must use the same server port number that the directory server uses.
The default server port number for LDAP is 389.
Login Setting
Login
Password
Apply
Cancel
The BCM50a Integrated Router must authenticate itself in order to assess the directory server. Type the logon name (up to 31 ASCII characters) from the entity maintaining the directory server (usually a certification authority).
Type the password (up to 31 ASCII characters) from the entity maintaining the directory server (usually a certification authority).
Click Apply to save your changes to the BCM50a Integrated Router.
Click Cancel to quit configuring this screen and return to the Directory
Servers screen.
1 At the time of writing, LDAP is the only choice for directory server access protocol.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
290 Chapter 14 Certificates
N0115790
291
Chapter 15
Bandwidth management
This chapter describes the functions and configuration of bandwidth management.
Bandwidth management overview
With bandwidth management, you can allocate the outgoing capacity of an interface to specific types of traffic. It can also help you make sure that the
BCM50a Integrated Router forwards certain types of traffic (especially real-time applications) with minimum delay. With the use of real-time applications such as
Voice-over-IP (VoIP) increasing, the requirement for bandwidth allocation is also increasing.
Bandwidth management addresses questions such as:
• Who gets how much access to specific applications?
• Which traffic must have guaranteed delivery?
• How much bandwidth is allotted to guarantee delivery?
With bandwidth management, you can configure the allowed output for an interface to match what the network can handle. This helps reduce delays and dropped packets at the next routing device. For example, you can set the WAN interface speed to 1 024 kb/s (or less) if the broadband device connected to the
WAN port has an upstream speed of 1 024 kb/s.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
292 Chapter 15 Bandwidth management
Bandwidth classes and filters
Use bandwidth subclasses to allocate specific amounts of bandwidth capacity
(bandwidth budgets). Configure a bandwidth filter to define a bandwidth subclass based on a specific application or subnet. Use the Class Setup tab (see
“Bandwidth Manager Class Configuration” on page 297 ) to set up a bandwidth
class name, bandwidth allotment, and filter specifics. Each bandwidth subclass consists of a single filter you can define by editing the subclass.
Unallocated bandwidth, bandwidth that is not controlled by a subclass you specify, is allocated to traffic not controlled by any subclass. View your configured bandwidth subclasses for a given interface in the Class Setup tab (see
“Configuring class setup” on page 295 for details). The total of the configured
bandwidth budgets cannot exceed the configured bandwidth budget for the
interface, as specified in “Configuring summary” on page 294 .
Proportional bandwidth allocation
With bandwidth management, you can define how much bandwidth each class gets; however, the actual bandwidth allotted to each class decreases or increases in proportion to actual available bandwidth.
Application based bandwidth management
You can create bandwidth classes based on individual applications (like FTP,
H.323, and SIP).
Subnet based bandwidth management
You can create bandwidth classes based on subnets.
shows LAN subnets. You can configure one bandwidth class for subnet A and another for subnet B.
N0115790
Chapter 15 Bandwidth management 293
Figure 96 Subnet based bandwidth management example
Application and subnet based bandwidth management
You can also create bandwidth classes based on a combination of a subnet and an
shows bandwidth allocations for application specific traffic from separate LAN subnets.
Table 75 Application and Subnet based Bandwidth Management Example
Traffic Type
FTP
H.323
SIP
From Subnet A
64 Kb/s
64 Kb/s
64 Kb/s
From Subnet B
64 Kb/s
64 Kb/s
64 Kb/s
Reserving bandwidth for nonbandwidth class traffic
If you want to allow bandwidth for traffic that is not defined in a bandwidth filter, leave some of the bandwidth on the interface unbudgeted.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
294 Chapter 15 Bandwidth management
Configuring summary
Click BW MGMT to open the Summary screen.
Enable bandwidth management on an interface and set the maximum allowed bandwidth for that interface.
Figure 97 Bandwidth Manager: Summary
N0115790
Table 76 describes the labels in Figure 97 .
Table 76 Bandwidth Manager: Summary
Label
WAN
LAN
Active
Description
These read-only labels represent the physical interfaces. Select the check box next to an interface to enable bandwidth management on that interface. Bandwidth management applies to all traffic flowing out of the router through the interface, regardless of the traffic source.
Traffic redirect or IP alias can cause LAN-to-LAN traffic to pass through the BCM50a Integrated Router and be managed by bandwidth management.
Select a check box to enable bandwidth management on that interface.
Chapter 15 Bandwidth management 295
Table 76 Bandwidth Manager: Summary
Label Description
Speed (kbps) Enter the amount of bandwidth for this interface that you want to allocate using bandwidth management.
This appears as the bandwidth budget of the interface root class (see
“Configuring class setup” on page 295
). Nortel recommends that you set this speed to match what the device connected to the port can handle.
For example, set the WAN interface speed to 1 000 kb/s (or less) if the broadband device connected to the WAN port has an upstream speed of
1 000 kb/s.
Apply
Reset
Click Apply to save your changes to the BCM50a Integrated Router.
Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Configuring class setup
The class setup screen displays the configured bandwidth classes by individual interface. Select an interface and click the buttons to perform the actions described next. Click + to expand the class tree or click - to collapse the class tree.
Each interface has a permanent root class. The bandwidth budget of the root class is equal to the speed you configured on the interface (see
“Configuring summary” on page 294
to configure the speed of the interface). Configure subclass layers for the root class.
To add or delete child classes on an interface, click BW MGMT, then the Class
Setup tab. The screen appears as shown in Figure 98 .
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
296 Chapter 15 Bandwidth management
Figure 98 Bandwidth Manager: Class setup
N0115790
Table 77 describes the labels in Figure 98 .
Table 77 Bandwidth Manager: Class Setup
Label Description
Interface
Bandwidth
Management
Select an interface from the drop-down list for which you wish to set up classes.
This field displays whether bandwidth management on the interface you selected in the field above is enabled (Active) or not (Inactive).
Add Sub-Class Click Add Sub-Class to add a subclass.
Edit Click Edit to go to a screen where you can configure the selected subclass. You cannot edit the root class.
Delete
Statistics
Click Delete to remove the selected subclass. You cannot delete the root class.
Click Statistics to display the status of the selected class.
Chapter 15 Bandwidth management 297
Table 77 Bandwidth Manager: Class Setup
Label Description
#
Filter Name
Service
This is the number of a filter entry. The ordering of your filters is important, as they are applied in turn. Use the Move button to reorder your filters.
This is the Class Name that you configured in the Edit Class screen.
If you selected a predefined application (FTP, H.323 or SIP), it displays here.
Destination IP
Address
This field displays the destination IP address in dotted decimal notation followed by the subnet mask. The IP 0.0.0.0/0 means all.
This field displays the port number of the destination. 0 means all ports.
Destination
Port
Source IP
Address
Source Port
Protocol ID
This field displays the source IP address in dotted decimal notation followed by the subnet mask. The IP 0.0.0.0/0 means all.
This field displays the port number of the source. The 0 means all ports.
Move
This field displays the protocol ID (service type) number, for example: 1 for ICMP, 6 for TCP or 17 for UDP. The 0 means all protocols.
Type the number of a filter entry and the number for where you want to put it. Click Move to move the filter to the number that you typed. The ordering of your filters is important, as they are applied in order of their numbering.
The filter entry numbers are not static names for the entries. A filter entry's number changes as you move the filter entry up or down in the list. Also, only the existing filter entries are counted, you cannot have any blank filter entries. For example, if you have only three filters and try to move number one to seven, it becomes filter three.
Bandwidth Manager Class Configuration
Configure a bandwidth management class in the Class Setup screen. You must use the Summary screen to enable bandwidth management on an interface before you can configure subclasses for that interface.
To add a subclass, click BW MGMT, and then the Class Setup tab. Click the
Add Sub-Class button to open the screen shown in
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
298 Chapter 15 Bandwidth management
Figure 99 Bandwidth Manager: Edit class
N0115790
Table 78 describes the labels in Figure 99 .
Table 78 Bandwidth Manager: Edit class
Label Description
Class
Configuration
Class Name Use the autogenerated name or enter a descriptive name of up to 20 alphanumeric characters, including spaces.
Bandwidth Budget
(kbps)
Specify the maximum bandwidth allowed for the class in kb/s. The recommendation is a setting between 20 kbps and 20 000 kbps for an individual class. The bandwidth you specify cannot cause the total allocated bandwidths of this and all other subclasses to exceed the bandwidth for the interface.
Chapter 15 Bandwidth management 299
Table 78 Bandwidth Manager: Edit class
Label Description
Filter Configuration
Enable Bandwidth
Filter
Select Enable Bandwidth Filter to have the BCM50a Integrated
Router use this bandwidth filter when it performs bandwidth management.
You must enter a value in at least one of the following fields (other than the Subnet Mask fields, which are only available when you enter the destination or source IP address).
Service This field simplifies bandwidth class configuration by allowing you to select a predefined application. When you select a predefined application, you do not need to configure the rest of the bandwidth filter fields (other than the Active check box).
FTP (File Transfer Program) is a program to enable fast transfer of files, including large files that are not possible by e-mail. Select FTP from the drop-down list to configure the bandwidth filter for FTP traffic.
If you select FTP, make sure you also turn on the FTP ALG. For
more information about ALG, see “ALG” on page 88
.
H.323 is a protocol standard used for multimedia communications over networks, for example, NetMeeting. Select H.323 from the drop-down list to configure the bandwidth filter for H.323 traffic.
SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) is a signaling protocol used in
Internet telephony, instant messaging, events notification, and conferencing. The BCM50a Integrated Router supports SIP traffic pass through. Select SIP from the drop-down list to configure this bandwidth filter for SIP traffic. This option makes it easier to manage bandwidth for SIP traffic and is useful for example when there is a
VoIP (Voice over Internet Protocol) device on your LAN.
Select All from the drop-down list if you do not want to use a predefined application for the bandwidth class. When you select All, you must configure at least one of the following fields (other than the
Subnet Mask fields, which you only enter if you also enter a corresponding destination or source IP address).
Enter the destination IP address in dotted decimal notation.
Destination IP
Address
Destination Subnet
Mask
Enter the destination subnet mask. This field is N/A if you do not specify a Destination IP Address.
Destination Port
Enter the port number of the destination. See “Predefined services” on page 178
in Chapter 11 Firewall screens
for a table of services and port numbers.
Source IP Address Enter the source IP address.
Source Subnet
Mask
Enter the destination subnet mask. This field is N/A if you do not specify a Source IP Address.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
300 Chapter 15 Bandwidth management
Table 78 Bandwidth Manager: Edit class
Label
Source Port
Protocol ID
Apply
Cancel
Description
Enter the port number of the source. See Table 79
for some common services and port numbers.
Enter the protocol ID (service type) number, for example: 1 for ICMP,
6 for TCP or 17 for UDP.
Click Apply to save your changes to the BCM50a Integrated Router.
Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
Table 79 Services and port numbers
Services
ECHO
FTP (File Transfer Protocol)
SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol)
DNS (Domain Name System)
Finger
HTTP (Hyper Text Transfer protocol or WWW, Web)
POP3 (Post Office Protocol)
NNTP (Network News Transport Protocol)
SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol)
SNMP trap
PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol)
Port Number
79
80
110
119
7
21
25
53
161
162
1723
Bandwidth management statistics
Use the Bandwidth Management Statistics screen to view network performance for the interface (root class) or a specific subclass. Select the root or subclass from the Class Setup screen and then click Statistics to see how it is performing.
N0115790
Chapter 15 Bandwidth management 301
Figure 100 Bandwidth management statistics
Table 80 describes the labels in Figure 100
.
Table 80 Bandwidth management statistics
Label Description
Class Name This field displays the name of the class the statistics page is showing.
Budget (kbps) This field displays the amount of bandwidth allocated to the class.
Tx Packets
Tx Bytes
This field displays the total number of packets transmitted.
This field displays the total number of bytes transmitted.
Dropped
Packets
Dropped
Bytes
This field displays the total number of packets dropped.
This field displays the total number of bytes dropped.
Bandwidth Statistics for the Past 8 Seconds (t-8 to t-1)
This field displays the bandwidth statistics (in b/s) for the past one to eight seconds. For example, t-1 means one second ago.
Update
Period
(Seconds)
Enter the time interval, in seconds, to define how often the information is refreshed.
Set Interval Click Set Interval to apply the new update period you entered in the
Update Period field above.
Stop Update Click Stop Update to stop the browser from refreshing bandwidth management statistics.
Clear Counter Click Clear Counter to clear all of the bandwidth management statistics.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
302 Chapter 15 Bandwidth management
Monitor
To view bandwidth usage and allotments, click BW MGMT, then the Monitor tab. The screen appears as shown in
Figure 101 Bandwidth manager monitor
N0115790
Table 81 describes the labels in Figure 101
.
Table 81 Bandwidth manager monitor
Label
Interface
Class
Budget (kbps)
Current Usage
(kbps)
Refresh
Description
Select an interface from the drop-down list to view the bandwidth usage of its bandwidth classes.
This field displays the name of the class.
This field displays the amount of bandwidth allocated to the class.
This field displays the amount of bandwidth that each class is using.
Click Refresh to update the page.
303
Chapter 16
Authentication server
The BCM50a Integrated Router can use either the local user database internal to the BCM50a Integrated Router or an external RADIUS server for an unlimited number of users.
Introduction to Local User database
By storing user profiles locally on the BCM50a Integrated Router, your BCM50a
Integrated Router is able to authenticate users without interacting with a network
RADIUS server. However, there is a limit on the number of users you can authenticate in this way.
Local User database
To see the local user list, click AUTH SERVER. The Local User Database screen appears as shown in
.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
304 Chapter 16 Authentication server
Figure 102 Local User database
N0115790
Table 82 describes the labels in Figure 102
.
Table 82 Local User database
Label Description
User ID
Active
User type
This field displays the logon name for the user account.
This field displays Yes if the user account is enabled or No if it is disabled.
This field displays whether the user account can be used for a IEEE 802.1X or IPSec logon (or both).
Last Name This field displays the user’s last name.
First Name This field displays the user’s first name.
Chapter 16 Authentication server 305
Table 82 Local User database
Label
Status
Edit
Delete
Description
This field displays the status of IPSec user accounts.
A dash appears for all other accounts.
Valid displays if an IPSec user can use the account to logon.
Expired displays if an IPSec user can no longer use the account to logon.
This happens when you have enabled Password Management in the VPN
Client Termination Advanced screen and the account password has exceeded the time that you configured as the Maximum Password Age.
Select a user account and click Edit to go to the screen where you can configure the account settings.
Select a user account and click Delete to remove the account.
Edit Local User Database
To change a local user database entry, click AUTH SERVER. In the Local User
Database screen, select the radio button of an entry and click the Edit button to
display the Local User Database Edit screen, as shown in Figure 103
.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
306 Chapter 16 Authentication server
Figure 103 Local User database edit
N0115790
Chapter 16 Authentication server 307
describes the labels in Figure 103
.
Table 83 Local User database edit
Label Description
Active
User Type
Select this check box to turn on the user account. Clear this check box to turn off the user account.
Select 802.1X to set this user account to be used for a IEEE 802.1X logon.
Select IPSec to set this user account to be used for an IPSec logon. Select
802.1X/IPSec to set this user account to be used for both IEEE 802.1X and
IPSec logons.
User Name Specify the user ID to be used as the logon name for the user account.
Password Enter a password up to 31 characters long for this user account.
Note that as you type a password, the screen displays a (*) for each character you type.
Enter the password again to make sure that you have entered it correctly.
Retype to
Confirm
IPSec User
Profile
The following fields display when you select IPSec or 802.1X/IPSec in the
User Type field.
First Name Enter the user’s first name.
Last Name Enter the user’s last name.
Enter the IP address of the remote user in dotted decimal notation.
Static IP
Address
Static
Subnet
Mask
Split
Tunneling
Enter the subnet mask of the remote user.
Configure
Network
Enable or disable split tunneling or inverse split tunneling.
Select Disable to force all traffic to be encrypted and go through the VPN tunnel.
Select Enabled to allow traffic not going through the VPN tunnel to go through the WAN interface without being encrypted. This reduces the processing load on the BCM50a Integrated Router but is less secure since the Contivity VPN clients’ unencrypted sessions make them vulnerable to attacks.
Select Enabled - Inverse to force traffic not going to the network subnets that you specify to be encrypted and sent through the VPN tunnel.
Select Enable - Inverse (locally connected) to force traffic not going to directly connected networks, or the network subnets that you specify, to be encrypted and sent through the VPN tunnel.
Click this link to set up the list of networks to use as split or inverse split networks.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
308 Chapter 16 Authentication server
Table 83 Local User database edit
Label Description
Split Tunnel
Networks
This field applies when you select Enabled in the Split Tunneling field.
Select the network for which you force traffic to be encrypted and go through the VPN tunnel.
Inverse Split
Tunnel
Network
This field applies when you select Enabled - Inverse or Enabled - Inverse
(locally connected) in the Split Tunneling field. Select the network for which you do not force traffic to be encrypted and go through the VPN tunnel.
Apply
Cancel
Click Apply to save the user account settings.
Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
Current split networks
In the Local User Database Edit screen, click Configure Network to display the
Current Split Networks screen as shown in
. This screen displays a list of networks that are configured for use with split and inverse split VPN tunnels.
Figure 104 Current split networks
N0115790
Chapter 16 Authentication server 309
describes the labels in Figure 104
.
Table 84 Current split networks
Label Description
Return to Local
User Database ->
User Edit Page
Click this link to return to the screen where you configure a local user database entry.
This is the list of names of split or inverse split networks.
Current Split
Networks
Add
Edit
Click Add to open another screen where you can specify split or inverse split networks.
Select the name of a split or inverse split network and click Edit to open a screen where you can change the network settings.
Delete Select the name of a split or inverse split network and click Delete to remove the network entry.
Current split networks edit
In the Local User Database Edit screen, click Configure Network to display the
Current Split Networks screen. Click Add or select a network and click Edit in order to display the Current Networks Edit screen. Use this screen shown in
Figure 105 to configure a set of subnets to use with split or inverse split VPN
tunnels.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
310 Chapter 16 Authentication server
Figure 105 Current split networks edit
N0115790
Table 85 describes the labels in Figure 105
.
Table 85 Current split networks edit
Label Description
Network
Name
Enter a name to identify the split network.
IP Address Enter the IP address for the split network in dotted decimal notation.
Netmask Enter the netmask for the split network in dotted decimal notation.
Chapter 16 Authentication server 311
Table 85 Current split networks edit
Label Description
Current
Subnets for
Network:
This box displays the subnets that belong to this split network.
Add
Delete
Clear
Apply
Cancel
Click Add to save your split network configuration.
Select a network subset and click Delete to remove it.
Click Clear to remove all of the configuration field and subnet settings.
Click Apply to save your changes to the BCM50a Integrated Router.
Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving your changes.
Configuring RADIUS
Use RADIUS if you want to authenticate users using an external server.
To set up RADIUS server settings, click AUTH SERVER, then the RADIUS tab. The screen appears, as shown in
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
312 Chapter 16 Authentication server
Figure 106 RADIUS
N0115790
Table 86 describes the labels in Figure 106
.
Table 86 RADIUS
Label Description
Authentication Server
Active Select the check box to enable user authentication through an external authentication server.
Clear the check box to enable user authentication using the local user profile on the BCM50a Integrated Router.
Server IP Address Enter the IP address of the external authentication server in dotted decimal notation.
Chapter 16 Authentication server 313
Table 86 RADIUS
Label Description
Port Number
Key
The default port of the RADIUS server for authentication is 1812.
You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so with additional information.
Enter a password (up to 31 alphanumeric characters) as the key to be shared between the external authentication server and the
BCM50a Integrated Router.
Note that, as you type a password, the screen displays an * for each character you type.
The key is not sent over the network. This key must be the same on the external authentication server and BCM50a Integrated Router.
Retype to Confirm Enter the password again to make sure that you have entered it correctly.
Accounting Server
Active Select the check box to enable user accounting through an external authentication server.
Server IP Address Enter the IP address of the external accounting server in dotted decimal notation.
Port Number The default port of the RADIUS server for accounting is 1813.
You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so with additional information.
Key Enter a password (up to 31 alphanumeric characters) as the key to be shared between the external accounting server and the BCM50a
Integrated Router.
Note that as you type a password, the screen displays a (*) for each character you type.
The key is not sent over the network. This key must be the same on the external accounting server and BCM50a Integrated Router.
Retype to Confirm Enter the password again to make sure that you have entered it correctly.
Apply
Reset
Click Apply to save your changes to the BCM50a Integrated Router.
Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
314 Chapter 16 Authentication server
N0115790
315
Chapter 17
Remote management screens
This chapter provides information on the Remote Management screens.
Remote management overview
Remote management allows you to determine which services and protocols can access which BCM50a Integrated Router interface (if any) from which computers.
Note: When you configure remote management to allow management from the WAN, you still need to configure a firewall rule to allow access.
You can manage your BCM50a Integrated Router from a remote location through:
• Internet (WAN only)
• LAN only
• ALL (LAN and WAN)
• Neither (Disable)
Note: If you choose WAN only or ALL (LAN & WAN), you still need to configure a firewall rule to allow access.
To disable remote management of a service, select Disable in the corresponding
Server Access field.
Remote management limitations
Remote management over LAN or WAN does not work if:
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
316 Chapter 17 Remote management screens
1 A filter in SMT menu 3.1 (LAN) or in menu 11.1.4 (WAN) is applied to block a Telnet, FTP, or Web service.
2 A service is disabled in one of the remote management screens.
3 The IP address in the Secured Client IP field does not match the client IP address. If it does not match, the BCM50a Integrated Router disconnects the session immediately.
4 Another remote management session of the same type (web, FTP or Telnet) is running. You can only have one remote management session of the same type running at one time.
5 A web remote management session is running with a Telnet session. A web session is disconnected if you begin a Telnet session; nor does it begin if a
Telnet session is already running.
6 A firewall rule blocks access to device.
Remote management and NAT
When NAT is enabled:
• Use the BCM50a Integrated Router WAN IP address when configuring from the WAN.
• Use the BCM50a Integrated Router LAN IP address when configuring from the LAN.
System timeout
There is a system timeout of 5 minutes (300 seconds) for the Telnet, web, or FTP connections. Your BCM50a Integrated Router automatically logs you off if you do nothing in this timeout period, except when it is continuously updating the status in menu 24.1 or when sys stdio was changed on the command line. Use the System screen to change the timeout period in the Administrator Inactivity
Timer field.
N0115790
Chapter 17 Remote management screens 317
Introduction to HTTPS
HTTPS (HyperText Transfer Protocol over Secure Socket Layer, or HTTP over
SSL) is a web protocol that encrypts and decrypts Web pages. Secure Socket
Layer (SSL) is an application-level protocol that enables secure transactions of data by ensuring confidentiality (an unauthorized party cannot read the transferred data), authentication (one party can identify the other party), and data integrity
(you know if data has been changed).
HTTPS relies upon certificates, public keys, and private keys (see Chapter 14,
for more information).
HTTPS on the BCM50a Integrated Router is used so that you can securely access the BCM50a Integrated Router using the WebGUI. The SSL protocol specifies that the SSL server (the BCM50a Integrated Router) must always authenticate itself to the SSL client (the computer that requests the HTTPS connection with the
BCM50a Integrated Router), whereas the SSL client only authenticates itself when the SSL server requires it to do so (select Authenticate Client Certificates in the REMOTE MGMT, WWW screen). Authenticate Client Certificates is optional and, if selected, means the SSL-client must send the BCM50a Integrated
Router a certificate. You must apply for a certificate for the browser from a trusted CA on the BCM50a Integrated Router.
Refer to
Figure 107 about HTTPS implementation.
1 HTTPS connection requests from an SSL-aware Web browser go to port 443 (by default) on the BCM50a Integrated Router WS (Web server).
2 HTTP connection requests from a Web browser go to port 80 (by default) on the BCM50a
Integrated Router WS (Web server).
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
318 Chapter 17 Remote management screens
Figure 107 HTTPS implementation
Note: If you disable HTTP Server Access (Disable) in the
REMOTE MGMT WWW screen, the BCM50a Integrated Router blocks all HTTP connection attempts.
Configuring WWW
To change your BCM50a Integrated Router Web settings, click REMOTE
MGMT to open the WWW screen.
N0115790
Figure 108 WWW
Chapter 17 Remote management screens 319
Table 87 describes the labels in Figure 108
.
Table 87 WWW
Label
HTTPS
Server
Certificate
Authenticate
Client
Certificates
Description
Select the Server Certificate that the BCM50a Integrated Router uses to identify itself. The BCM50a Integrated Router is the SSL server and must always authenticate itself to the SSL client (the computer that requests the HTTPS connection with the BCM50a Integrated Router).
Select Authenticate Client Certificates (optional) to require the SSL client to authenticate itself to the BCM50a Integrated Router by sending the BCM50a Integrated Router a certificate. To do that, the SSL client must have a CA-signed certificate from a CA that has been imported as a trusted CA on the BCM50a Integrated Router (see the appendix on importing certificates for details).
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
320 Chapter 17 Remote management screens
Table 87 WWW
Label Description
Server Port
Server Access Select a BCM50a Integrated Router interface from Server Access on which incoming HTTPS access is allowed.
You can allow only secure WebGUI access by setting the HTTP Server
Access field to Disable and setting the HTTPS Server Access field to an interface.
Secure Client
IP Address
The HTTPS proxy server listens on port 443 by default. If you change the
HTTPS proxy server port to a different number on the BCM50a
Integrated Router, for example, 8443, you must notify people who need to access the BCM50a Integrated Router WebGUI to use https://
BCM50a Integrated Router IP Address:8443 as the URL.
A secure client is a trusted computer that is allowed to communicate with the BCM50a Integrated Router using this service.
Select All to allow any computer to access the BCM50a Integrated
Router using this service.
Choose Selected to just allow the computer with the IP address that you specify to access the BCM50a Integrated Router using this service.
HTTP
Server Port You can change the server port number for a service, if needed, however, you must use the same port number in order to use that service for remote management.
Server Access Select the interfaces (If any) through which a computer can access the
BCM50a Integrated Router using this service.
Secure Client
IP Address
A secure client is a trusted computer that is allowed to communicate with the BCM50a Integrated Router using this service.
Select All to allow any computer to access the BCM50a Integrated
Router using this service.
Choose Selected to just allow the computer with the IP address that you specify to access the BCM50a Integrated Router using this service.
Apply
Reset
Click Apply to save your customized settings and exit this screen.
Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.
HTTPS example
To change the default HTTPS port on the BCM50a Integrated Router, in your browser, enter “https://BCM50a Integrated Router IP Address/” as the Web site address, where “BCM50a Integrated Router IP Address” is the IP address or domain name of the BCM50a Integrated Router you wish to access.
N0115790
Chapter 17 Remote management screens 321
Internet Explorer warning messages
When you attempt to access the BCM50a Integrated Router HTTPS server, a
Windows dialog box appears, asking if you trust the server certificate. Click View
Certificate if you want to verify that the certificate is from the BCM50a
Integrated Router.
The Security Alert screen shown in Figure 109
appears in Internet Explorer.
Select Yes to proceed to the WebGUI logon screen; if you select No, then
WebGUI access is blocked.
Figure 109 Security Alert dialog box (Internet Explorer)
Netscape Navigator warning messages
When you attempt to access the BCM50a Integrated Router HTTPS server, a
Website Certified by an Unknown Authority screen (shown in
appears asking if you trust the server certificate. Click Examine Certificate if you want to verify that the certificate is from the BCM50a Integrated Router.
If you select Accept this certificate temporarily for this session, then click OK to continue in Netscape.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
322 Chapter 17 Remote management screens
Select Accept this certificate permanently to import the BCM50a Integrated
Router certificate into the SSL client.
Figure 110 Figure 18-4 Security Certificate 1 (Netscape)
N0115790
Chapter 17 Remote management screens 323
Figure 111 Security Certificate 2 (Netscape)
Avoiding the browser warning messages
The following section describes the main reasons that your browser displays warnings about the BCM50a Integrated Router HTTPS server certificate and what you can do to avoid seeing the warnings.
• The issuing certificate authority of the BCM50a Integrated Router HTTPS server certificate is not a trusted certificate authority in the browser. The issuing certificate authority of the BCM50a Integrated Router's factory default certificate is the BCM50a Integrated Router itself since the certificate is a self-signed certificate.
• For the browser to trust a self-signed certificate, import the self-signed certificate into your operating system as a trusted certificate.
• To have the browser trust the certificates issued by a certificate authority, import the certificate authority’s certificate into your operating system as a trusted certificate.
• The actual IP address of the HTTPS server (the IP address of the BCM50a
Integrated Router port that you are trying to access) does not match the common name specified in the BCM50a Integrated Router HTTPS server certificate that your browser received. To check the common name specified in the certificate that your BCM50a Integrated Router sends to HTTPS clients:
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
324 Chapter 17 Remote management screens a Click REMOTE MGMT. Write down the name of the certificate displayed in the Server Certificate field. b Click CERTIFICATES. Find the certificate that was displayed in the
Server Certificate field and check its Subject column. CN stands for the
common name of the certificate (see Figure 115 on page 328
for an example).
Use this procedure to have the BCM50a Integrated Router use a certificate with a common name that matches the actual IP address of the BCM50a Integrated
Router. You cannot use this procedure if you need to access the WAN port and it uses a dynamically assigned IP address.
a Create a new certificate for the BCM50a Integrated Router that uses the
IP address (of the BCM50a Integrated Router port that you are trying to access) as the common name of the certificate. For example, to use
HTTPS to access a LAN port with IP address 192.168.1.1, create a certificate that uses 192.168.1.1 as the common name.
b Go to the remote management WWW screen and select the newly created certificate in the Server Certificate field. Click Apply.
Logon screen
After you accept the certificate, the BCM50a Integrated Router logon screen appears. The lock displayed in the bottom right of the browser status bar denotes a secure connection.
N0115790
Chapter 17 Remote management screens 325
Figure 112 Logon screen (Internet Explorer)
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
326 Chapter 17 Remote management screens
Figure 113 Login screen (Netscape)
N0115790
Click Login to proceed. The screen shown in
The factory default certificate is a common default certificate for all BCM50a
Integrated Router models.
Figure 114 Replace certificate
Chapter 17 Remote management screens 327
Click Apply in the Replace Certificate screen to create a certificate using your
BCM50a Integrated Router MAC address that is specific to this device. Click
CERTIFICATES to open the My Certificates screen. You see information similar to that shown in
.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
328 Chapter 17 Remote management screens
Figure 115 Device-specific certificate
N0115790
Click Ignore in the Replace Certificate screen to use the common BCM50a
Integrated Router certificate. The My Certificates screen appears ( Figure 116 ).
Chapter 17 Remote management screens 329
Figure 116 Common BCM50a Integrated Router certificate
SSH overview
Unlike Telnet or FTP, which transmit data in clear text, SSH (Secure Shell) is a secure communication protocol that combines authentication and data encryption to provide secure encrypted communication between two hosts over an unsecured network.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
330 Chapter 17 Remote management screens
Figure 117 SSH Communication Example
How SSH works
summarizes how a secure connection is established between two remote hosts.
Figure 118 How SSH Works
N0115790
1 Host Identification
The SSH client sends a connection request to the SSH server. The server identifies itself with a host key. The client encrypts a randomly generated session key with the host key and server key and sends the result to the server.
Chapter 17 Remote management screens 331
The client automatically saves any new server public keys. In subsequent connections, the server public key is checked against the saved version on the client computer.
2 Encryption Method
Once the identification is verified, both the client and server must agree on the type of encryption method to use.
3 Authentication and Data Transmission
After the identification is verified and data encryption activated, a secure tunnel is established between the client and the server. The client then sends its authentication information (username and password) to the server to log on to the server.
SSH implementation on the BCM50a Integrated Router
Your BCM50a Integrated Router supports SSH version 1.5 using RSA authentication and three encryption methods (DES, 3DES and Blowfish). The
SSH server is implemented on the BCM50a Integrated Router for remote SMT management and file transfer on port 22. Only one SSH connection is allowed at a time.
Requirements for using SSH
You must install an SSH client program on a client computer (Windows or Linux operating system) that is used to connect to the BCM50a Integrated Router over
SSH.
Configuring SSH
To change the Secure Shell settings, click REMOTE MGMT, and then the SSH
tab. The screen shown in Figure 119 appears.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
332 Chapter 17 Remote management screens
Figure 119 SSH
N0115790
Table 88 describes the labels in Figure 119 .
Table 88 SSH
Label Description
Server Host
Key
Server Port
Select the certificate whose corresponding private key is to be used to identify the BCM50a Integrated Router for SSH connections. You must have certificates already configured in the My Certificates screen (Click
My Certificates and see
Chapter 14, “Certificates,” on page 253 for
details).
You can change the server port number for a service if needed, however, you must use the same port number in order to use that service for remote management.
Server Access Select the interfaces (If any) through which a computer can access the
BCM50a Integrated Router using this service.
Secure Client
IP Address
A secure client is a trusted computer that is allowed to communicate with the BCM50a Integrated Router using this service.
Select All to allow any computer to access the BCM50a Integrated
Router using this service.
Choose Selected to just allow the computer with the IP address that you specify to access the BCM50a Integrated Router using this service.
Apply
Reset
Click Apply to save your customized settings and exit this screen.
Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Chapter 17 Remote management screens 333
Note: Nortel recommends that you disable Telnet and FTP when you configure SSH for secure connections.
Secure Telnet using SSH examples
This section shows two examples using a command interface and a graphical interface SSH client program to remotely access the BCM50a Integrated Router.
The configuration and connection steps are similar for most SSH client programs.
For more information about SSH client programs, refer to your SSH client program user’s guide.
Example 1: Microsoft Windows
This section describes how to access the BCM50a Integrated Router using the
Secure Shell Client program.
1 Launch the SSH client and specify the connection information (IP address, port number, or device name) for the BCM50a Integrated Router.
2 Configure the SSH client to accept connection using SSH version 1.
3 A window appears, prompting you to store the host key in you computer.
Click Yes to continue.
Figure 120 SSH Example 1: Store Host Key
Enter the password to log on to the BCM50a Integrated Router. The SMT main menu appears.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
334 Chapter 17 Remote management screens
Example 2: Linux
This section describes how to access the BCM50a Integrated Router using the
OpenSSH client program that comes with most Linux distributions.
1 Test whether the SSH service is available on the BCM50a Integrated Router.
Enter “telnet 192.168.1.1 22” at a terminal prompt and press
[ENTER]. The computer attempts to connect to port 22 on the BCM50a
Integrated Router (using the default IP address of 192.168.1.1).
A message displays indicating the SSH protocol version supported by the
BCM50a Integrated Router.
Figure 121 SSH Example 2: Test
$ telnet 192.168.1.1 22
Trying 192.168.1.1...
Connected to 192.168.1.1.
Escape character is '^]'.
SSH-1.5-1.0.0
2 Enter “ssh –1 192.168.1.1”. This command forces your computer to connect to the BCM50a Integrated Router using SSH version 1. If this is the first time you are connecting to the BCM50a Integrated Router using SSH, a message appears prompting you to save the host information of the BCM50a
Integrated Router. Type yes and press [ENTER].
Enter the password to log on to the BCM50a Integrated Router.
N0115790
Chapter 17 Remote management screens 335
Figure 122 SSH Example 2: Log on
$ ssh –1 192.168.1.1
The authenticity of host '192.168.1.1 (192.168.1.1)' can't be established.
RSA1 key fingerprint is
21:6c:07:25:7e:f4:75:80:ec:af:bd:d4:3d:80:53:d1.
Are you sure you want to continue connecting (yes/no)? yes
Warning: Permanently added '192.168.1.1' (RSA1) to the list of known hosts.
[email protected]'s password:
3 The SMT main menu displays.
Secure FTP using SSH example
This section shows an example of file transfer using the OpenSSH client program.
The configuration and connection steps are similar for other SSH client programs.
For more information about using FTP, refer to your SSH client program user’s guide.
1 Enter sftp –1 192.168.1.1. This command forces your computer to connect to the BCM50a Integrated Router for secure file transfer using SSH version 1. If this is the first time you are connecting to the BCM50a Integrated
Router using SSH, a message displays, prompting you to save the host information of the BCM50a Integrated Router. Type yes and press
[ENTER].
2 Enter the password to log on to the BCM50a Integrated Router.
3 Use the put command to upload a new firmware to the BCM50a Integrated
Router.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
336 Chapter 17 Remote management screens
Figure 123 Secure FTP: Firmware Upload Example
$ sftp -1 192.168.1.1
Connecting to 192.168.1.1...
The authenticity of host '192.168.1.1 (192.168.1.1)' can't be established.
RSA1 key fingerprint is
21:6c:07:25:7e:f4:75:80:ec:af:bd:d4:3d:80:53:d1.
Are you sure you want to continue connecting (yes/no)? yes
Warning: Permanently added '192.168.1.1' (RSA1) to the list of known hosts.
[email protected]'s password: sftp> put firmware.bin ras
Uploading firmware.bin to /ras
Read from remote host 192.168.1.1: Connection reset by peer
Connection closed
$
Telnet
You can configure your BCM50a Integrated Router for remote Telnet access as
Figure 124 Telnet configuration on a TCP/IP network
BCM50a Integrated Router
N0115790
Chapter 17 Remote management screens 337
Configuring TELNET
Click REMOTE MANAGEMENT to open the TELNET screen.
Figure 125 Telnet
Table 89 describes the fields in Figure 125
.
Table 89 Telnet
Label Description
Server Port
Server Access
You can change the server port number for a service if needed, however, you must use the same port number in order to use that service for remote management.
Select the interfaces (If any) through which a computer can access the BCM50a Integrated Router using this service.
Secured Client IP
Address
A secured client is a “trusted” computer that is allowed to communicate with the BCM50a Integrated Router using this service.
Select All to allow any computer to access the BCM50a Integrated
Router using this service.
Choose Selected to just allow the computer with the IP address that you specify to access the BCM50a Integrated Router using this service.
Apply
Reset
Click Apply to save your customized settings and exit this screen.
Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
338 Chapter 17 Remote management screens
Configuring FTP
You can upload and download the BCM50a Integrated Router firmware and configuration files using FTP. To use this feature, your computer must have an
FTP client.
To change your BCM50a Integrated Router FTP settings, click REMOTE
MANAGEMENT, and then the FTP tab. The screen appears as shown in
Figure 126 FTP
N0115790
Table 90 describes the fields in Figure 126
.
Table 90 FTP
Label
Server Port
Server Access
Description
You can change the server port number for a service if needed, however, you must use the same port number in order to use that service for remote management.
Select the interfaces (If any) through which a computer can access the BCM50a Integrated Router using this service.
Chapter 17 Remote management screens 339
Table 90 FTP
Label Description
Secured Client IP
Address
A secured client is a trusted computer that is allowed to communicate with the BCM50a Integrated Router using this service.
Select All to allow any computer to access the BCM50a Integrated
Router using this service.
Choose Selected to just allow the computer with the IP address that you specify to access the BCM50a Integrated Router using this service.
Apply
Reset
Click Apply to save your customized settings and exit this screen.
Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Configuring SNMP
Simple Network Management Protocol is a protocol used for exchanging management information between network devices. SNMP is a member of the
TCP/IP protocol suite. Your BCM50a Integrated Router supports SNMP-agent functionality, which allows a manager station to manage and monitor the
BCM50a Integrated Router through the network. The BCM50a Integrated Router supports SNMP version 1 (SNMPv1).
illustrates an SNMP management operation. SNMP is only available if TCP/IP is configured. The default get and set communities are public.
Note: SNMP is only available if TCP/IP is configured.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
340 Chapter 17 Remote management screens
Figure 127 SNMP Management Model
N0115790
An SNMP-managed network consists of two main types of component: agents and a manager.
An agent is a management software module that resides in a managed device (the
BCM50a Integrated Router). An agent translates the local management information from the managed device into a form compatible with SNMP. The manager is the console through which network administrators perform network management functions. It executes applications that control and monitor managed devices.
The managed devices contain object variables and managed objects that define each piece of information to be collected about a device. Examples of variables include number of packets received and node port status. A Management
Information Base (MIB) is a collection of managed objects. SNMP allows a manager and agents to communicate for the purpose of accessing these objects.
SNMP itself is a simple request and response protocol based on the manager and agent model. The manager issues a request and the agent returns responses using the following protocol operations:
Chapter 17 Remote management screens 341
• Get-Allows the manager to retrieve an object variable from the agent.
• GetNext-Allows the manager to retrieve the next object variable from a table or list within an agent. In SNMPv1, when a manager wants to retrieve all elements of a table from an agent, it initiates a Get operation, followed by a series of GetNext operations.
• Set-Allows the manager to set values for object variables within an agent.
• Trap -Used by the agent to inform the manager of some events.
Supported MIBs
The BCM50a Integrated Router supports MIB II, which is defined in RFC 1213 and RFC 1215. The focus of the MIBs is to let administrators collect statistical data and monitor status and performance.
SNMP Traps
The BCM50a Integrated Router sends traps to the SNMP manager when any one of the following events occurs:
Table 91 SNMP traps
Trap #
0
1
4
6
6a
6b
Trap Name Description coldStart (defined in RFC 1215) A trap is sent after booting (power on).
warmStart (defined in RFC 1215) A trap is sent after booting (software reboot).
authenticationFailure (defined in
RFC 1215) whyReboot (defined in MIB)
A trap is sent to the manager when receiving any SNMP get or set requirements with the wrong community
(password).
A trap is sent with the reason of restart before rebooting when the system is going to restart (warm start).
For intentional reboot:
For fatal error:
A trap is sent with the message System reboot by user! if reboot is done intentionally, (for example, download new files, and CI command sys reboot).
A trap is sent with the message of the fatal code if the system reboots because of fatal errors.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
342 Chapter 17 Remote management screens
REMOTE MANAGEMENT: SNMP
To change your BCM50a Integrated Router SNMP settings, click REMOTE
MANAGEMENT, and then the SNMP tab. The screen appears as shown in
Figure 128 SNMP
N0115790
Table 92 describes the fields in Figure 128
.
Table 92 SNMP
Label Description
SNMP Configuration
Get Community Enter the Get Community, which is the password for the incoming
Get and GetNext requests from the management station. The default is “PlsChgMe!RO”.
Set Community Enter the Set community, which is the password for incoming Set requests from the management station. The default is
“PlsChgMe!RW”.
Chapter 17 Remote management screens 343
Table 92 SNMP
Label Description
Trusted Host If you enter a trusted host, your BCM50a Integrated Router only responds to SNMP messages from this address. In the field, 0.0.0.0
(default) means your BCM50a Integrated Router responds to all
SNMP messages it receives, regardless of source.
Trap
Community Type the trap community, which is the password sent with each trap to the SNMP manager. The default is public and allows all requests.
Type the IP address of the station to send your SNMP traps to.
Destination
SNMP
Service Port
Service Access
You change the server port number for a service if needed, however, you must use the same port number in order to use that service for remote management.
Select the interfaces (If any) through which a computer can access the BCM50a Integrated Router using this service.
Secured Client IP
Address
A secured client is a trusted computer that is allowed to communicate with the BCM50a Integrated Router using this service.
Select All to allow any computer to access the BCM50a Integrated
Router using this service.
Choose Selected to just allow the computer with the IP address that you specify to access the BCM50a Integrated Router using this service.
Apply
Reset
Click Apply to save your customized settings and exit this screen.
Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Configuring DNS
Use DNS (Domain Name System) to map a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa, for example, the IP address of www.nortel.com is
47.249.48.20.
To change your BCM50a Integrated Router DNS settings, click REMOTE
MANAGEMENT, and then the DNS tab. The screen appears as shown in
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
344 Chapter 17 Remote management screens
Figure 129 DNS
Table 93 describes the fields in Figure 129
.
Table 93 DNS
Label Description
Server Port
Server Access
The DNS service port number is 53 and cannot be changed here.
Select the interfaces (if any) through which a computer can send
DNS queries to the BCM50a Integrated Router.
Secured Client IP
Address
A secured client is a trusted computer that is allowed to send DNS queries to the BCM50a Integrated Router.
Select All to allow any computer to send DNS queries to the BCM50a
Integrated Router.
Choose Selected to just allow the computer with the IP address that you specify to send DNS queries to the BCM50a Integrated Router.
Apply
Reset
Click Apply to save your customized settings and exit this screen.
Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Configuring Security
To change your BCM50a Integrated Router security settings, click REMOTE
MANAGEMENT, and then the Security tab. The screen appears as shown in
N0115790
Chapter 17 Remote management screens 345
If an outside user attempts to probe an unsupported port on your BCM50a
Integrated Router, an ICMP response packet is automatically returned. This allows the outside user to know the BCM50a Integrated Router exists. The
BCM50a Integrated Router series support antiprobing, which prevents the ICMP response packet from being sent. This keeps outsiders from discovering your
BCM50a Integrated Router when unsupported ports are probed.
Note: In order to allow Ping on the WAN, you must also configure a
WAN to WAN/ BCM50a Integrated Router rule that allows
PING(ICMP:0) traffic.
Figure 130 Security
Table 94 describes the fields in Figure 130
.
Table 94 Security
Label
ICMP
Respond to Ping on
Description
Internet Control Message Protocol is a message control and error-reporting protocol between a host server and a gateway to the
Internet. ICMP uses Internet Protocol (IP) datagrams, but the messages are processed by the TCP/IP software and directly apparent to the application user.
The BCM50a Integrated Router does not respond to any incoming
Ping requests when Disable is selected. Select LAN to reply to incoming LAN Ping requests. Select WAN to reply to incoming WAN
Ping requests. Otherwise, select LAN & WAN to reply to both incoming LAN and WAN Ping requests.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
346 Chapter 17 Remote management screens
Table 94 Security
Label Description
Do not respond to requests for unauthorized services
Select this option to prevent hackers from finding the BCM50a
Integrated Router by probing for unused ports. If you select this option, the BCM50a Integrated Router does not send ICMP response packets to port requests for unused ports, thus leaving the unused ports and the BCM50a Integrated Router unseen.
If the firewall blocks a packet from the WAN, the BCM50a Integrated
Router sends a TCP reset packet. Use the sys firewall tcprst rst off command in the command interpreter if you want to stop the BCM50a
Integrated Router from sending TCP reset packets.
Apply
Reset
Click Apply to save your customized settings and exit this screen.
Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.
N0115790
347
Chapter 18
UPnP
This chapter introduces the Universal Plug and Play feature.
Universal Plug and Play overview
Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) is a distributed, open networking standard that uses TCP/IP for simple peer-to-peer network connectivity between devices. A
UPnP device can dynamically join a network, obtain an IP address, convey its capabilities, and learn about other devices on the network. In turn, a device can leave a network smoothly and automatically when it is no longer in use.
How do I know if I am using UPnP?
UPnP hardware is identified as an icon in the Network Connections folder
(Windows XP). Each UPnP compatible device installed on your network appears as a separate icon. By selecting the icon of a UPnP device, you can access the information and properties of that device.
NAT Traversal
UPnP NAT traversal automates the process of allowing an application to operate through NAT. UPnP network devices can automatically configure network addressing, announce their presence in the network to other UPnP devices, and enable exchange of simple product and service descriptions. With NAT traversal, the device can do the following:
• Dynamic port mapping
• Learning public IP addresses
• Assigning lease times to mappings
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
348 Chapter 18 UPnP
Windows Messenger is an example of an application that supports NAT traversal and UPnP.
Cautions with UPnP
The automated nature of NAT traversal applications in establishing their own services and opening firewall ports can present network security issues. Network information and configuration can also be obtained and modified by users in some network environments.
All UPnP-enabled devices can communicate freely with each other without additional configuration. If this is not your intention, disable UPnP.
UPnP implementation
The device has UPnP certification from the Universal Plug and Play Forum
Creates UPnP™ Implementers Corp. (UIC). This UPnP implementation supports
IGD 1.0 (Internet Gateway Device). At the time of writing, the UPnP implementation supports Windows Messenger 4.6 and 4.7 while Windows
Messenger 5.0 and Xbox are still being tested.
The BCM50a Integrated Router only sends UPnP multicasts to the LAN.
Configuring UPnP
Click UPnP to display the screen shown in Figure 131
.
N0115790
Figure 131 Configuring UPnP
Chapter 18 UPnP 349
Table 95 describes the fields in Figure 131
.
Table 95 Configuring UPnP
Label Description
Device Name
Enable the Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) feature
Allow users to make configuration changes through UPnP
This identifies the device in UPnP applications.
Select this check box to activate UPnP. Be aware that anyone can use a UPnP application to open the WebGUI's logon screen without entering the BCM50a Integrated
Router's IP address (although you must still enter the password to access the WebGUI).
Select this check box to allow UPnP-enabled applications to automatically configure the BCM50a Integrated Router so that they can communicate through the BCM50a
Integrated Router. For example, by using NAT traversal,
UPnP applications automatically reserve a NAT forwarding port in order to communicate with another
UPnP enabled device; eliminating the need to manually configure port forwarding for the UPnP enabled application.
Allow UPnP to pass through firewall
Select this check box to allow traffic from UPnP-enabled applications to bypass the firewall.
Clear this check box to have the firewall block all UPnP application packets (for example, MSN packets).
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
350 Chapter 18 UPnP
Table 95 Configuring UPnP
Label
Apply
Reset
Description
Click Apply to save your customized settings and exit this screen.
Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Displaying UPnP port mapping
Click UPnP and then Ports to display the screen as shown in Figure 132
. Use this screen to view the NAT port mapping rules that UPnP creates on the BCM50a
Integrated Router.
Figure 132 UPnP Ports
N0115790
Table 96 describes the labels in Figure 132
.
Table 96 UPnP Ports
Label Description
Retain UPnP port forwarding
Select this check box to have the BCM50a Integrated Router retain
UPnP created NAT rules even after restarting. If you use UPnP and you set a port on your computer to be fixed for a specific service (for example, FTP for file transfers), the BCM50a Integrated Router can keep a record when your computer uses UPnP to create a NAT forwarding rule for that service.
The following read-only table displays information about the UPnP-created NAT mapping rule entries in the NAT routing table.
Chapter 18 UPnP 351
Table 96 UPnP Ports
Label Description
# This is the index number of the UPnP-created NAT mapping rule entry.
Remote Host This field displays the source IP address (on the WAN) of inbound IP packets. Because this is often a wildcard, the field can be blank. When the field is blank, the BCM50a Integrated Router forwards all traffic sent to the External Port on the WAN interface to the Internal Client on the
Internal Port. When this field displays an external IP address, the NAT rule has the BCM50a Integrated Router forward inbound packets to the
Internal Client from that IP address only.
External Port This field displays the port number that the BCM50a Integrated Router listens on (on the WAN port) for connection requests destined for the
Internal Port and Internal Client of the NAT rule. The BCM50a
Integrated Router forwards incoming packets (from the WAN) with this port number to the Internal Client on the Internal Port (on the LAN). If the field displays “0”, the BCM50a Integrated Router ignores the
Internal Port value and forwards requests on all external port numbers
(that are otherwise unmapped) to the Internal Client.
Protocol
Internal Port
This field displays the protocol of the NAT mapping rule (TCP or UDP).
This field displays the port number on the Internal Client to which the
BCM50a Integrated Router forwards incoming connection requests.
Internal Client This field displays the DNS host name or IP address of a client on the
LAN. Multiple NAT clients can use a single port simultaneously if the internal client field is set to 255.255.255.255 for UDP mappings.
Enabled This field displays whether or not this UPnP-created NAT mapping rule is turned on. The UPnP-enabled device that connected to the BCM50a
Integrated Router and configured the UPnP-created NAT mapping rule on the BCM50a Integrated Router determines whether or not the rule is enabled.
Description This field displays a text explanation of the NAT mapping rule.
Lease Duration This field displays the time to live (in seconds) for a dynamic port-mapping rule. It displays “0” if the port mapping is static.
Apply
Refresh
Click Apply to save your changes to the BCM50a Integrated Router.
Click Refresh to update the table.
Installing UPnP in Windows example
This section shows how to install UPnP in Windows Me and Windows XP.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
352 Chapter 18 UPnP
Installing UPnP in Windows Me
Follow the steps below to install UPnP in Windows Me.
1 Click Start and Control Panel. Double-click Add/Remove Programs.
2 Click on the Windows Setup tab and select Communication in the
Components selection box. Click Details.
Figure 133 Add/Remove programs: Windows setup
3 In the Communications window, select the Universal Plug and Play check box in the Components selection box.
4 Click OK to return to the Add/Remove Programs Properties window and click Next.
5 Restart the computer when prompted.
N0115790
Figure 134 Communications
Chapter 18 UPnP 353
Installing UPnP in Windows XP
Follow the steps below to install UPnP in Windows XP.
1 Click Start and Control Panel.
2 Double-click Network Connections.
3 In the Network Connections window, click Advanced in the main menu and select Optional Networking Components ….
The Windows Optional Networking Components Wizard window appears.
Figure 135 Network connections
4 Select Networking Service in the Components selection box and click
Details.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
354 Chapter 18 UPnP
Figure 136 Windows optional networking components wizard
5 In the Networking Services window, select the Universal Plug and Play check box.
Figure 137 Windows XP networking services
6 Click OK to return to the Windows Optional Networking Component
Wizard window and click Next.
Using UPnP in Windows XP example
This section shows you how to use the UPnP feature in Windows XP. You must already have UPnP installed in Windows XP and UPnP activated on the device.
N0115790
Chapter 18 UPnP 355
Make sure the computer is connected to a LAN port of the device. Turn on your computer and the BCM50a Integrated Router.
Autodiscover Your UPnP-enabled Network Device
1 Click Start and Control Panel. Double-click Network Connections. An icon displays under Internet Gateway.
2 Right-click the icon and select Properties.
Figure 138 Internet gateway icon
3 In the Internet Connection Properties window, click Settings to see the port mappings that were automatically created.
Figure 139 Internet connection properties
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
356 Chapter 18 UPnP
4 You can edit or delete the port mappings or click Add to manually add port mappings.
Figure 140 Internet connection properties advanced setup
N0115790
Figure 141 Service settings
Note: When the UPnP-enabled device is disconnected from your computer, all port mappings are deleted automatically.
Chapter 18 UPnP 357
5 Select the Show icon in notification area when connected check box and click OK. An icon displays in the system tray.
Figure 142 Internet connection icon
6 Double-click the icon to display your current Internet connection status.
Figure 143 Internet connection status
WebGUI easy access
With UPnP, you can access the WebGUI without first finding out its IP address.
This is helpful if you do not know the IP address of your BCM50a Integrated
Router.
Follow the steps below to access the WebGUI.
1 Click Start and then Control Panel.
2 Double-click Network Connections.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
358 Chapter 18 UPnP
3 Select My Network Places under Other Places
Figure 144 Network connections
N0115790
4 An icon with the description for each UPnP-enabled device displays under
Local Network.
5 Right-click the icon for your BCM50a Integrated Router and select Invoke.
The WebGUI logon screen displays.
Figure 145 My Network Places: Local network
Chapter 19
Logs Screens
This chapter contains information about configuring general log settings and
viewing the BCM50a Integrated Router logs. Refer to Appendix B, “Log
for example log message explanations.
359
Configuring View Log
With the WebGUI, you can look at all of the BCM50a Integrated Router logs in one location.
Click LOGS to open the View Log screen. Use the View Log screen to see the logs for the categories that you selected in the Log Settings screen (see
“Configuring Log settings” on page 361
). Options include logs about system maintenance, system errors, access control, allowed or blocked Web sites, blocked Web features (such as ActiveX controls, Java and cookies), attacks (such as DoS), and IPSec.
Log entries in red indicate system error logs. The log wraps around and deletes the old entries after it fills. Click a column heading to sort the entries. A triangle indicates ascending or descending sort order.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
360 Chapter 19 Logs Screens
Figure 146 View Log
N0115790
Table 97 describes the fields in Figure 146
.
Table 97 View Log
Label Description
Display
Time
The categories that you select in the Log Settings page display in the drop-down list.
Select a category of logs to view; select All Logs to view logs from all of the log categories that you selected in the Log Settings page.
This field displays the time the log was recorded. Refer to
for information about configuring the time and date.
Message
Source
This field states the reason for the log.
This field lists the source IP address and the port number of the incoming packet.
Destination This field lists the destination IP address and the port number of the incoming packet.
This field displays additional information about the log entry. Note
Email Log Now Click Email Log Now to send the log screen to the e-mail address specified in the Log Settings page (make sure that you have first filled in the Address Info fields in Log Settings).
Chapter 19 Logs Screens 361
Table 97 View Log
Label
Refresh
Clear Log
Description
Click Refresh to renew the log screen.
Click Clear Log to delete all the logs.
Configuring Log settings
To change your BCM50a Integrated Router log settings, click Logs, then the Log
Settings tab. The screen appears as shown in
Use the Log Settings screen to configure to where the BCM50a Integrated Router sends logs; the schedule for when the BCM50a Integrated Router is to send the logs and which logs and immediate alerts the BCM50a Integrated Router is to send.
An alert is a type of log that warrants more serious attention including system errors, attacks (access control), and attempted access to blocked Web sites or Web sites with restricted Web features such as cookies or Active X. Some categories, such as System Errors, consist of both logs and alerts. You can differentiate between logs and alerts by their color in the View Log screen. Alerts display in red and logs display in black.
Note: Alerts are e-mailed as soon as they happen. Logs can be e-mailed as soon as the log is full. Selecting many alert and log categories
(especially Access Control) can result in many e-mails being sent.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
362 Chapter 19 Logs Screens
Figure 147 Log settings
N0115790
Chapter 19 Logs Screens 363
describes the fields in Figure 147
.
Table 98 Log settings
Label
Address Info
Mail Server
Server Port
Mail Subject
Send Log To
Send Alerts To
Syslog Logging
Active
Syslog Server IP
Address
Log Facility
Description
Enter the server name or the IP address of the mail server for the e-mail addresses specified below. If this field is left blank, logs and alert messages are not sent through e-mail.
Enter the port number that the mail server uses.
Type a title that you want to be in the subject line of the log e-mail message that the BCM50a Integrated Router sends.
Logs are sent to the e-mail address specified in this field. If this field is left blank, logs are not sent through e-mail.
Alerts are sent to the e-mail address specified in this field. If this field is left blank, alerts are not sent through e-mail.
Syslog logging sends a log to an external syslog server used to store logs.
Click Active to enable syslog logging.
Enter the server name or IP address of the syslog server that logs the selected categories of logs.
Select a location from the drop-down list. In the log facility, you can log the messages to different files in the syslog server.
Refer to the documentation of your syslog program for more details.
Send Log
Log Schedule
Day for Sending Log
This drop-down menu is used to configure the frequency of log messages being sent as e-mail:
Daily
Weekly
Hourly
When the Log is Full
None
If you select Weekly or Daily, specify a time of day when the e-mail will be sent. If you select Weekly, you must also specify which day of the week the e-mail is to be sent. If you select
When Log is Full, an alert is sent when the log fills up. If you select None, no log messages are sent.
Use the drop-down list to select which day of the week to send the logs.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
364 Chapter 19 Logs Screens
Table 98 Log settings
Label Description
Time for Sending Log
Log
Reset
Enter the time of the day in 24-hour format (for example 23:00 equals 11:00 p.m.) to send the logs.
Select the categories of the logs that you want to record. Logs include alerts.
1
Send Immediate Alert Select the categories of alerts for which you want the BCM50a
Integrated Router to instantly e-mail alerts to the e-mail address specified in the Send Alerts To field.
Log Consolidation
Active Some logs (such as the Attacks logs) can be so numerous that it becomes easy to ignore other important log messages.
Select this check box to merge logs with identical messages into one log.
You can use the sys log consolidate msglist command to see which log messages are consolidated.
Log Consolidation
Period
Apply
Specify the time interval during which to merge logs with identical messages into one log.
Click Apply to save your customized settings and exit this screen.
Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.
1 802.1x logs are not available in this release.
Configuring Reports
To change your BCM50a Integrated Router log reports, click Logs, and then the
Reports tab. The screen appears as shown in
The Reports page displays which computers on the LAN send and receive the most traffic, what kinds of traffic are used the most, and which Web sites are visited the most often. Use the Reports screen to have the BCM50a Integrated
Router record and display the following network usage details:
• Web sites visited the most often
• Number of times the most visited Web sites were visited
• The most-used protocols or service ports
• The amount of traffic for the most used protocols or service ports
N0115790
Chapter 19 Logs Screens 365
• The LAN IP addresses to and from which the most traffic has been sent
• How much traffic has been sent to and from the LAN IP addresses to and from which the most traffic has been sent
Note: The Web site hit count not be 100% accurate because sometimes when an individual Web page loads, it can contain references to other
Web sites that also get counted as hits.
The BCM50a Integrated Router records Web site hits by counting the HTTP GET packets. Many Web sites include HTTP GET references to other Web sites and the BCM50a Integrated Router can count these as hits, thus the Web hit count is not (yet) 100% accurate.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
366 Chapter 19 Logs Screens
Figure 148 Reports
N0115790
Note: Enabling the reporting function decreases the overall throughput by about 1 Mb/s.
Table 99 describes the fields in Figure 148
.
Table 99 Reports
Label Description
Collect Statistics Select the check box and click Apply to have the BCM50a Integrated
Router record report data.
Send Raw Traffic
Statistics to
Syslog Server for
Analysis
Select the check box and click Apply to have the BCM50a Integrated
Router send unprocessed traffic statistics to a syslog server for analysis.
You must have the syslog server already configured in the Log
Settings screen.
Chapter 19 Logs Screens 367
Table 99 Reports
Label
Apply
Reset
Report Type
Refresh
Flush
Description
Click Apply to save your changes to the BCM50a Integrated Router.
Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Use the drop-down list to select the type of reports to display.
Web Site Hits displays the Web sites that have been visited the most often from the LAN and how many times they have been visited.
Protocol/Port displays the protocols or service ports that have been used the most and the amount of traffic for the most used protocols or service ports.
LAN IP Address displays the LAN IP addresses to and from which the most traffic has been sent and how much traffic has been sent to and from those IP addresses.
Click Refresh to update the report display. The report also refreshes automatically when you close and reopen the screen.
Click Flush to discard the old report data and update the report display.
Note: All of the recorded reports data is erased when you turn off the
BCM50a Integrated Router.
Viewing Web site hits
In the Reports screen, select Web Site Hits from the Report Type drop-down list to have the BCM50a Integrated Router record and display which Web sites have been visited the most often and how many times they have been visited.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
368 Chapter 19 Logs Screens
Figure 149 Web site hits report example
N0115790
describes the fields in
Table 100 Web site hits report
Label
Web Site
Hits
Description
This column lists the domain names of the Web sites visited most often from computers on the LAN. The names are ranked by the number of visits to each Web site and listed in descending order with the most visited Web site listed first. The BCM50a Integrated Router counts each page viewed in a Web site as another hit on the Web site.
This column lists how many times each Web site has been visited.
The count starts over at 0 if a Web site passes the hit count limit.
Chapter 19 Logs Screens 369
Viewing Protocol/Port
In the Reports screen, select Protocol/Port from the Report Type drop-down list to have the BCM50a Integrated Router record and display which protocols or service ports have been used the most and the amount of traffic for the most used protocols or service ports.
Figure 150 Protocol/Port report example
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
370 Chapter 19 Logs Screens
describes the fields in
Table 101 Protocol/ Port Report
Label
Protocol/Port
Direction
Amount
Description
This column lists the protocols or service ports for which the most traffic has gone through the BCM50a Integrated Router. The protocols or service ports are listed in descending order with the most used protocol or service port listed first.
This column lists the direction of travel of the traffic belonging to each protocol or service port listed. Incoming refers to traffic that is coming into the BCM50a Integrated Router LAN from the WAN. Outgoing refers to traffic that is going out from the BCM50a Integrated Router
LAN to the WAN.
This column lists how much traffic has been sent and received for each protocol or service port. The measurement unit shown (bytes,
Kilobytes, Megabytes or Gigabytes) varies with the amount of traffic for the particular protocol or service port. The count starts over at 0 if a protocol or port passes the bytes count limit (see
).
Viewing LAN IP address
In the Reports screen, select LAN IP Address from the Report Type drop-down list to have the BCM50a Integrated Router record and display the LAN IP addresses that the most traffic has been sent to and from and how much traffic has been sent to and from those IP addresses.
Note: Computers take turns using dynamically assigned LAN IP addresses. The BCM50a Integrated Router continues recording the bytes sent to or from a LAN IP address when it is assigned to a different computer.
N0115790
Figure 151 LAN IP address report example
Chapter 19 Logs Screens 371
describes the fields in
Table 102 LAN IP Address Report
Label
IP Address
Amount
Description
This column lists the LAN IP addresses to and from which the most traffic has been sent. The LAN IP addresses are listed in descending order with the LAN IP address to and from which the most traffic was sent listed first.
This column displays how much traffic has gone to and from the listed LAN IP addresses. The measurement unit shown (bytes,
Kilobytes, Megabytes or Gigabytes) varies with the amount of traffic sent to and from the LAN IP address. The count starts over at 0 if the total traffic sent to and from a LAN IP passes the bytes count limit
(see
).
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
372 Chapter 19 Logs Screens
Reports specifications
lists detailed specifications on the reports feature.
Table 103 Report Specifications
Label Description
Number of Web sites/protocols or ports/IP addresses listed:
20
Hit count limit: Up to 2 32 hits can be counted per Web site. The count starts over at 0 if it passes four billion.
Bytes count limit: Up to 2 64 bytes can be counted per protocol/port or LAN IP address.
The count starts over at 0 if it passes 2 64 bytes.
N0115790
373
Chapter 20
Call scheduling screens
With call scheduling (applicable for PPPoA or PPPoE encapsulation only), you can dictate when a remote node is to be called and for how long.
Call scheduling
introduction
Using the call scheduling feature, the BCM50a Integrated Router can manage a remote node and dictate when a remote node is to be called and for how long. This feature is similar to the scheduler in a video cassette recorder (you can specify a time period for the VCR to record). Apply schedule sets in the WAN IP screen .
Lower numbered sets take precedence over higher numbered sets, thereby avoiding scheduling conflicts. For example, if sets 1, 2, 3, and 4 are applied in the remote node, set 1 takes precedence over set 2, 3, and 4 as the BCM50a Integrated
Router, by default, applies the lowest numbered set first. Set 2 takes precedence over sets 3 and 4.
You can design up to 12 schedule sets. You can apply up to four schedule sets for a remote node.
Call schedule summary
Click CALL SCHEDULE to open the Call Schedule Summary screen.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
374 Chapter 20 Call scheduling screens
Figure 152 Call schedule summary
N0115790
describes the fields in
Table 104 Call Schedule Summary
#
Name
Active
Start Date
Duration Date
This is the call schedule set number.
This field displays the name of the call schedule set.
This field shows whether the call schedule set is turned on (Yes) or off (No).
This is the date (in year-month-day format) that the call schedule set takes effect.
This is the date (in year-month-day format) that the call schedule set ends.
Chapter 20 Call scheduling screens 375
Table 104 Call Schedule Summary
Start Time
Duration Time
Action
Edit
Delete
This is the time (in hour-minute format) when the schedule set takes effect.
This is the maximum length of time (in hour-minute format) that the schedule set applies the action displayed in the Action field.
Forced On means that the connection is maintained whether or not there is a demand call on the line and persists for the time period specified in the Duration field.
Forced Down means that the connection is blocked whether or not there is a demand call on the line.
Enable Dial-On-Demand means that this schedule permits a demand call on the line.
Disable Dial-On-Demand means that this schedule prevents a demand call on the line.
Click Edit to change a call schedule set.
Select the a call schedule set's radio button and click Delete to remove that call schedule set.
Call scheduling edit
To configure a schedule set, click the Edit button to display the screen shown in
Figure 153 Call schedule edit
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
376 Chapter 20 Call scheduling screens
If a connection has been already established, your BCM50a Integrated Router will not drop it. After the connection is dropped manually or it times out, that remote node can not be triggered again until the end of the Duration.
Table 105 Call schedule edit
Schedule
Name
Active
Start Date
Enter a name (up to 16 characters) for the call schedule set. You can use numbers, the letters A-Z (upper or lower case) and the underscore (_) and @ symbols.
Select this check box to turn on this call schedule set. Clear this check box to turn this call schedule set off.
Set the date (in year-month-day format) when you want this call schedule set to take effect.
How Often Select Once to use this schedule set only one time. Select Weekly to use this schedule every week.
If you select Once, then enter the date the set will activate in year-month-day format.
If you selected Weekly in the How Often field, then select the day or days of the week when the set will activate.
Enter the start time (in hour-minute format) when you want the schedule set to take effect.
Start Time
(24-Hour
Format)
Duration Time
(24-Hour
Format)
Enter the maximum length of time (in hour-minute format) that the schedule set is to apply the action configured in the Action field. The limit is 24 hours.
Action Select an action for the schedule set to take.
Forced On means that the connection is maintained whether or not there is a demand call on the line and persists for the time period specified in the Duration field.
Forced Down means that the connection is blocked whether or not there is a demand call on the line.
Enable Dial-On-Demand means that this schedule permits a demand call on the line.
Disable Dial-On-Demand means that this schedule prevents a demand call on the line.
Apply
Cancel
Click Apply to save your changes to the BCM50a Integrated Router.
Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
N0115790
Chapter 20 Call scheduling screens 377
Applying Schedule Sets to a remote node
Once your schedule sets are configured, you must then apply them. Apply schedule sets in the WAN IP screen.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
378 Chapter 20 Call scheduling screens
N0115790
379
Chapter 21
Maintenance
This chapter displays system information such as firmware, port IP addresses, and port traffic statistics.
Maintenance overview
The maintenance screens can help you view system information, upload new firmware, manage configuration, and restart your BCM50a Integrated Router.
Status screen
Click MAINTENANCE to open the Status screen, where you can monitor your
BCM50a Integrated Router. Note that these fields are READ-ONLY and only used for diagnostic purposes.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
380 Chapter 21 Maintenance
Figure 154 System Status
N0115790
describes the fields in
Table 106 System Status
Label
System Name
Nortel Firmware
Version
DSL FW Version
Standard
Description
This is the System Name you chose in the first Internet Access
Wizard screen. It is for identification purposes
The release of firmware currently on the BCM50a Integrated Router and the date the release was created.
This is the DSL firmware version currently on the BCM50a
Integrated Router.
This is the ADSL standard that your BCM50a Integrated Router is using.
WAN Information
Chapter 21 Maintenance 381
Table 106 System Status
Label
IP Address
IP Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
VPI/VCI
Description
This is the WAN port IP address.
This is the WAN port subnet mask.
This is the IP address of the default gateway, if applicable.
This is the Virtual Path Identifier and Virtual Channel Identifier that you entered in the first Wizard screen.
LAN Information
MAC Address
IP Address
IP Subnet Mask
DHCP
DHCP Start IP
DHCP Pool Size
Show Statistics
This is the MAC (Media Access Control) or Ethernet address unique to your BCM50a Integrated Router.
This is the LAN port IP address.
This is the LAN port IP subnet mask.
This is the LAN port DHCP role - Server, Relay or None.
This is the first of the contiguous addresses in the IP address pool.
This is the number of IP addresses in the IP address pool.
Click Show Statistics to see router performance statistics such as number of packets sent and number of packets received for each port.
System statistics
Read-only information here includes port status and packet specific statistics.
Also provided are system up time and poll intervals. The Poll Interval(s) field is configurable.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
382 Chapter 21 Maintenance
Figure 155 System Status: Show statistics
N0115790
describes the fields in
Table 107 System Status: Show Statistics
Label Description
System up Time
CPU Load
LAN or WAN Port
Statistics
This is the elapsed time the system has been up.
This field specifies the percentage of CPU utilization.
This is the WAN or LAN port.
Link Status
Upstream Speed
This is the status of your WAN link.
This is the upstream speed of your BCM50a Integrated Router.
Downstream Speed This is the downstream speed of your BCM50a Integrated Router.
Node-Link This field displays the remote node index number and link type.
Link types are PPPoA, ENET, RFC 1483 and PPPoE.
Interface This field displays the type of port.
Chapter 21 Maintenance 383
Table 107 System Status: Show Statistics (continued)
Label
Status
TxPkts
RxPkts
Errors
Tx B/s
Rx B/s
Up Time
Collisions
Poll Interval(s)
Set Interval
Stop
Description
For the WAN port, this displays the port speed and duplex setting if you're using Ethernet encapsulation and down (line is down), idle
(line (ppp) idle), dial (starting to trigger a call) and drop (dropping a call) if you're using PPPoE encapsulation.
For a LAN port, this shows the port speed and duplex setting.
This field displays the number of packets transmitted on this port.
This field displays the number of packets received on this port.
This field displays the number of error packets on this port.
This field displays the number of bytes transmitted in the last second.
This field displays the number of bytes received in the last second.
This field displays the elapsed time this port has been up.
This is the number of collisions on this port.
Type the time interval for the browser to refresh system statistics.
Click this button to apply the new poll interval you entered in the
Poll Interval field above.
Click this button to halt the refreshing of the system statistics.
DHCP Table screen
With DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, RFC 2131 and RFC 2132) individual clients can obtain TCP/IP configuration at start-up from a server. You can configure the BCM50a Integrated Router as a DHCP server or disable it.
When configured as a server, the BCM50a Integrated Router provides the TCP/IP configuration for the clients. If set to None, DHCP service is disabled and you must have another DHCP server on your LAN, or else the computer must be configured manually.
Click MAINTENANCE, and then the DHCP Table tab. Read-only information here relates to your DHCP status. The DHCP table shows current DHCP Client information (including IP Address, Host Name, and MAC Address) of all network clients using the DHCP server.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
384 Chapter 21 Maintenance
Figure 156 DHCP Table
describes the fields in
Table 108 DHCP Table
Label
#
IP Address
Host Name
MAC Address
Reserve
Refresh
Description
This is the index number of the host computer.
This field displays the IP address relative to the # field listed above.
This field displays the computer host name.
This field shows the MAC address of the computer with the name in the Host Name field.
Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC (Media Access Control) address. The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example, 00:A0:C5:00:00:02.
Select the check box to have the BCM50a Integrated Router always assign the displayed IP address to the corresponding MAC address
(and host name). After you click Apply, the MAC address and IP address also display in the LAN Static DHCP screen (where you can edit them).
Click Refresh to renew the screen.
Diagnostic Screen
From the Site Map screen, click Diagnostic to open the screen shown next.
N0115790
Figure 157 Diagnostic
Chapter 21 Maintenance 385
describes the fields in
Table 109 Diagnostic
Description Label
General
TCP/IP
Address
Type the IP address of a computer that you want to ping in order to test a connection.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
386 Chapter 21 Maintenance
Table 109 Diagnostic
Label Description
Ping
Reset
System
Click this button to ping the IP address that you entered.
Click this button to reboot the BCM50a Integrated Router. A warning dialog box is then displayed asking you if you're sure you want to reboot the system. Click OK to proceed.
DSL Line
Reset ADSL
Line
Click this button to reinitialize the ADSL line. The large text box above then displays the progress and results of this operation, for example:
" Start to reset ADSL
Loading ADSL modem F/W...
Reset ADSL Line Successfully!
"
ATM Status Click this button to view ATM status.
ATM
Loopback
Test
Click this button to start the ATM loopback test. Make sure you have configured at least one PVC with proper VPIs/VCIs before you begin this test. The BCM50a Integrated Router sends an OAM F5 packet to the
DSLAM/ATM switch and then returns it (loops it back) to the BCM50a
Integrated Router. The ATM loopback test is useful for troubleshooting problems with the DSLAM and ATM network.
Upstream
Noise
Margin
Click this button to display the upstream noise margin.
Downstream
Noise
Margin
Click this button to display the downstream noise margin.
F/W Upload screen
Find firmware at www.nortel.com/index.html in a file that usually uses the system model name with a *.bin extension. The upload process uses FTP (File Transfer
Protocol) and can take up to two minutes. After a successful upload, the system reboots.
Click MAINTENANCE, and then the F/W UPLOAD tab. Follow the instructions to upload firmware to your BCM50a Integrated Router.
Note: Only upload firmware for your specific model!
N0115790
Figure 158 Firmware upload
Chapter 21 Maintenance 387
Table 110 describes the fields in Figure 158
.
Table 110 Firmware Upload
Label Description
File Path Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click
Browse... to find it.
Browse... Click Browse... to find the .bin file you want to upload. Remember that you must decompress compressed (.zip) files before you can upload them.
Upload Click Upload to begin the upload process. This process can take up to two minutes.
Note: Do not turn off the device while firmware upload is in progress!
After you see the Firmware Upload in Process ( Figure 159
) screen, wait two minutes before logging on to the device again.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
388 Chapter 21 Maintenance
Figure 159 Firmware Upload In Process
The device automatically restarts in this time, causing a temporary network
disconnect. In some operating systems, you can see the icon Shown in Figure 160
on your desktop.
Figure 160 Network Temporarily Disconnected
After two minutes, log on again and check your new firmware version in the
System Status screen.
If the upload was not successful, the screen shown in
Uploading the wrong firmware file or a corrupted firmware file can cause this error. Click Return to return to the F/W Upload screen.
Figure 161 Firmware upload error
N0115790
Chapter 21 Maintenance 389
Configuration screen
Click MAINTENANCE, and then the Configuration tab. Information related to factory defaults, backup configuration, and restoring configuration appears as
Figure 162 Configuration
Back to Factory Defaults
Pressing the Reset button in this section clears all user-entered configuration information and returns the BCM50a Integrated Router to its factory defaults. The warning screen will appear (see
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
390 Chapter 21 Maintenance
Figure 163 Reset warning message
The BCM50a Integrated Router LAN IP address changes back to 192.168.1.1 and the password reverts to “PlsChgMe!”.
Backup configuration
With backup configuration, you can back up and save the current device configuration to a 104 KB file on your computer. After your device is configured and functioning properly, Nortel recommends that you back up your configuration file before making configuration changes. The backup configuration file is useful in case you need to return to your previous settings.
Click Backup to save the current device configuration to your computer.
Restore configuration
With restore configuration, you can upload a new or previously saved configuration file from your computer to your BCM50a Integrated Router.
Table 111 Restore configuration
Label Description
File Path Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click
Browse... to find it.
N0115790
Chapter 21 Maintenance 391
Table 111 Restore configuration
Browse... Click Browse... to find the file you want to upload. Remember that you must decompress compressed (.ZIP) files before you can upload them.
Upload Click Upload to begin the upload process.
Note: Do not turn off the device while configuration file upload is in progress.
After you see a “configuration upload successful” screen, you must then wait one minute before logging on to the device again.
Figure 164 Configuration Upload Successful
The device automatically restarts in this time, causing a temporary network
disconnect. In some operating systems, you see the icon shown in Figure 165
on your desktop.
Figure 165 Network Temporarily Disconnected
If you uploaded the default configuration file, you need to change the IP address of your computer to be in the same subnet as that of the default device IP address
(192.168.1.1). See your guide for details about how to set up your computer IP address.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
392 Chapter 21 Maintenance
If the upload was not successful, click Return to return to the Configuration screen.
Restart screen
With system restart, you can reboot the BCM50a Integrated Router without turning the power off.
Click MAINTENANCE, and then Restart. Click Restart to have the BCM50a
Integrated Router reboot. This does not affect the BCM50a Integrated Router's configuration.
Figure 166 Restart screen
N0115790
Appendix A
Troubleshooting
This chapter covers potential problems and the corresponding remedies.
393
Problems Starting Up the BCM50a Integrated Router
Table 112 Troubleshooting the Start-Up of your BCM50a Integrated Router
Problem
None of the LEDs turn on when I turn on the BCM50a
Integrated Router.
Corrective Action
Make sure that the BCM50 power adaptor is connected to the BCM50a Integrated
Router and plugged in to an appropriate power source. Check that the BCM50a
Integrated Router and the power source are both turned on.
Turn the BCM50a Integrated Router off and on.
If the error persists, you have a hardware problem. In this case, contact your vendor.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
394 Appendix A Troubleshooting
Problems with the LAN LED
Table 113 Troubleshooting the LAN LED
Problem
The LAN LEDs do not turn on.
Corrective Action
Check your Ethernet cable connections.
Check for faulty Ethernet cables.
Make sure the Ethernet Card in your computer is working properly.
Problems with the LAN interface
Table 114 Troubleshooting the LAN interface
Problem Corrective Action
I cannot access the
BCM50a Integrated
Router from the LAN.
I cannot ping any computer on the LAN.
Check your Ethernet cable type and connections.
Make sure the Ethernet adapter is installed in the computer and functioning properly.
Check the 10M/100M LAN LEDs on the front panel. If they are all off, check the cables between your BCM50a Integrated Router and hub or the computer.
Verify that the IP address and the subnet mask of the BCM50a Integrated Router and the computers are on the same subnet.
N0115790
Appendix A Troubleshooting 395
Problems with the WAN interface
Table 115 Troubleshooting the WAN Interface
Problem
Cannot get WAN IP address from the ISP.
Corrective Action
The ISP provides the WAN IP address after authentication. Authentication can be through the username and password, the MAC address, or the host name. Use the following corrective actions to make sure the ISP can authenticate your connection.
You need a username and password if you are using PPPoE or PPPoA encapsulation. Make sure that you have entered the correct service type, username, and password (the username and password are case-sensitive). Use the WAN screens in the WebGUI.
If your ISP requires host name authentication, configure your computer name as the system name of the BCM50a Integrated Router (use the System General screen to configure the system name).
Problems with Internet access
Table 116 Troubleshooting Internet access
Problem Corrective Action
Cannot access the Internet. Check your cable connections.
Verify your settings in the WAN screens.
Internet connection disconnects. Check the call-scheduling rules.
If you use PPPoA or PPPoE encapsulation, check the idle time-out setting in the WAN screens.
Contact your ISP.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
396 Appendix A Troubleshooting
Problems accessing an Internet Web site
Table 117 Troubleshooting Web Site Internet Access
Problem
Cannot connect to a
Web site on the
Internet.
Corrective Action
Disable content filtering and clear your browser cache. Try connecting to the Web site again. If you can now connect to this site, the content filter blocked original access. Check your content filter settings if this was not your intention.
If you cannot connect to the site even after you disable content filtering, check your device connections and Internet access settings. Your username and password can be case-sensitive. If device connections and Internet access settings are correct, contact your ISP.
Problems with the password
Table 118 Troubleshooting the password
Problem Corrective Action
I cannot access the
BCM50a Integrated
Router.
The administrator username is “nnadmin”. The default password is “PlsChgMe!”. The
Password and Username fields are case-sensitive. Make sure that you enter the correct password and username using the proper casing.
Problems with the WebGUI
Problems with Remote Management
Problem
Table 119 Troubleshooting Remote Management
Corrective Action
N0115790
Appendix A Troubleshooting 397
Table 119 Troubleshooting Remote Management
I cannot remotely manage the BCM50a
Integrated Router from the LAN or the
WAN.
Check your remote management and firewall configuration.
Use the BCM50a Integrated Router WAN IP address when configuring from the
WAN.
Use the BCM50a Integrated Router LAN IP address when configuring from the LAN.
Refer to “Problems with the LAN interface” on page 394 for instructions about
checking your LAN connection.
Refer to the “Problems with the WAN interface” on page 395 for instructions about
checking your WAN connection.
See also “Problems with the WebGUI” on page 396 .
Allowing Pop-up Windows, JavaScript and Java
Permissions
In order to use the WebGUI, you must allow:
• Web browser pop-up windows from your device
• JavaScript
• Java permissions
Internet Explorer Pop-up Blockers
Note: Internet Explorer 6 screens are used here. Screens for other
Internet Explorer versions vary
Disable pop-up blocking to log on to your device, if necessary.
Either disable pop-up blocking (enabled by default in Windows XP SP
(Service Pack) 2) or enable pop-up blocking and create an exception for your device IP address.
Allowing Pop-ups
1 In Internet Explorer, select Tools, Pop-up Blocker and then select Turn Off
Pop-up Blocker.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
398 Appendix A Troubleshooting
Figure 167 Pop-up Blocker
You can also check if pop-up blocking is disabled in the Pop-up Blocker section in the Privacy tab.
1 In Internet Explorer, select Tools, Internet Options, Privacy.
2 Clear the Block pop-ups check box in the Pop-up Blocker section of the screen.
N0115790
Figure 168 Internet Options
Appendix A Troubleshooting 399
3 Click Apply to save this setting.
Enabling Pop-up Blockers with Exceptions
Alternatively, if you only want to allow pop-up windows from your device, see the following steps.
1 In Internet Explorer, select Tools, Internet Options and then the Privacy tab.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
400 Appendix A Troubleshooting
2 Select Settings… to open the Pop-up Blocker Settings screen.
Figure 169 Internet options
N0115790
3 Type the IP address of your device (the Web page that you do not want to have blocked) with the prefix “http://”. For example, http://192.168.1.1.
Appendix A Troubleshooting 401
4 Click Add to move the IP address to the list of Allowed sites.
Figure 170 Pop-up Blocker settings
5 Click Close to return to the Internet Options screen.
6 Click Apply to save this setting.
Internet Explorer JavaScript
If pages of the WebGUI do not display properly in Internet Explorer, check that JavaScript and Java permissions are enabled.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
402 Appendix A Troubleshooting
1 In Internet Explorer, click Tools, Internet Options, and then the Security tab.
Figure 171 Internet options
N0115790
2 Click the Custom Level... button.
3 Scroll down to Scripting.
4 Under Active scripting make sure that Enable is selected (the default).
5 Under Scripting of Java applets make sure that Enable is selected (the default).
6 Click OK to close the window.
Figure 172 Security Settings - Java Scripting
Appendix A Troubleshooting 403
Internet Explorer Java Permissions
1 From Internet Explorer, click Tools, Internet Options, and then the Security tab.
2 Click the Custom Level... button.
3 Scroll down to Microsoft VM.
4 Under Java permissions make sure that a safety level is selected.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
404 Appendix A Troubleshooting
5 Click OK to close the window.
Figure 173 Security Settings - Java
N0115790
JAVA (Sun)
1 From Internet Explorer, click Tools, Internet Options, and then the
Advanced tab.
2 Make sure that Use Java 2 for <applet> under Java (Sun) is selected.
3 Click OK to close the window.
Appendix A Troubleshooting 405
4 Close your existing browser session and open a new browser.
Figure 174 Java (Sun)
Netscape Pop-up Blockers
Note: Netscape 7.2 screens are used here. Screens for other Netscape versions vary
Either disable the blocking of unrequested pop-up windows (enabled by default in Netscape) or allow pop-ups from Web sites by creating an exception for your device IP address.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
406 Appendix A Troubleshooting
Allowing Pop-ups
1 In Netscape, click Tools, Popup Manager and then select Allow Popups
From This Site.
Figure 175 Allow Popups from this site
2 In the Netscape search toolbar, you can enable and disable pop-up blockers for Web sites.
Figure 176 Netscape Search Toolbar
You can also check if pop-up blocking is disabled in the Popup Windows screen in the Privacy & Security directory.
1 In Netscape, click Edit and then Preferences.
2 Click the Privacy & Security directory and then select Popup Windows.
N0115790
Appendix A Troubleshooting 407
3 Clear the Block unrequested popup windows check box.
Figure 177 Popup Windows
4 Click OK to save this setting.
Enable Pop-up Blockers with Exceptions
Alternatively, if you only want to allow pop-up windows from your device, follow these steps:
1 In Netscape, click Edit, and then Preferences.
2 In the Privacy & Security directory, select Popup Windows.
3 Make sure the Block unrequested popup windows check box is selected.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
408 Appendix A Troubleshooting
4 Click the Allowed Sites... button.
Figure 178 Popup Windows
N0115790
5 Type the IP address of your device (the Web page that you do not want to have blocked) with the prefix http://. For example, http://192.168.1.1.
Appendix A Troubleshooting 409
6 Click Add to move the IP address to the Site list.
Figure 179 Allowed Sites
7 Click OK to return to the Popup Windows screen.
8 Click OK to save this setting.
Netscape Java Permissions and JavaScript
If pages of the WebGUI do not display properly in Netscape, check that
JavaScript and Java permissions are enabled.
1 In Netscape, click Edit and then Preferences.
2 Click the Advanced directory.
3 In the Advanced screen, make sure the Enable Java check box is selected.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
410 Appendix A Troubleshooting
4 Click OK to close the window.
Figure 180 Advanced
N0115790
5 Click the Advanced directory and then select Scripts & Plug-ins.
6 Make sure the Navigator check box is selected in the enable JavaScript section.
7 Click OK to close the window.
Figure 181 Scripts & Plug-ins
Appendix A Troubleshooting 411
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
412 Appendix A Troubleshooting
N0115790
413
Appendix B
Log Descriptions
This appendix provides descriptions of example log messages.
Table 120 System Error Logs
Log Message
%s exceeds the max. number of session per host!
Description
This attempt to create a SUA/NAT session exceeds the maximum number of SUA/NAT session table entries allowed to be created per host.
Table 121 System Maintenance Logs
Log Message Description
Time calibration is successful
The router has adjusted its time based on information from the time server.
Time calibration failed
DHCP client gets %s
DHCP client IP expired
DHCP server assigns %s
SMT Login Successfully
The router failed to get information from the time server.
A DHCP client got a new IP address from the DHCP server.
A DHCP client's IP address has expired.
The DHCP server assigned an IP address to a client.
Someone has logged on to the router's SMT interface.
SMT Login Fail
WEB Login Successfully
Someone has failed to log on to the router's SMT interface.
Someone has logged on to the router's WebGUI interface.
WEB Login Fail Someone has failed to log on to the router's
WebGUI interface.
TELNET Login Successfully Someone has logged on to the router through
Telnet.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
414 Appendix B Log Descriptions
Table 121 System Maintenance Logs
Log Message Description
TELNET Login Fail
FTP Login Successfully
Someone has failed to log on to the router through
Telnet.
Someone has logged on to the router through FTP.
FTP Login Fail Someone has failed to log on to the router through
FTP.
NAT Session Table is Full!
The maximum number of SUA/NAT session table entries has been exceeded and the table is full.
Table 122 UPnP Logs
Log Message Description
UPnP pass through Firewall UPnP packets can pass through the firewall.
Table 123 Content Filtering Logs
Category
URLFOR
Log Message
IP/Domain Name
URLBLK
JAVBLK
IP/Domain Name
IP/Domain Name
Description
The BCM50a Integrated Router allows access to this IP address or domain name and forwarded traffic addressed to the IP address or domain name.
The BCM50a Integrated Router blocked access to this IP address or domain name due to a forbidden keyword. All
Web traffic is disabled except for trusted domains, untrusted domains, or the cybernot list.
The BCM50a Integrated Router blocked access to this IP address or domain name because of a forbidden service such as: ActiveX, a Java applet, a cookie, or a proxy.
Table 124 Attack Logs
Log Message attack TCP attack UDP attack IGMP
Description
The firewall detected a TCP attack.
The firewall detected an UDP attack.
The firewall detected an IGMP attack.
N0115790
Appendix B Log Descriptions 415
Table 124 Attack Logs
Log Message Description attack ESP attack GRE
The firewall detected an ESP attack.
The firewall detected a GRE attack.
attack OSPF The firewall detected an OSPF attack.
attack ICMP (type:%d, code:%d)
The firewall detected an ICMP attack; see the section about ICMP messages for type and code details.
land TCP land UDP land IGMP land ESP
The firewall detected a TCP land attack.
The firewall detected an UDP land attack.
The firewall detected an IGMP land attack.
The firewall detected an ESP land attack.
land GRE land OSPF land ICMP (type:%d, code:%d)
The firewall detected a GRE land attack.
The firewall detected an OSPF land attack.
The firewall detected an ICMP land attack; see the section about ICMP messages for type and code details.
ip spoofing - WAN TCP The firewall detected a TCP IP spoofing attack on the
WAN port.
ip spoofing - WAN UDP The firewall detected an UDP IP spoofing attack on the
WAN port.
ip spoofing - WAN
IGMP
The firewall detected an IGMP IP spoofing attack on the
WAN port.
ip spoofing - WAN ESP The firewall detected an ESP IP spoofing attack on the
WAN port.
ip spoofing - WAN GRE The firewall detected a GRE IP spoofing attack on the
WAN port.
ip spoofing - WAN
OSPF
The firewall detected an OSPF IP spoofing attack on the
WAN port.
ip spoofing - WAN
ICMP (type:%d, code:%d)
The firewall detected an ICMP IP spoofing attack on the
WAN port. icmp echo ICMP
(type:%d, code:%d)
The firewall detected an ICMP echo attack. syn flood TCP ports scan TCP teardrop TCP teardrop UDP
The firewall detected a TCP syn flood attack.
The firewall detected a TCP port scan attack.
The firewall detected a TCP teardrop attack.
The firewall detected an UDP teardrop attack.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
416 Appendix B Log Descriptions
Table 124 Attack Logs
Log Message teardrop ICMP
(type:%d, code:%d) illegal command TCP
NetBIOS TCP ip spoofing - no routing entry TCP ip spoofing - no routing entry UDP ip spoofing - no routing entry IGMP ip spoofing - no routing entry ESP ip spoofing - no routing entry GRE ip spoofing - no routing entry OSPF ip spoofing - no routing entry ICMP
(type:%d, code:%d) vulnerability ICMP
(type:%d, code:%d) traceroute ICMP
(type:%d, code:%d)
Description
The firewall detected an ICMP teardrop attack.
The firewall detected a TCP illegal command attack.
The firewall detected a TCP NetBIOS attack.
The firewall detected a TCP IP spoofing attack while the
BCM50a Integrated Router did not have a default route.
The firewall detected an UDP IP spoofing attack while the
BCM50a Integrated Router did not have a default route.
The firewall detected an IGMP IP spoofing attack while the
BCM50a Integrated Router did not have a default route.
The firewall detected an ESP IP spoofing attack while the
BCM50a Integrated Router did not have a default route.
The firewall detected a GRE IP spoofing attack while the
BCM50a Integrated Router did not have a default route.
The firewall detected an OSPF IP spoofing attack while the
BCM50a Integrated Router did not have a default route.
The firewall detected an ICMP IP spoofing attack while the
BCM50a Integrated Router did not have a default route.
The firewall detected an ICMP vulnerability attack.
The firewall detected an ICMP traceroute attack.
For type and code details, see Table 127 .
Table 125 Access Logs
Log Message
Firewall default policy: TCP (set:%d)
Firewall default policy: UDP (set:%d)
Description
TCP access matched the default policy of the listed ACL set and the BCM50a Integrated Router blocked or forwarded it according to the configuration of the ACL set.
UDP access matched the default policy of the listed ACL set and the BCM50a Integrated Router blocked or forwarded it according to the configuration of the ACL set.
N0115790
Appendix B Log Descriptions 417
Table 125 Access Logs
Log Message Description
Firewall default policy: ICMP (set:%d, type:%d, code:%d)
ICMP access matched the default policy of the listed ACL set and the BCM50a Integrated Router blocked or forwarded it according to the configuration of the ACL set.
Firewall default policy: IGMP (set:%d)
IGMP access matched the default policy of the listed ACL set and the BCM50a Integrated Router blocked or forwarded it according to the configuration of the ACL set.
Firewall default policy: ESP (set:%d)
Firewall default policy: GRE (set:%d)
ESP access matched the default policy of the listed ACL set and the BCM50a Integrated Router blocked or forwarded it according to the configuration of the ACL set.
GRE access matched the default policy of the listed ACL set and the BCM50a Integrated Router blocked or forwarded it according to the configuration of the ACL set.
Firewall default policy: OSPF (set:%d)
OSPF access matched the default policy of the listed ACL set and the BCM50a Integrated Router blocked or forwarded it according to the configuration of the ACL set.
Firewall default policy: (set:%d)
Access matched the default policy of the listed ACL set and the BCM50a Integrated Router blocked or forwarded it according to the configuration of the ACL set.
Firewall rule match:
TCP (set:%d, rule:%d)
TCP access matched the listed firewall rule and the
BCM50a Integrated Router blocked or forwarded it according to the configuration of the rule.
Firewall rule match:
UDP (set:%d, rule:%d)
UDP access matched the listed firewall rule and the
BCM50a Integrated Router blocked or forwarded it according to the configuration of the rule.
Firewall rule match:
ICMP (set:%d, rule:%d, type:%d, code:%d)
ICMP access matched the listed firewall rule and the
BCM50a Integrated Router blocked or forwarded it according to the configuration of the rule.
Firewall rule match:
IGMP (set:%d, rule:%d)
IGMP access matched the listed firewall rule and the
BCM50a Integrated Router blocked or forwarded it according to the configuration of the rule.
Firewall rule match:
ESP (set:%d, rule:%d)
ESP access matched the listed firewall rule and the
BCM50a Integrated Router blocked or forwarded it according to the configuration of the rule.
Firewall rule match:
GRE (set:%d, rule:%d)
GRE access matched the listed firewall rule and the
BCM50a Integrated Router blocked or forwarded it according to the configuration of the rule.
Firewall rule match:
OSPF (set:%d, rule:%d)
OSPF access matched the listed a firewall rule and the
BCM50a Integrated Router blocked or forwarded it according to the configuration of the rule.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
418 Appendix B Log Descriptions
Table 125 Access Logs
Log Message Description
Firewall rule match:
(set:%d, rule:%d)
Access matched the listed firewall rule and the BCM50a
Integrated Router blocked or forwarded it according to the configuration of the rule.
Firewall rule NOT match: TCP (set:%d, rule:%d)
TCP access did not match the listed firewall rule and the
BCM50a Integrated Router logged it.
Firewall rule NOT match: UDP (set:%d, rule:%d)
UDP access did not match the listed firewall rule and the
BCM50a Integrated Router logged it.
Firewall rule NOT match: ICMP (set:%d, rule:%d, type:%d, code:%d)
ICMP access did not match the listed firewall rule and the
BCM50a Integrated Router logged it.
Firewall rule NOT match: IGMP (set:%d, rule:%d)
IGMP access did not match the listed firewall rule and the
BCM50a Integrated Router logged it.
Firewall rule NOT match: ESP (set:%d, rule:%d)
ESP access did not match the listed firewall rule and the
BCM50a Integrated Router logged it.
Firewall rule NOT match: GRE (set:%d, rule:%d)
GRE ac access did not match the listed firewall rule and the BCM50a Integrated Router logged it.
Firewall rule NOT match: OSPF (set:%d, rule:%d)
OSPF access did not match the listed firewall rule and the
BCM50a Integrated Router logged it.
Firewall rule NOT match: (set:%d, rule:%d)
Access did not match the listed firewall rule and the
BCM50a Integrated Router logged it.
Filter default policy
DROP!
TCP access matched a default filter policy and the
BCM50a Integrated Router dropped the packet to block access.
Filter default policy
DROP!
UDP access matched a default filter policy and the
BCM50a Integrated Router dropped the packet to block access.
Filter default policy
DROP!
ICMP access matched a default filter policy and the
BCM50a Integrated Router dropped the packet to block access.
Filter default policy
DROP!
Access matched a default filter policy and the BCM50a
Integrated Router dropped the packet to block access.
N0115790
Appendix B Log Descriptions 419
Table 125 Access Logs
Log Message Description
Filter default policy
DROP!
Access matched a default filter policy (denied LAN IP) and the BCM50a Integrated Router dropped the packet to block access.
Filter default policy
FORWARD!
TCP access matched a default filter policy. Access was allowed and the router forwarded the packet.
Filter default policy
FORWARD!
UDP access matched a default filter policy. Access was allowed and the router forwarded the packet.
Filter default policy
FORWARD!
ICMP access matched a default filter policy. Access was allowed and the router forwarded the packet.
Filter default policy
FORWARD!
Access matched a default filter policy. Access was allowed and the router forwarded the packet.
Filter default policy
FORWARD!
Access matched a default filter policy (denied LAN IP).
Access was allowed and the router forwarded the packet.
Filter match DROP
<set %d/rule %d>
TCP access matched the listed filter rule and the BCM50a
Integrated Router dropped the packet to block access.
Filter match DROP
<set %d/rule %d>
UDP access matched the listed filter rule and the BCM50a
Integrated Router dropped the packet to block access.
Filter match DROP
<set %d/rule %d>
ICMP access matched the listed filter rule and the BCM50a
Integrated Router dropped the packet to block access.
Filter match DROP
<set %d/rule %d>
Access matched the listed filter rule and the BCM50a
Integrated Router dropped the packet to block access.
Filter match DROP
<set %d/rule %d>
Access matched the listed filter rule (denied LAN IP) and the BCM50a Integrated Router dropped the packet to block access.
Filter match FORWARD
<set %d/rule %d>
TCP access matched the listed filter rule. Access was allowed and the router forwarded the packet.
Filter match FORWARD
<set %d/rule %d>
UDP access matched the listed filter rule. Access was allowed and the router forwarded the packet.
Filter match FORWARD
<set %d/rule %d>
ICMP access matched the listed filter rule. Access was allowed and the router forwarded the packet.
Filter match FORWARD
<set %d/rule %d>
Access matched the listed filter rule. Access was allowed and the router forwarded the packet.
Filter match FORWARD
<set %d/rule %d>
Access matched the listed filter rule (denied LAN IP).
Access was allowed and the router forwarded the packet.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
420 Appendix B Log Descriptions
Table 125 Access Logs
Log Message Description
(set:%d)
(rule:%d)
With firewall messages, this is the number of the ACL policy set and denotes the packet's direction (see
With filter messages, this is the number of the filter set.
With firewall messages, the firewall rule number denotes the number of a firewall rule within an ACL policy set.With filter messages, this is the number of an individual filter rule.
Router sent blocked web site message
Triangle route packet forwarded
The firewall allowed a triangle route session to pass through.
Firewall sent TCP packet in response to
DoS attack
The firewall detected a DoS attack and sent a TCP packets in response.
Firewall sent TCP reset packets
The firewall sent out TCP reset packets.
Packet without a NAT table entry blocked
The router blocked a packet that did not have a corresponding SUA/NAT table entry.
Out of order TCP handshake packet blocked
The router blocked a TCP handshake packet that came out of the proper order.
Drop unsupported/ out-of-order ICMP
Router sent ICMP response packet
(type:%d, code:%d)
The BCM50a Integrated Router generates this log after it drops an ICMP packet due to one of the following two reasons:
1. The BCM50a Integrated Router does not support the
ICMP packet's protocol.
2. The ICMP packet is an echo reply for which there was no corresponding echo request.
The router sent an ICMP response packet. This packet automatically bypasses the firewall.
N0115790
Appendix B Log Descriptions 421
For type and code details, see Table 127 .
Table 126 ACL Setting Notes
ACL Set
Number
1
Direction
LAN to WAN
2
7
8
WAN to LAN
LAN to LAN/BCM50a
Integrated Router
WAN to WAN/BCM50a
Integrated Router
Description
ACL set 1 for packets traveling from the
LAN to the WAN.
ACL set 2 for packets traveling from the
WAN to the LAN.
ACL set 7 for packets traveling from the
LAN to the LAN or the BCM50a
Integrated Router.
ACL set 8 for packets traveling from the
WAN to the WAN or the BCM50a
Integrated Router.
Table 127 ICMP Notes
Type
0
3
4
5
Code
0
0
1
2
2
3
0
1
4
5
0
Description
Echo reply
Echo reply message
Destination unreachable
Net unreachable
Host unreachable
Protocol unreachable
Port unreachable
A packet that needed fragmentation was dropped because the packet was set to Don't Fragment (DF)
Source route failed
Source quench
A gateway discard internet datagrams if it does not have the buffer space needed to queue the datagrams for output to the next network on the route to the destination network.
Redirect
Redirect datagrams for the Network
Redirect datagrams for the Host
Redirect datagrams for the Type of service and network
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
422 Appendix B Log Descriptions
Table 127 ICMP Notes
Type
8
11
12
13
14
15
16
0
1
Code
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
Description
Redirect datagrams for the Type of service and host
Echo
Echo message
Time exceeded
Time to live exceeded in transit
Fragment reassembly time exceeded
Parameter problem
Pointer indicates the error
Timestamp
Timestamp request message
Timestamp reply
Timestamp reply message
Information request
Information request message
Information reply
Information reply message
Table 128 Sys log
LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION
Mon dd hr:mm:ss hostname src="<srcIP:srcPort>" dst="<dstIP:dstPort>" msg="<msg>" note="<note>
This message is sent by the RAS when this syslog is generated. The messages and notes are defined in this appendix.
VPN/IPSec Logs
To view the IPSec and IKE connection log, type 3 in menu 27 and press
[ENTER] to display the IPSec log, as shown in
Figure 182
, which shows a typical log from the initiator of a VPN connection.
N0115790
Appendix B Log Descriptions 423
Figure 182 Example VPN Initiator IPSec Log
Index: Date/Time: Log:
------------------------------------------------------------
001 01 Jan 08:02:22 Send Main Mode request to <192.168.100.101>
002 01 Jan 08:02:22 Send:<SA>
003 01 Jan 08:02:22 Recv:<SA>
004 01 Jan 08:02:24 Send:<KE><NONCE>
005 01 Jan 08:02:24 Recv:<KE><NONCE>
006 01 Jan 08:02:26 Send:<ID><HASH>
007 01 Jan 08:02:26 Recv:<ID><HASH>
008 01 Jan 08:02:26 Phase 1 IKE SA process done
009 01 Jan 08:02:26 Start Phase 2: Quick Mode
010 01 Jan 08:02:26 Send:<HASH><SA><NONCE><ID><ID>
011 01 Jan 08:02:26 Recv:<HASH><SA><NONCE><ID><ID>
012 01 Jan 08:02:26 Send:<HASH>
Clear IPSec Log (y/n):
VPN Responder IPSec Log
Figure 183
shows a typical log from the VPN connection peer.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
424 Appendix B Log Descriptions
Figure 183 Example VPN Responder IPSec Log
Index: Date/Time: Log:
------------------------------------------------------------
001 01 Jan 08:08:07 Recv Main Mode request from <192.168.100.100>
002 01 Jan 08:08:07 Recv:<SA>
003 01 Jan 08:08:08 Send:<SA>
004 01 Jan 08:08:08 Recv:<KE><NONCE>
005 01 Jan 08:08:10 Send:<KE><NONCE>
006 01 Jan 08:08:10 Recv:<ID><HASH>
007 01 Jan 08:08:10 Send:<ID><HASH>
008 01 Jan 08:08:10 Phase 1 IKE SA process done
009 01 Jan 08:08:10 Recv:<HASH><SA><NONCE><ID><ID>
010 01 Jan 08:08:10 Start Phase 2: Quick Mode
011 01 Jan 08:08:10 Send:<HASH><SA><NONCE><ID><ID>
012 01 Jan 08:08:10 Recv:<HASH>
Clear IPSec Log (y/n):
This menu is useful for troubleshooting your BCM50a Integrated Router.
A log index number, the date and time the log was created, and a log message are displayed.
Note: Double exclamation marks (!!) denote an error or warning message.
Table 129
shows sample log messages during IKE key exchange.
Note: A PYLD_MALFORMED packet usually means that the two ends of the VPN tunnel are not using the same preshared key.
N0115790
Appendix B Log Descriptions 425
Table 129 Sample IKE Key Exchange Logs
Log Message Description
Send <Symbol> Mode request to <IP>Send
<Symbol> Mode request to
<IP>
The BCM50a Integrated Router started negotiation with the peer.
Recv <Symbol> Mode request from <IP>Recv
<Symbol> Mode request from <IP>
The BCM50a Integrated Router received an IKE negotiation request from the peer.
Recv:<Symbol> IKE uses the ISAKMP protocol (refer to RFC 2408 –
ISAKMP) to transmit data. Each ISAKMP packet contains payloads of different types that show in the log (
Phase 1 negotiation finished. Phase 1 IKE SA process done
Start Phase 2: Quick Mode Phase 2 negotiation begins using Quick Mode.
!! IKE Negotiation is in process
The BCM50a Integrated Router has begun negotiation with the peer for the connection, but the
IKE key exchange has not completed.
!! Duplicate requests with the same cookie
!! No proposal chosen
The BCM50a Integrated Router received multiple requests from the same peer but is still processing the first IKE packet from that peer.
The parameters configured for Phase 1 or Phase 2 negotiations do not match. Check all protocols and settings for these phases. For example, one party uses 3DES encryption, but the other party uses DES encryption, so the connection fails.
!! Verifying Local ID failed!! Verifying Remote
ID failed
During IKE Phase 2 negotiation, both parties exchange policy details, including local and remote
IP address ranges. If these ranges differ, the connection fails.
!! Local / remote IPs of incoming request conflict with rule <#d>
If the security gateway is “0.0.0.0”, the BCM50a
Integrated Router uses the peer “Local Addr” as its
“Remote Addr”. If this IP (range) conflicts with a previously configured rule, the connection is not allowed.
!! Invalid IP <IP start>/
<IP end>
The peer “Local IP Addr” range is invalid.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
426 Appendix B Log Descriptions
Table 129 Sample IKE Key Exchange Logs
Log Message Description
!! Remote IP <IP start> /
<IP end> conflicts
If the security gateway is “0.0.0.0”, the BCM50a
Integrated Router uses the peer “Local Addr” as its
“Remote Addr”. If a peer “Local Addr” range conflicts with other connections, the BCM50a Integrated
Router does not accept VPN connection requests from this peer.
!! Active connection allowed exceeded
The BCM50a Integrated Router limits the number of simultaneous Phase 2 SA negotiations. The IKE key exchange process fails if this limit is exceeded.
!! IKE Packet Retransmit The BCM50a Integrated Router did not receive a response from the peer and retransmits the last packet sent.
!! Failed to send IKE
Packet
The BCM50a Integrated Router cannot send IKE packets due to a network error.
!! Too many errors!
Deleting SA
The BCM50a Integrated Router deletes an SA when too many errors occur.
!! Phase 1 ID type mismatch
The ID type of an incoming packet does not match the local's peer ID type.
!! Phase 1 ID content mismatch
The ID content of an incoming packet does not match the local's peer ID content.
!! No known phase 1 ID type found
The ID type of an incoming packet does not match any known ID type.
Peer ID: IP address type
<IP address> vs. My Remote <IP address>
The IP address type or IP address of an incoming packet does not match the peer IP address type or IP address configured on the local router. The log displays the IP address type and IP address of the incoming packet.
The IP address type or IP address of an incoming packet does not match the peer IP address type or IP address configured on the local router. The log displays the configured remote IP address type or IP address for this router that the incoming packet did not match.
vs. My Local <IP address> The IP address type or IP address of an incoming packet does not match the peer IP address type or IP address configured on the local router. The log displays the configured local IP address type or IP address that the incoming packet did not match.
N0115790
Appendix B Log Descriptions 427
Table 129 Sample IKE Key Exchange Logs
Log Message
-> <symbol>
Error ID Info
Description
The router sent a payload type of IKE packet.
The parameters configured for Phase 1 ID content do not match or the parameters configured for the
Phase 2 ID (IP address of single, range, or subnet) do not match. Check all protocols and settings for these phases.
Table 130
shows sample log messages during packet transmission.
Table 130 Sample IPSec Logs During Packet Transmission
LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION
!! WAN IP changed to <IP>
!! Cannot find IPSec SA
!! Cannot find outbound SA for rule <%d>
If the BCM50a Integrated Router WAN IP changes, all configured My IP Addr change to
0.0.0.0. If this field is configured as 0.0.0.0, the
BCM50a Integrated Router uses the current
BCM50a Integrated Router WAN IP address
(static or dynamic) to set up the VPN tunnel.
The BCM50a Integrated Router cannot find a phase 2 SA that corresponds with the SPI of an inbound packet (from the peer); the packet is dropped.
The packet matches the rule index number (#d), but Phase 1 or Phase 2 negotiation for outbound
(from the VPN initiator) traffic is not finished yet.
!! Discard REPLAY packet
Rule <#d> idle time out, disconnect
The BCM50a Integrated Router discards any packets received with the wrong sequence number.
!! Inbound packet authentication failed
The authentication configuration settings are incorrect. Check them.
!! Inbound packet decryption failed
The decryption configuration settings are incorrect. Check them.
If an SA has no packets transmitted for a period of time (configurable through CI command), the
BCM50a Integrated Router drops the connection.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
428 Appendix B Log Descriptions
Table 131
shows RFC 2408 ISAKMP payload types that the log displays.
Refer to RFC 2408 for detailed information about each type.
Table 131 RFC 2408 ISAKMP Payload Types
Log Display
SA
PROP
TRANS
KE
ID
CER
CER_REQ
HASH
SIG
NONCE
NOTFY
DEL
VID
Payload Type
Security Association
Proposal
Transform
Key Exchange
Identification
Certificate
Certificate Request
Hash
Signature
Nonce
Notification
Delete
Vendor ID
Table 132 PKI Logs
Log Message
Enrollment successful
Enrollment failed
Description
The SCEP online certificate enrollment succeeded. The
Destination field records the certification authority server IP address and port.
The SCEP online certificate enrollment failed. The
Destination field records the certification authority server IP address and port.
The SCEP online certificate enrollment failed because the certification authority server address cannot be resolved.
Failed to resolve
<SCEP CA server url>
Enrollment successful
Enrollment failed
The CMP online certificate enrollment was succeeded. The
Destination field records the certification authority server IP address and port.
The CMP online certificate enrollment failed. The Destination field records the certification authority server IP address and port.
N0115790
Appendix B Log Descriptions 429
Table 132 PKI Logs
Log Message Description
Failed to resolve
<CMP CA server url>
The CMP online certificate enrollment failed because the certification authority server IP address cannot be resolved.
Rcvd ca cert:
<subject name>
Rcvd user cert:
<subject name>
The router received a certification authority certificate, with subject name as recorded, from the LDAP server whose IP address and port are recorded in the Source field.
The router received a user certificate, with subject name as recorded, from the LDAP server whose IP address and port are recorded in the Source field.
Rcvd CRL <size>:
<issuer name>
Rcvd ARL <size>:
<issuer name>
Failed to decode the received ca cert
The router received a CRL (Certificate Revocation List), with size and issuer name as recorded, from the LDAP server whose IP address and port are recorded in the Source field.
The router received an ARL (Authority Revocation List), with size and issuer name as recorded, from the LDAP server whose address and port are recorded in the Source field.
The router received a corrupted certification authority certificate from the LDAP server whose address and port are recorded in the Source field.
Failed to decode the received user cert
The router received a corrupted user certificate from the
LDAP server whose address and port are recorded in the
Source field.
Failed to decode the received CRL
Failed to decode the received ARL
Due to <reason codes>, cert not trusted: <subject name>
The router received a corrupted CRL (Certificate Revocation
List) from the LDAP server whose address and port are recorded in the Source field.
The router received a corrupted ARL (Authority Revocation
List) from the LDAP server whose address and port are recorded in the Source field.
Rcvd data <size> too large! Max size allowed: <max size>
The router received directory data that was too large (the size is listed) from the LDAP server whose address and port are recorded in the Source field. The maximum size of directory data that the router allows is also recorded.
Cert trusted:
<subject name>
The router has verified the path of the certificate with the listed subject name.
Due to the reasons listed, the certificate with the listed subject name did not pass the path verification. The recorded reason codes are only approximate reasons for not trusting the certificate. See
for the corresponding descriptions of the codes.
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
430 Appendix B Log Descriptions
Table 133 Certificate Path Verification Failure Reason Codes
21
22
23
24
17
18
19
20
25
26
27
28
13
14
15
16
9
10
11
12
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
Code Description
Algorithm mismatch between the certificate and the search constraints.
Key usage mismatch between the certificate and the search constraints.
Certificate was not valid in the time interval.
(Not used)
Certificate is not valid.
Certificate signature was not verified correctly.
Certificate was revoked by a CRL.
Certificate was not added to the cache.
Certificate decoding failed.
Certificate was not found (anywhere).
Certificate chain looped (did not find trusted root).
Certificate contains critical extension that was not handled.
Certificate issuer was not valid (CA specific information missing).
(Not used)
CRL is too old.
CRL is not valid.
CRL signature was not verified correctly.
CRL was not found (anywhere).
CRL was not added to the cache.
CRL decoding failed.
CRL is not currently valid, but in the future.
CRL contains duplicate serial numbers.
Time interval is not continuous.
Time information not available.
Database method failed due to timeout.
Database method failed.
Path was not verified.
Maximum path length reached.
N0115790
Appendix B Log Descriptions 431
Log Commands
Go to the command interpreter interface (the Command Interpreter
Appendix explains how to access and use the commands).
Configuring what you want the BCM50a Integrated Router to log
Use the sys logs load command to load the log setting buffer that allows you to configure which logs the BCM50a Integrated Router is to record.
Use sys logs category followed by a log category and a parameter to decide what to record.
Table 134 Log categories and available settings
Log Categories access attack error ike ipsec javablocked mten upnp urlblocked urlforward
Available Parameters
0, 1, 2, 3
0, 1, 2, 3
0, 1, 2, 3
0, 1, 2, 3
0, 1, 2, 3
0, 1, 2, 3
0, 1
0, 1
0, 1, 2, 3
0, 1
Use 0 to record no logs for a selected category, 1 to record only logs a selected category, 2 to record only alerts for a selected category, and 3 to record both logs and alerts for a selected category.
Use the sys logs save command to store the settings in the BCM50a
Integrated Router (you must do this in order to record logs).
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
432 Appendix B Log Descriptions
Displaying Logs
Use the sys logs display command to show all of the logs in the BCM50a
Integrated Router log.
Use the sys logs category display command to show the log settings for all of the log categories.
Use the sys logs display [log category] command to show the logs in an individual BCM50a Integrated Router log category.
Use the sys logs clear command to erase all of the BCM50a Integrated
Router logs.
N0115790
Appendix B Log Descriptions 433
Log Command Example
This example shows how to set the BCM50a Integrated Router to record the access logs and alerts and then view the results.
ras> sys logs load ras> sys logs category access 3 ras> sys logs save ras> sys logs display access
# .time source destination notes
message
0|11/11/2002 15:10:12 |172.22.3.80:137 |172.22.255.255:137 |ACCESS
BLOCK
Firewall default policy: UDP(set:8)
1|11/11/2002 15:10:12 |172.21.4.17:138 |172.21.255.255:138 |ACCESS
BLOCK
Firewall default policy: UDP(set:8)
2|11/11/2002 15:10:11 |172.17.2.1 |224.0.1.60 |ACCESS BLOCK
Firewall default policy: IGMP(set:8)
3|11/11/2002 15:10:11 |172.22.3.80:137 |172.22.255.255:137 |ACCESS
BLOCK
Firewall default policy: UDP(set:8)
4|11/11/2002 15:10:10 |192.168.10.1:520 |192.168.10.255:520 |ACCESS
BLOCK
Firewall default policy: UDP(set:8)
5|11/11/2002 15:10:10 |172.21.4.67:137 |172.21.255.255:137 |ACCESS
BLOCK
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
434 Appendix B Log Descriptions
N0115790
Index
Numbers
A
Action for Matched Packets 172
Administrator Inactivity Timer 77
Allow Through IPSec Tunnel 239
Application-level Firewalls 146
435
Autonegotiating 10/100 Mb/s Ethernet LAN 34
Autosensing 10/100 Mb/s Ethernet LAN 34
B
Bandwidth Management Statistics 300
Bandwidth Manager Class Configuration 297
Bandwidth Manager Class Setup 295
Branch Tunnel NAT Address Mapping Rule 224
Broadcast Dial Backup Route 116
Brute Force Password Guessing Protection 35
C
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
436 Index
Maximum Number of Schedule Sets 373, 377
Calling Line Identification 119
Client IKE Source Port Switching 249
Client Termination IP Pool 246
Contivity VPN Client Software 34, 240
Custom Ports
D
Denial of Service 147, 148, 182, 183
N0115790
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) 38
DNS Server
DoS
Dynamic DNS Service Provider 80
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol 89
E
Encapsulating Security Payload 196
F
Guidelines For Enhancing Security 158
Rule Security Ramifications 163
Index 437
G
H
I
ICMP Commands That Trigger Alerts 152
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
438 Index
Internet Assigned Number Authority (IANA) 51
Internet Assigned Numbers Authority 52
Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) 151
Internet Group Multicast Protocol 91, 109
Internet Group Management Protocol
ISAKMP Initial Contact Payload 250
J
K
Key Fields For Configuring Rules 164
L
N0115790
M
MAC Encapsulated Routing Link Protocol 47
Management Information Base (MIB) 340
Many-to-Many Overload 133, 134
Multiprotocol Encapsulation 48
N
NAT 53, 107, 115, 127, 128, 129, 130
NAT Traversal 249, 347, 348, 349
Network Address Translation 53, 107, 115
Network Address Translation (NAT) 37
O
P
Index 439
Packet Filtering Firewalls 146
Point to Point Protocol over ATM Adaptation
Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet 102
Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol 128
Predefined NTP Time Server List 83
Proportional Bandwidth Allocation 292
publications
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
440 Index
R
reinitialize the ADSL line 386
Remote Management Limitations 315
Routing Information Protocol 90
Source and Destination Addresses 173
N0115790
S
Schedule Sets
Secure FTP Using SSH Example 335
Secure Telnet Using SSH Example 333
SNMP (Simple Network Management
Source & Destination Addresses 173
Stateful Inspection 35, 145, 146, 153, 154, 155
T
TCP Maximum Incomplete 183, 184, 185
Index 441
Trigger Port Forwarding
U
Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) 347, 349
V
Virtual Channel Identifier (VCI) 49
Virtual Path Identifier (VPI) 49
W
BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration — Basics
442 Index
N0115790
advertisement
* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project
Related manuals
advertisement
Table of contents
- 3 Contents
- 17 Figures
- 23 Tables
- 27 Preface
- 27 Before you begin
- 27 Text conventions
- 28 Related publications
- 28 Hard copy technical manuals
- 28 How to get Help
- 29 Getting Help from the Nortel Web site
- 29 Getting Help over the phone from a Nortel Solutions Center
- 29 Getting Help from a specialist by using an Express Routing Code
- 30 Getting Help through a Nortel distributor or reseller
- 31 Getting to know your BCM50a Integrated Router
- 31 Introducing the BCM50a Integrated Router
- 31 Features
- 32 Physical features
- 34 Nonphysical features
- 39 Applications for the BCM50a Integrated Router
- 39 Secure broadband internet access and VPN
- 41 Introducing the WebGUI
- 41 WebGUI overview
- 41 Accessing the BCM50a Integrated Router WebGUI
- 44 Restoring the factory-default configuration settings
- 44 Navigating the BCM50a Integrated Router WebGUI
- 47 Wizard setup
- 47 Wizard overview
- 47 Encapsulation
- 47 ENET ENCAP
- 48 PPP over Ethernet
- 48 PPPoA
- 48 RFC 1483
- 48 Multiplexing
- 49 VC-based multiplexing
- 49 LLC-based multiplexing
- 49 VPI and VCI
- 49 Wizard setup configuration: first screen
- 51 IP address and subnet mask
- 51 IP address assignment
- 52 IP assignment with PPPoA or PPPoE encapsulation
- 52 IP assignment with RFC 1483 encapsulation
- 52 IP assignment with ENET ENCAP encapsulation
- 52 Private IP addresses
- 53 Nailed-up connection (only with PPP)
- 53 NAT
- 53 Wizard setup configuration: second screen
- 59 DHCP setup
- 59 IP pool setup
- 59 Wizard setup configuration: third screen
- 63 Wizard setup configuration: connection tests
- 63 Test your Internet connection
- 65 User Notes
- 65 General Notes
- 68 Advanced Router Configuration
- 75 System screens
- 75 System overview
- 75 DNS overview
- 75 Private DNS server
- 76 Configuring General Setup
- 79 Dynamic DNS
- 79 DYNDNS wildcard
- 79 Configuring Dynamic DNS
- 81 Configuring Password
- 83 Predefined NTP time server list
- 84 Configuring Time and Date
- 88 ALG
- 88 Configuring ALG
- 89 LAN screens
- 89 LAN overview
- 89 DHCP setup
- 89 IP pool setup
- 90 DNS servers
- 90 LAN TCP/IP
- 90 Factory LAN defaults
- 90 RIP setup
- 91 Multicast
- 92 Configuring IP
- 95 Configuring Static DHCP
- 97 Configuring IP Alias
- 99 WAN screens
- 99 WAN overview
- 99 TCP/IP Priority (metric)
- 100 Configuring General
- 102 PPPoE encapsulation
- 103 Configuring WAN ISP
- 105 Configuring WAN IP
- 109 Traffic redirect
- 111 Configuring Traffic Redirect
- 112 Configuring Dial Backup
- 117 Advanced Modem Setup
- 117 AT Command Strings
- 117 DTR Signal
- 117 Response Strings
- 118 Configuring Advanced Modem Setup
- 121 Network Address Translation (NAT) Screens
- 121 NAT overview
- 121 NAT definitions
- 122 What NAT does
- 123 How NAT works
- 124 NAT application
- 125 NAT mapping types
- 126 Using NAT
- 126 SUA (Single User Account) versus NAT
- 127 SUA Server
- 127 Default server IP address
- 128 Port forwarding: Services and Port Numbers
- 128 Configuring servers behind SUA (example)
- 129 Configuring SUA Server
- 131 Configuring Address Mapping
- 135 Trigger Port Forwarding
- 135 Trigger Port Forwarding example
- 136 Two points to remember about Trigger Ports
- 137 Configuring Trigger Port Forwarding
- 139 Static Route screens
- 139 Static Route overview
- 140 Configuring IP Static Route
- 142 Configuring Route entry
- 145 Firewalls
- 145 Firewall overview
- 145 Types of firewalls
- 146 Packet filtering firewalls
- 146 Application level firewalls
- 146 Stateful Inspection firewalls
- 147 Introduction to the BCM50a Integrated Router firewall
- 148 Denial of Service
- 148 Basics
- 149 Types of DoS attacks
- 153 Stateful inspection
- 154 Stateful inspection process
- 155 Stateful inspection and the BCM50a Integrated Router
- 156 TCP security
- 157 UDP/ICMP security
- 157 Upper layer protocols
- 158 Guidelines for enhancing security with your firewall
- 158 Packet filtering vs. firewall
- 159 Packet filtering:
- 159 Firewall
- 161 Firewall screens
- 161 Access methods
- 161 Firewall policies overview
- 163 Rule logic overview
- 163 Rule checklist
- 163 Security ramifications
- 164 Key fields for configuring rules
- 164 Connection direction examples
- 165 LAN to WAN rules
- 166 WAN to LAN rules
- 166 Configuring firewall
- 170 Configuring firewall rules
- 173 Configuring source and destination addresses
- 174 Configuring custom ports
- 175 Example firewall rule
- 178 Predefined services
- 181 Alerts
- 182 Configuring attack alert
- 182 Threshold values
- 182 Half-open sessions
- 187 Content filtering
- 187 Introduction to content filtering
- 187 Restrict web features
- 187 Days and Times
- 188 Configure Content Filtering
- 191 VPN
- 191 VPN
- 191 IPSec
- 191 BCM50a Integrated Router VPN functions
- 192 VPN screens overview
- 193 Other terminology
- 193 VPN applications
- 194 IPSec architecture
- 195 IPSec algorithms
- 196 AH (Authentication Header) protocol
- 196 ESP (Encapsulating Security Payload) protocol
- 197 Key management
- 198 Encapsulation
- 198 Transport mode
- 199 Tunnel mode
- 199 IPSec and NAT
- 200 Secure Gateway Address
- 201 Dynamic Secure Gateway Address
- 201 Summary screen
- 204 Keep Alive
- 204 Nailed up
- 205 NAT Traversal
- 206 NAT Traversal configuration
- 206 Preshared key
- 206 Configuring Contivity Client VPN Rule Setup
- 208 Configuring Advanced Setup
- 210 ID Type and content
- 211 ID type and content examples
- 212 My IP Address
- 213 Configuring Branch Office VPN Rule Setup
- 222 Configuring an IP Policy
- 228 Port forwarding server
- 228 Configuring a port forwarding server
- 230 IKE phases
- 232 Negotiation Mode
- 232 Preshared key
- 233 Diffie-Hellman (DH) Key Groups
- 233 Perfect Forward Secrecy (PFS)
- 233 Configuring advanced Branch office setup
- 237 SA Monitor
- 239 Global settings
- 240 VPN Client Termination
- 244 VPN Client Termination IP pool summary
- 246 VPN Client Termination IP pool edit
- 247 VPN Client Termination advanced
- 253 Certificates
- 253 Certificates overview
- 254 Advantages of certificates
- 254 Self-signed certificates
- 255 Configuration summary
- 255 My Certificates
- 258 Certificate file formats
- 259 Importing a certificate
- 261 Creating a certificate
- 265 My Certificate details
- 269 Trusted CAs
- 272 Importing a Trusted CA certificate
- 273 Trusted CA Certificate details
- 277 Trusted remote hosts
- 279 Verifying a certificate of a trusted remote host
- 279 Trusted remote host certificate fingerprints
- 281 Importing a certificate of a trusted remote host
- 282 Trusted remote host certificate details
- 286 Directory servers
- 287 Add or edit a directory server
- 291 Bandwidth management
- 291 Bandwidth management overview
- 292 Bandwidth classes and filters
- 292 Proportional bandwidth allocation
- 292 Application based bandwidth management
- 292 Subnet based bandwidth management
- 293 Application and subnet based bandwidth management
- 293 Reserving bandwidth for nonbandwidth class traffic
- 294 Configuring summary
- 295 Configuring class setup
- 297 Bandwidth Manager Class Configuration
- 300 Bandwidth management statistics
- 302 Monitor
- 303 Authentication server
- 303 Introduction to Local User database
- 303 Local User database
- 305 Edit Local User Database
- 308 Current split networks
- 309 Current split networks edit
- 311 Configuring RADIUS
- 315 Remote management screens
- 315 Remote management overview
- 315 Remote management limitations
- 316 Remote management and NAT
- 316 System timeout
- 317 Introduction to HTTPS
- 318 Configuring WWW
- 320 HTTPS example
- 321 Internet Explorer warning messages
- 321 Netscape Navigator warning messages
- 323 Avoiding the browser warning messages
- 324 Logon screen
- 329 SSH overview
- 330 How SSH works
- 331 SSH implementation on the BCM50a Integrated Router
- 331 Requirements for using SSH
- 331 Configuring SSH
- 333 Secure Telnet using SSH examples
- 333 Example 1: Microsoft Windows
- 334 Example 2: Linux
- 335 Secure FTP using SSH example
- 336 Telnet
- 337 Configuring TELNET
- 338 Configuring FTP
- 339 Configuring SNMP
- 341 Supported MIBs
- 341 SNMP Traps
- 342 REMOTE MANAGEMENT: SNMP
- 343 Configuring DNS
- 344 Configuring Security
- 347 UPnP
- 347 Universal Plug and Play overview
- 347 How do I know if I am using UPnP?
- 347 NAT Traversal
- 348 Cautions with UPnP
- 348 UPnP implementation
- 348 Configuring UPnP
- 350 Displaying UPnP port mapping
- 351 Installing UPnP in Windows example
- 352 Installing UPnP in Windows Me
- 353 Installing UPnP in Windows XP
- 354 Using UPnP in Windows XP example
- 355 Autodiscover Your UPnP-enabled Network Device
- 357 WebGUI easy access
- 359 Logs Screens
- 359 Configuring View Log
- 361 Configuring Log settings
- 364 Configuring Reports
- 367 Viewing Web site hits
- 369 Viewing Protocol/Port
- 370 Viewing LAN IP address
- 372 Reports specifications
- 373 Call scheduling screens
- 373 Call scheduling introduction
- 373 Call schedule summary
- 375 Call scheduling edit
- 377 Applying Schedule Sets to a remote node
- 379 Maintenance
- 379 Maintenance overview
- 379 Status screen
- 381 System statistics
- 383 DHCP Table screen
- 384 Diagnostic Screen
- 386 F/W Upload screen
- 389 Configuration screen
- 389 Back to Factory Defaults
- 390 Backup configuration
- 390 Restore configuration
- 392 Restart screen
- 393 Troubleshooting
- 393 Problems Starting Up the BCM50a Integrated Router
- 394 Problems with the LAN LED
- 394 Problems with the LAN interface
- 395 Problems with the WAN interface
- 395 Problems with Internet access
- 396 Problems accessing an Internet Web site
- 396 Problems with the password
- 396 Problems with the WebGUI
- 396 Problems with Remote Management
- 397 Allowing Pop-up Windows, JavaScript and Java Permissions
- 397 Internet Explorer Pop-up Blockers
- 401 Internet Explorer JavaScript
- 403 Internet Explorer Java Permissions
- 405 Netscape Pop-up Blockers
- 409 Netscape Java Permissions and JavaScript
- 413 Log Descriptions
- 422 VPN/IPSec Logs
- 423 VPN Responder IPSec Log
- 431 Log Commands
- 431 Configuring what you want the BCM50a Integrated Router to log
- 432 Displaying Logs
- 433 Log Command Example
- 435 Index